JP2023086989A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with excellent presentation effect.SOLUTION: In a follow-up state in which flower petals 802 follow up the rotation of a rotation plate 830, a loose fit device 880 rotates in an inverse direction to the rotation direction of the rotation plate 830. Therefore, a displacement speed of the flower petals 802 can be caused to be visually recognized as a speed based on the loose fit device 880. Accordingly, compared to a speed at which the rotation plate 830 is actually driven, the speed of the flower petals 802 a player feels as physical feeling can be made greater.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 194

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion/contraction direction of the first displacement means (Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-229580 A

However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the performance effect. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with a good performance effect.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a base member, first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means. , a second displacement means capable of switching between a following state displacing in the displacement direction of said first displacement means and a non-following state displacing in a direction different from the displacement direction of said first displacement means. and a third displacement means that is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means at least when the second displacement means is in the follow-up state.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, the resistance means providing a transition between the following state and the non-following state. It is configured such that the switching point can be changed.

A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the resistance means is a driving force for operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. It is configured to be able to change its state.

According to the game machine according to claim 1, it is possible to improve the presentation effect.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, by changing the switching point of the presentation mode, it is possible to improve the presentation effect.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 2, the performance effect can be improved without adding a driving means.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6(a). (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a). FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6; FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device on line XIVc; It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. Fig. 10 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device; (a) is a front view of the driving device, and (b) is a side view of the driving device viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. 18. (a) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a release member and a rotary pawl member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 38; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); (a) is a side view of a slide claw member in a second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of a releasing member. (a) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of an operation device according to a fifth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and (c) is FIG. 59(a). is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc. 59(a) and 59(b) are sectional views of the vibrating device taken along line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59(a). 59(a) and 59(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive. (a) is a front perspective view of a right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. (a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). 67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a); is. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a); is. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member and a second transmission member of the left disk cam; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); (a) is a front view of a right disc cam in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. 74(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74(a), and (b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). is. (a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). (a) is a front view of an engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disc cam. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c); (e) is a front view of the right disc cam; (f) [ Fig. 78 ] is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in Fig. 78(e) ; 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to an outer frame; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened from an outer frame and a back pack is opened from the inner frame (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is closed with respect to an outer frame and a front frame is opened (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a front frame removed; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a movable binding member in which a released state and a fixed state of the movable binding member are shown side by side. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb of FIG. 94(a). (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95(a). (a) is a rear view schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and (c) is the movable binding member and the harness. FIG. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c). (a) And (b) is a front frame which illustrates a binding movable member and a harness typically, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and the upper surface schematic diagram of a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a first bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112(a). 113(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. 115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member taken along line CXVb-CXVb of FIG. 115(a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of an upper frame member; It is an exploded rear perspective view of an upper frame member. 1 is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly; FIG. Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly; (a) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and (c) is a view of FIG. FIG. 124D is a top view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame, and the upper side plate member taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa of FIG. 124(a); is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame and the upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (a) is a back view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. 127(a) and 127(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b). (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit. (a) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the ball launching unit showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device. 1 is a front perspective view of a metal member for cutting; FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball shooting unit viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). 147(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 10 is a partial front view of the ball launching unit, inner rail and outer rail after launching the ball; It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the production operation unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal motion device taken along line CLIV-CLIV of FIG. 153; Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor; (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; It is a back perspective view of a petal motion device, a drive-side arm member, and a driven-side arm member. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the back plate; It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a 2nd production|presentation member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive-side arm member, a slide plate, and a second effect member. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit in a ninth embodiment; It is a back perspective view of a passage formation unit. Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit according to a tenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a disc passage forming member in an eleventh embodiment. Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; (a) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of a loose fitting device according to a twelfth embodiment; (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal motion device. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment; 4 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of an operation device according to a thirteenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the operation device. (a) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, 203(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 203(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203(a). 87(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit according to the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward recess recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). FIG. FIG. 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206(a); 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in region CCVId of FIG. 206(a), and (e) is FIG. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the area CCVIe of (a);

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 are arranged to be operated by the player to hit the ball to the front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. Note that the operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 62, a general prize-winning port 63, a first prize-winning port 64, a second prize-winning port 640, a variable prize-winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. 1) is attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. etc. is fixed.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during probability variation) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol (to be described later) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the top, middle and bottom three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be, for example, one. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so in the variation display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 640 so as to pass the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 640 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A pair of out ports 71 are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motor 342 and voice coil motor 352 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged in the center of the inner frame 12 in the left-right direction (that is, the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction) when viewed from the front.

The operation device 300 is provided with a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable when pushed by the player, and is positioned in a region formed by a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. are placed. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

Between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a, a clearance is provided that is at least large enough for a finger to be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the fingertip is placed on the back side of the top surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 7(a). 7 is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7(b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a).

6 and 7 partially show the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces the vertical direction, and FIG. A state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in a second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and rearward is illustrated. Note that in FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340 . Details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player when, for example, a specific display (for example, a display of "Push button") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

Here, for example, if the tilting device 310 is pushed in by dropping the hand downward forcefully, as in the case of pushing a button that advances and retreats up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves forward depending on the degree of tilting. In this mode, the operation surface 312a1 is easily rubbed against the palm of the hand. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and to prevent the player from performing a pressing operation by dropping the hand downward forcefully.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertip near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward using the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to drop the hand vigorously downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

The difference in how the tilting device 310 looks from the player's point of view will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. In addition, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible in the first state from the player's point of view, while its area is reduced to such an extent that it becomes invisible in the second state. (the operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state.

In this embodiment, the area of the protective lens member 311i gradually increases in the process of changing from the first state to the second state. 12) is visually recognized gradually, the difference in the amount of light visible to the player between the first state and the second state (the degree of brightness and darkness) increases, and the difference between the first state and the second state increases. , the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum. Thus (by rotating around the wrist), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by dropping the palm downward with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the player to drop the hand downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft 314 on which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end.

As shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that imparts an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state move the tilting device 310 downward. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310 and the voice coil motor for applying the driving force outside the lower frame member 320, a large area inside the lower frame member 320 can be used for tilting. Device 310 can be housed in lower frame member 320 . Thereby, a large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at each of the left and right ends at the back side end (the far side end of the paper surface of FIG. 12), and a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1. A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member that has a recessed portion that is arranged to face the lower frame member 320 and has a large opening in the center, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 An upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and constitutes a link mechanism with the tilting device 310 to the tilting device 310. It mainly includes a driving device 340 that transmits a driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and protects the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from three sides, ie, the left-right direction and the rear.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface slope downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 slopes downward toward the front side. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end on the far side of the tilting device 310, and a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal portion 322, which is the tilting device 310. A lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from below, a left detection sensor 324L and a right detection sensor 324R that are arranged in pairs on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321, and a horizontal It is mainly provided with an opening 325 which is an opening formed by cutting a portion arranged on the lower side of the portion 322 .

The bottom plate portion 321 abuts on the tilting device 310 to determine the end of movement of the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321. be.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, detection holes 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right and an insertion hole 321c drilled symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed with a size that allows the projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 protrudes below the bottom plate portion 321, the tilting device 310 can be provided with a driving force in the linear motion direction.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole through which detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. The posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected by arranging the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the detection hole 321b in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R.

The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted therein, and the arm member Through-holes are formed up to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so that it does not move backward. By locking the torsion spring 315 with the locking portion 322a, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310 . In addition, the detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the separation distance (the position of the detection groove) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 is equal on the left and right.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor is equipped with a light projecting part that projects light and a light receiving part that receives the light from this light projecting part, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the part to be detected can be inserted. means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341 f of the drive device 340 , the rotary claw member 347 , and the like to enter the lower frame member 320 . Therefore, the lateral width thereof is made larger than the lateral width of the pair of rotary pawl members 347 .

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the driving device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f to the upper front side (see FIG. 17(b)), the driving device 341f is positioned after the LED device 341f passes through the opening 325. By pushing up 340, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the opening 325 is wider than the vertical width from the LED device 341f to the rotary claw member 347. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged to face the opening 331, which is large enough to catch the extended portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. and an upper bearing portion 332 configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom and an upper bearing portion 332 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 .

The protective cover device 350 is structured to be vertically divisible and covered in three directions except for the front side. A voice coil motor 352 that is supported by the bottom plate and arranged on the front side so that the vibration surface faces obliquely forward and upward, a left detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and a right side detection sensor 353L. A detection sensor 353R is mainly provided.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left-right center can be visually recognized.

The voice coil motor 352 is disposed in an assembled state (see FIG. 10) such that its vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 . As a result, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 . The disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 are arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether the detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R, and detecting that the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase. can be done.

In this embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, there are two specific phases detectable by the detection sensors 353L and 353R. be a type.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. 14(a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. FIG. 14(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device 310 along line XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14(a). 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 includes a case body 311 which is a box-shaped body having fan-shaped side surfaces and openings in the upper and lower sides, and the upper opening of the case body 311 is covered. Lid 312 fastened and fixed to case main body 311, spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side end of lid 312 and hanging down, and a mode sandwiched between the rear ends of case main body 311 and lid 312. a torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314; and a ring member BR1.

The case main body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening portion 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right sides of the opening portion 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending toward the center in the left-right direction from a flange projecting downward along the edge of the shaft 311c, and a concave portion 311d having a semicircular cross-section supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. , an insertion groove 311e which is a groove arranged at a position where both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. , a pair of left detection pieces 311gL and a right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) which are extended below the bottom plate portion 311a, and extension portions which are extended from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. a provision portion 311h, a protective lens member 311i which is arranged on the upper side of the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a, has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a bottom plate portion. 311a mainly includes an overhang projecting portion 311j projecting downward from the central portion in the left-right direction of the front side end portion of 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into surface contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member inserted through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17(b)) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to and from the drive device 340. Prepare.

The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. is longer than the right detecting piece 311gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL about 3° centered on the shaft portion 314 (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the push end (see FIG. 22) 23)), the left detection piece 311gL is projected more than the right detection piece 311gR.

The extended portion 311h projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i toward the front side, and projects to a position where it is engaged with the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). configured in a manner.

The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from above (see FIG. 14(a)) and a curved shape when viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 14(c)). The structure is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 can be easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhang projecting portion 311j projects perpendicularly from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 29), it is inserted through the transmission hole 321a and the tip projects downward from the lower frame member 320. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b connected to the top plate member 312a. and a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape and having a size to surround the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by its rigidity in the axial direction. While it is fixed inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such limitation is lifted, and the light from the LED device 341f can be widely irradiated.

The lens member 313 is made of a light-transmitting material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has a shape conforming to the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , and a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 at a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , provided.

Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17(a) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the drive device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. is a front exploded perspective view of the.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disk cams 344 (left disk cam 344L, right disk cam 344L, right disk cam 344R), an arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and an arm member 345 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341, and the first projecting portion 344c1 and the second A release member 346 that abuts on the overhanging portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, a rotary pawl member 347 that is coaxially and pivotally supported with the release member 346 and moves relative to the release member 346 as the release member 346 rotates, and the rotary pawl member 347 is tilted downward. A first spring SP1, which is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of releasing, and a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of separating the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 from each other. and a second spring SP2, which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 is formed at the same position of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is bent rearward on the left and right sides to form a U-shape when viewed from the top, and the plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is arranged to face the motor accommodating portion 341a. A shaft support hole 341b that supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that protrudes in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b in a manner having an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. , an extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, a lighting support portion 341e extending forward and upward from the motor housing portion 341a, and the lighting support portion 341e. and an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end and having an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f has a triangular-shaped member on its upper surface, and has a light-refracting portion (a light-refracting portion). This makes it possible to evenly irradiate the light from the LED device 341f upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing portion 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341a.

The fixed member 342a supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

One end of the arm member 345 has a perfectly circular shaft support hole 345a that is supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the other end of the arm member 345 has a rectangular shaft support hole 345a. and a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the opposite end of the shaft support hole 345a abuts against the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end of the guide hole 345a is positioned so that the disk cam 344 rotates more than once. It is formed in a position sufficient to allow rotation.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. FIG. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which disc cams 344 (see FIG. 18) are fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotating gear of the drive motor 342. a movable clutch 343c capable of switching whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction; a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b; Mainly provide

The cylindrical member 343a has fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 each having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. be. Here, in detail, the fixed portion 343a2 is formed with a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b has a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and a clutch in which unevenness along the axial direction is formed at the circumferential position of the shaft center from the surface facing the movable clutch 343c. and a portion 343b2.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 is perfectly circular, even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and unevenness along the axial direction is formed at the circumferential position of the shaft center from the surface facing the transmission gear 343b. and a clutch portion 343c2 configured to be engaged with the clutch portion 343b2.

In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are composed of mountain-shaped protrusions and recesses having a top angle of approximately 100°.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, relative rotation of the movable clutch 343c with respect to the cylindrical member 343a is disabled, so that the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged. As a result, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. Accordingly, by rotating the drive motor 342, it becomes possible to rotate the disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18).

The movable clutch 343c is normally arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when an axial load is applied to the movable clutch 343c, it is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 so as to separate from the transmission gear 343b.

Disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. In the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R are substantially mirror images of each other, and the only difference is the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR. , and the description of the right disc cam 344R is omitted.

20(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. be. 20(a) and 20(b) illustrate a state in which the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions protruding from both sides of a perfectly circular disc, and is positioned at the center of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a protruding inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b protruding inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centering on the central shaft portion 344a, and an outer side of the circular rib 344b. An engaging rib 344c projecting inward as a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344b and having two portions projecting radially outward at two locations, and an outer rib between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d projecting in a cylindrical shape in the direction and connected to the arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL drilled near the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and otherwise has a shape that mirrors the shape of the left disk cam 344L. .

The center shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross-section whose inner periphery is engaged with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19), and whose outer periphery is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). Configured. That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disc cam 344 is supported by the shaft support hole 341b. As a result, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c projects radially outward at a position shifted by 80° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. a protruding portion 344c1; At a position deviated by an angle θ2 (angle θ2=150° in this embodiment), the second projecting portion 344c3 projects radially outward again, and the second projecting portion 344c3 extends at an angle θ3 (angle θ3=20°), and a second lead-in portion 344c4 that retracts radially inward at a shifted position.

In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at the position with the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 are arranged as a pair on the left and right, and the configurations thereof are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are front views of the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 21(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated with respect to the release member 346 to the terminal position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 21(b) shows the release member 346 A small angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

The state in which the releasing member 346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the projecting pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). state) (see FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and includes a shaft support hole 346a supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), A protruding pin 346b projecting in the plate thickness direction in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and from the shaft support hole 346a and an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting with the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is configured to contact the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the engaging portion 346d is curved, so that the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

The rotary pawl member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. An elongated guide hole 347b is drilled along the guide pin 346b of the release member 346 (drilled with a size that includes the movement locus of the pin 346b), and the end of the second spring SP2. a hook-shaped portion 347d protruding downward at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a; and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). Mainly includes a pull-down hole 347e drilled in the.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21(a), the release member 346 is arranged at the end position of the rotation claw member 347 in the backward rolling direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21(a)). Therefore, in the large angle state, when a load is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the downward direction, the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 rotate together in the backward rotation direction. When a load in the upward direction is applied to 346d, only the releasing member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotating claw member 347 until reaching the small angle state shown in FIG. 21(b).

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example when the player performs the pushing operation when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In addition, in the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 22 to the terminal position, and FIG. 23 shows the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state. Also, FIGS. 22 to 24 show an example of a player's hand repeatedly operating the tilting device 310 .

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 is subjected to an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked on the hook portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347. As shown in FIG. As a result, the posture of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the tilting device 310 is always biased in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22).

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 23) by about 3 degrees. In this state, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection states of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is hit repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated. is not returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at an incomplete position, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this can be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 , but in this embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 moves against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 . It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) for pushing down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342 . As a result, there are problems such as an increase in product cost and an inability to save space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of effecting by vibrating motion is arranged at a position facing the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. be.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 310 can be quickly restored without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. can.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player presses the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player cannot Since unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and if the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is turned on. By driving the motor 352, the load for returning the tilting device 310 can be improved only when the player performs a repeated hitting operation. This allows the player to comfortably operate the tilting device 310 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts to reciprocate vertically from the first state (tilting operation) will be described. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).

25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed back and forth from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the terminal position, and FIG. The plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c contacts the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. is illustrated. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. As shown in FIG. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, it is possible to ensure a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c serves as a rib of the lid 312 to improve the strength, and in the first state of the tilting device 310, the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f can be adjusted.

As shown in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in direction), the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 presses down the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, thereby rotating the releasing member 346 in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotary pawl member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction until it is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 .

The posture change of the releasing member 346 is continued until the disc cam 344 is rotated until the first retracted portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 346d face each other. It rises by the biasing force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the far side from the rotation shaft of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345 , the upward movement of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344 .

As shown in FIG. 27, when the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 27) and the first retraction portion 344c2 of the disk cam 344 passes through the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, By the biasing force of the first spring SP1, the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27), and the rotating claw member 347 can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 27). 25). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (upper angle in FIG. 27). 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area where the protective lens member 311i can be seen from the player's point of view increases compared to the tilting device 310 in the first state. , the light from the LED device 341f can also be emitted in the front direction (the direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the lighting effect can be improved.

In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned ON, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating motion can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, from the state shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 is seen by the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side of the LED device 341f (on the left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. , and not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 28).

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light from the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also emitted in the direction toward the player (frontal direction), and the illumination range is widened by the lens member 313 .

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

As shown in FIG. 29, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. When the member 347 rotates backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and the tilting device 310 is subsequently pushed in, the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d. Return to engageable position (rotate forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state of vertically moving the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 28, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the tilting device 310. .

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibrating operation (an operation that repeats movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 310 can be performed.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force for assisting the upward movement of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 24), and the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the pushing end position to perform a vibration effect. can be used for

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 moves from the lower frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the push end.

Therefore, compared to a game machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, the player who pushed the tilting device 310 can check whether or not the voice coil motor 352 vibrates at the end of the pushing operation when the tilting device 310 is pushed. can be comprehended only by

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big win does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 . Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only when the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to perform a vibration effect when a big win is confirmed, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 value as a look-ahead means of As a result, the tilting device 310 can be easily operated by the player, and the value of the tilting device 310 as operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (reversed in FIG. The driving device 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating it clockwise) by a predetermined amount.

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first projecting portion 344c1 contacts the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second projecting portion 344c3 contacts the engaging rib 344c.

29, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) so that the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d, and then reversely rotates. 29 can be returned to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load is applied to the releasing member 346 in a direction to push up the releasing member 346, and only the releasing member 346 can be rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 29) while the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained. can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting motion) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( Second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (tilting operation) to reciprocate up and down after passing through the second state.

31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, and the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 are rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. FIG. 32 shows a state where the disk cam 344 has rotated a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 31 and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state, and FIG. 33 shows the state shown in FIG. 34 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 reciprocates from the position shown in FIG. Also, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 moves toward the disk cam 344 via the arm member 345. The tilting device 310 can be lifted with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 310 can be placed in the second state (posture in which the disc cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 attempts to reach the second state from the state of FIG. It is possible to prevent the situation that the tilting device 310 takes a long time to reach the second state because the cam 344 is slow to rotate by a predetermined angle.

As shown in FIG. 33, from the state shown in FIG. 32, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32). 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 is seen by the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side of the LED device 341f (on the left side in FIG. 33), so that the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is oriented forward and backward. , and not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 33).

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, two types of vertical motion (tilting motion), namely, the vertical motion shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical motion shown in FIG. This can be done immediately after releasing the restriction on the upward movement of the device 310 . Therefore, it is possible to create two modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342 .

As a result, compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation each time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big win), and the player's attention to the tilting device 310. degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load to lift the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. As shown in FIG. The rotating pawl member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rolling direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 34) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down shown in FIG. can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the operation of setting the disk cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by the rotary pawl member 347 after the pushing operation by the player will be described. do. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two kinds of vertical motions (tilting motions) of the tilting device 310, or to perform one of them continuously.

35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 35 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 36, after rotating cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) beyond the state shown in FIG. 37, the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the sensor 353L is in the ON state is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 346d. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346 to change the posture of the release member 346. It stops, and the rotary pawl member 347 is maintained in the posture shown in FIG.

35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35) to release the engagement between the engaging rib 344c and the releasing member 346. Regulation of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

35, the disc cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotating cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35), thereby , the drive device 340 can be in a second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the vertical motion (tilting motion) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2, as described above.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can perform an action of keeping his hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if there is no special display such as "long press". be.

This is, for example, an action that occurs when the user forgets to release the hand that pushed the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the performance. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating motion (normal/reverse switching motion) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (tilting motion) within the range of the angle D2, the attitude of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disc cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350, as shown in FIG. (See FIG. 14) is controlled to stop the rotation of the disc cam 344 (stop the drive of the drive motor 342) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned ON (see FIG. 14).

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the player's hand is placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 does not move upward. A change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the player's hand continues to be placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, and the driving motor 342 is reciprocated (normal/reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

It should be noted that when the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately reversely rotate and return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the driving device 340 can be quickly returned to the second initial state, and no unnecessary load is applied to the driving device 340, so that the motor life of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing breakage of the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of operation device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 38, the player's hand holding and fixing the tilting device 310 in the second state is shown in phantom lines, and FIG. 39 shows the upper member of the body cover 351. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b. be.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be idly rotatable with respect to the transmission shaft 343a that fixes the disc cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts to drive with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the transmission gear 343b is driven through the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the transmission gear 343b is disengaged from the movable clutch 343c, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

Note that when the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state by rotating the disk cam 344 once due to the structure of the operation device 300. FIG. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 does not turn ON while the driving motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360°) (when the tilting device 310 does not turn to the first state). In addition, it is determined that the player is intentionally performing an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and is notified by, for example, displaying on the third symbol display device 81 to stop the gripping operation. While doing so, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation, and only at that time, it is possible to notify to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the driving motor 342 early to prevent failure. be able to.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disk cam 344, which is in phase with the movable clutch 343c, are shifted. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (with the number of steps, etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

In contrast, in the present embodiment, it is possible to specify that the driving device 340 has entered the first initial state by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 has been turned ON. , by resuming the control of the drive motor 352 (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342) with that state as the initial position, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, Control can be performed in a state in which the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are matched again.

As a result, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, there is a discrepancy between the motion to be performed by the tilting device 310 by controlling the rotation of the drive motor 342 and the motion actually performed by the tilting device 310. prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform an effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that idles with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be explained below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 40 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CCW. 42 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CW.

As shown in FIG. 41, when disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CCW, tilting device 310 moves through the first state shown in FIG. 40 to the second state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG.

This is not only because the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the releasing member 346, the fixation by the rotary pawl member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below. A load in the direction of pushing up the member 347 is not generated. Therefore, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is never released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, the operations from FIG. 38 to the first state shown in FIGS. is a different operation from either FIG. 41 or FIG.

For example, the difference in the operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39), but the drive noise caused by the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in change, the player will notice the mode of the control being performed, and the player will grasp the effect that will be executed from now on, which may diminish the player's interest. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the driving motor 342, the load on the driving motor 342 increases, and the durability of the driving motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. Since only the direction is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of rotation due to the drive mode (vibration, sound, etc.). For this reason, for example, when the degree of expectation for the performance changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the driving motor 342 rotates, the player can confirm whether the tilting device 310 is raised or maintained in the first state. Since it is possible to grasp the change in the degree of expectation, it is possible for the player to understand the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. can be directed to watch over

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to suppress the tilting device 310 from being held by the player. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

In addition, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the load given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. The durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, regarding the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 44 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340, and the first The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle that does not allow the projecting portion 344c1 to pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by imaginary lines. .

As shown in FIG. 44, when the release member 346 is pushed down by the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are engaged with the releasing member 346. By reciprocatingly rotating the disk cam 344 while maintaining a positional relationship that does not pass through 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346. FIG.

In this case, the attitude of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 44) as the attitude of the release member 346 changes, so that the tilting device 310 can be operated in the manner shown in FIG. In the vertical movement, even if the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 does not engage with the rotating claw member 347, and when the player releases the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves to the first state (rotation). It is possible to implement an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is moved upward from the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310 and the vertical motion is continued.

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the above-described first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. Manipulation of the device 300 can have non-traditional meanings. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first motion mode or the second motion mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the robot was moving up and down in the third motion mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first action mode and the second action mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state). case) is compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (the case where the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). If a difference is provided that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, the player recognizes the degree of expectation as to whether or not a big win will occur not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since it is possible to obtain opportunities, it is possible to provide many timings at which the player pays attention to the operation device 300 . Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained when the releasing member 346 is pushed up has been described. In addition, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG.

45(a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45(b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45(c) is a side view of the release member 2346. It is a side view.

46(a) and 46(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, showing interlocking between the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. FIG. .

FIG. 46(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated with respect to the release member 2346 to the terminal position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. A small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is shown. The state in which the releasing member 2346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the protruding pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the long guide hole 347b). state) (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a releasing member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a rotating plate member 2347 as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47). and a slide claw member 2348 disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 interposed therebetween and configured to be slidable along an arc track centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). , is mainly provided. In the releasing member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, the same reference numerals are assigned to the components having the same functions as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the slide claw member 2348 includes a curved portion 2348a formed in a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and an upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b protruding in a hook-like shape (to the left in FIG. 45) and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are stacked in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 47A). Mainly, a reinforcing portion 2348c formed in a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a and a projecting pin 2348d projecting cylindrically toward the releasing member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Prepare.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portions 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is slidably movable with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 in a state in which it is fitted in the rail portion 2347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is provided on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that attracts a bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface of the rotary plate member 2347 opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is wider than the curved portion 2348a. , which reinforce the slide claw member 2348 .

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted through the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted through and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. When the releasing member 2346 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, the projecting pin 2348d is pushed against the side surface of the functional long hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides.

The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, a pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f for guiding the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide. and a support long hole 2347g through which the projecting pin 2348d of the pawl member 2348 is inserted.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347. Side surfaces of the pair of plate-like portions facing each other are arranged such that the rotating plate member 2347 moves forward (see FIG. 3). 46 counterclockwise), it is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47).

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support long hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid while the projecting pin 2348d is inserted through the long support hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the long support hole 2347g. wobble can be suppressed.

The release member 2346 includes a functional elongated hole 2346e that is elongated in the thickness direction, in addition to the pivot hole 346a, the projecting pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engaging portion 346d. .

The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole having a width slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d of the slide pawl member 2348, and has a curved shape along an arc centered on the pivot hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole portion 2346e1 and a second long hole portion 2346e2 extending from one end of the first long hole portion 2346e in an inclined direction toward the opposite direction of the pivot hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and changes state between a large angle state and a small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 moves along the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. slide to move.

Since the functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d, there is no time delay with respect to the movement of the releasing member 2346, and the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 is the same as the movement of the projecting pin 2348d. reflected in speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide claw member 2348 slides quickly.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the projecting pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

That is, in this embodiment, even if the slide claw member 2347 slides due to the rotation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 slides when the slide claw member 2347 is pulled in the large angle state. No movement. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310 .

FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the attitude of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 47 shows a state in which the second retraction portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is arranged below the engagement portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. 48 clockwise) and the release member 2346 is returned by the biasing force of the second spring SP2.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 2310 exerts a large load on the slide claw member 2348 because the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released due to the change in posture of the tilting device 2310. you will not be

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide pawl member 2348 slides upward in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are magnetically attracted to each other, if the releasing member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by causing the slide claw member 2348 to slide at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the tilting device 2310 is released from the upward movement restriction by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves upward can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disk cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the biasing force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the number of operation modes increases, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means for foreseeing by associating the operation modes with the degree of expectation of the big win. Attention can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is lifted by lifting the slide claw member 2348 as shown in FIG. Since the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the magnetic attraction between the load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player puts his or her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand when the regulation by the slide claw member 2348 is released. Also (even if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, the player's hand will be lifted in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner.

As a result, when the tilting device 2310 is lifted, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the upward direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by putting his hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the degree of expectation of a big win, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of foreseeing. can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. In the first embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. is configured in such a manner that detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed by the player, or pushed by the player. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 includes a right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case main body 3311, and the same position as the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). and a left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the axis and arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction. The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR, and has a shorter extension length than the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

51(a) and 51(b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. 51(a) shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed. 51(a) and 51(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R. None (the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the end of pushing, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, while the right detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

By detecting changes in the states of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing, it is possible to detect the state in the middle of pushing. , or on the way back.

That is, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in a state changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52(a) and 52(b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. Note that FIG. 52(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, and FIG. 52(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the end of pushing to the first state. . 51(a) and 51(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted through the right detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the ON state).

As shown in FIG. 52(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state arranged at the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L while the left detection sensor 324L is inserted. , the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in a state changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to provide an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is applied to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving downward. Collision of the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving up can provide a load for lifting the tilting device 3310 more effectively than colliding.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of the detection sensors 324L and 324R. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when it is not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the upward speed of the tilting device 3310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 3310 from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 3310, the rising motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 is more stable than when the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the repeated hitting operation of the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably performed.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. In the first embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. 3 detects the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 while it is changing from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k projecting in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding projecting portion 311j of the case body 4311. As shown in FIG.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) provided on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This is a portion for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating the depression operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 54(a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54(b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the state shown in FIG. It is shown passing down sensor 4321e. 54(a) and 54(b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown in phantom lines for easy understanding. Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side portion of the bottom plate portion 4321. As shown in FIGS. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler-type sensors, and are arranged in such a manner that the detection groove is oriented in a direction that allows the front detection piece 4311k to pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged on an arc orbit around the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310 at intervals of 20°.

When the state shown in FIG. 54(a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 54(b) by the player pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k detects the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321d. 4321e in order. By detecting the timing interval of the passage, it is possible to determine whether the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 is large or small, and whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 is selected based on the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the length of the push is long (because the acceleration period is long). The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no means of deceleration, the tilting device 4310 must be made strong as a safety measure for when the player pushes with all his might, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. A challenge arises.

It is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that exerts a biasing force on the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is positioned near the push end, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak strength or a player who decides to perform the pressing operation softly, the increased reaction force in the vicinity of the pressing position becomes a burden on the pressing operation, and the player is likely to feel fatigued. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e determine whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 based on the timing interval between switching between the ON state and the OFF state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, when the interval between timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively, is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned on. While it is not driven, if the timing interval described above is shorter than the predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in a manner that it is driven.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily moved even with a weak force. Push operation is possible.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, the reaction force against the tilting device 4310 includes not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of pushing. can be added. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 protrudes below the lower frame member 4320. Then, the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in such a manner that it is pushed out in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310 .

As a result, compared to the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

55(a) and 55(b) are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. FIG. 55(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55(b) shows a state where the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end. .

55(a) and 55(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines. Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 protrudes convexly in the middle of reaching the end of pushing from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the projecting portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 becomes the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is retracted. It is possible to consume the force of the pushing operation to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure that applies a load by friction like a disc brake, but a structure that applies a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55(a), the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, so the state shown in FIG. By gradually increasing the current supplied to the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state, the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, the tilting device 4310 decelerates from the first state to the end of pushing while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other. You can improve the effect.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the tilting device 4310 is placed at the push end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352 .

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the voice coil motor 352 vibrates (moves in the extension direction and in the contraction direction repeatedly). As a result, after the tilting device 4310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310 can be performed.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position to perform a vibration effect.

Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68. FIG.

In the first embodiment, by vibrating the voice coil motor 352, the vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes the tilting device 310, but the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment , a drive motor 5411 for rotating a weight member 5412 arranged at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG.

56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the operation device 5300 has a lower frame member 320 as a lower frame member 5320 and a drive device 5340 as a drive device 5340, unlike the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. Along with this, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350 . The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

A vibrating device 5400 having a drive motor 5411 is arranged on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch is arranged on the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 contains a transmission device 5410 for rotationally driving a fan-shaped weight member 5412, the transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is made of a flexible material. and a flexible member 5420 formed in the shape of a bottomed dish with an open upper surface, which accommodates the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 in a partitioned manner, and is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. 5430 and .

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotationally driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a portion corresponding to the pivot of the fan pivotally supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. and are mainly provided.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of left and right fixed portions 5411a formed from a metallic material in a flange shape on the side surface on which the shaft protrudes.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported with respect to the rotating shaft of the driving motor 5411 . Therefore, when the driving motor 5411 rotates, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 changes, and the driving motor 5411 is configured to vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body portion 5421 in the shape of a cylindrical container in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the side opposite to the side into which the drive motor 5411 is inserted. A pair of rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding in the left and right direction and downward in the radial direction of the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body 5421 are connected to each other. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a pair of projecting leg portions 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421 in the form of columns.

The main body portion 5421 has the same depth as the length of the drive motor 5411 in the axial direction, and has a depth of a container shape. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the body portion 5421, the shaft side end face of the drive motor 5411 and the opening side end face of the body portion 5421 are formed on the same plane. Also, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423 .

The rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are formed on the left and right sides by the amount of the posture maintaining portions 5423 arranged on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance is greater than that of the rib-like leg portion 5422 on the lower side.

Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is projectingly provided in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 can be made finer.

In the assembled state, the housing member 5430 includes a first housing portion 5431 housing the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420, and a second housing portion adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 and housing the weight member 5412. 5432 and a recessed groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface of the connecting surface of the first accommodating portion 5431 and the second accommodating portion 5432 .

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is determined by inserting the flexible member 5420 until the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 touches the bottom and releasing the load applied during insertion (assembly load released state). The depth is such that the projecting leg portion 5424 protrudes.

The depth of the second housing portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 and the flexible member. The depth is such that it interferes with the rotational trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the weight member 5420 is deformed (in an assembly load state).

The recessed groove 5433 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth extending slightly below the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembly load state. be.

59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59(a), and FIG. ) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59(a). In addition, in FIG.59(a), the part corresponding to the vibration apparatus 5400 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. Also, in FIG. 59(a), the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the player pushes three degrees from the first state, The end region S52, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed in the end position of the push, is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), a projecting leg portion 5424 is projected in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the circular arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as a rotation axis. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the maximum amount of deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56).

As shown in FIG. 59( b ), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load-released state in which no load is applied to the projecting leg portion 5424 .

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the projecting legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the extension direction. Therefore, since the projecting leg portion 5424 can be evenly pushed in on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left or right (inclining to the left or right in the plane of FIG. 59(b)) when pushed. The protruding leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a pair of through holes 5321d into which the projecting leg portions 5424 can be inserted. Since the through-hole 5321d has a lateral width slightly larger than the diameter of the projecting leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the bottom surface of the tilting device 310 is projected. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, the lateral deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 can be suppressed. Therefore, deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 can be suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 can be easily moved downward (downward in FIG. 59B) together with the protruding leg portion 5424 .

60(a) and 60(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 along line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59(a). Note that FIG. 60(a) shows the assembly load released state, and FIG. 60(b) shows the protruding leg portion 5424 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the end region S52 (see FIG. 59(a)). The assembled load state after being pushed inwardly of the first receiving portion 5431 is illustrated. Note that the outlines of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), a load is applied to the vibrating device 5400 from the assembly load release state, and when the assembly load state is reached, the projecting legs 5424 and the lower rib-like legs As 5422 deforms, drive motor 5411 and weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. 310 can mitigate the impact when it collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57). Moreover, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the raised end, see FIG. 38) The rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the rising motion of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is effectively used, so that the tilting device 310 is more stable than when the tilting device 310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the tilting device 310 can be smoothly hit repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not contact the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in the assembly load-released state, vibration due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 and are prevented from being transmitted to the housing member 5430 . This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411 .

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the assembly load state, the body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is vertically displaced by deformation of the upper projecting leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422. Constructed in an acceptable manner.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being more vertically compressed, and the rib-like leg portion 5422 hardens slightly. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

In addition, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portions 5422 extend along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and are spaced horizontally from the central axis at uniform intervals. Since the flexible members 5420 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, when the flexible members 5420 move downward, the radially outer ends of the rib-like leg portions 5422 move to the left and right outward (at the connection position between the main body portion 5421 and the rib-like leg portions 5422). (Refer to FIG. 60(b)). In this case, since the projecting direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can act in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, the lateral load that may occur when the weight member 5421 collides with the second housing portion 5432 is reduced by the elastic force of the rib-like leg portion 5422 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421. can be effectively absorbed. As a result, it is possible to suppress displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction.

Figures 61(a) and 61(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of Figure 59(a).

FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) show the assembly load state, FIG. 61(a) shows the state where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and FIG. In b), the state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. 61(a) and 61(b) show the vibrating device 5400 in a state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and occupies the termination region S52.

The operation of transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is positioned upward in the assembly load state, the driving motor 5411 rotates to a position where the distance from the lower base of the second housing portion 5432 is the distance Q1. Axes are placed. In this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412 abuts (rubbes) the second housing portion 5432 . Therefore, the vibration caused by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes compared to the state in which the assembly load is released, and a different kind of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432, a force that moves the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61(b)) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 move toward and away from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward). ) can be easily directed. This repulsive force causes the flexible member 5420 to move upward together with the drive motor 5411 supporting the weight member 5412, causing the flexible member 5420 to move the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (along the movement direction of the tilting device 310). direction) can be reinforced.

In this way, the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is divided into the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. By combining the generated forces, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted.

That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 during the period from when the tilting device 310 starts contacting the projecting leg portion 5424 until it moves toward the termination region S52 (see FIG. 59(a)). , and after the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As shown in FIG. As a result, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the end region S52, so that the tilting device 310 can be easily operated and the impact during the pushing operation can be reduced. This adjustment can be performed while the drive motor 5411 is kept rotating. Therefore, complicated control can be made unnecessary.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57). ) is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km/h), and the placement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is greater than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 provides the tilting device 310 with a It is desired to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is moved in advance so as to assume a downward posture (see FIG. 61(b)).

As a result, the lowering end of the driving motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotary shaft is raised by the radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 . As a result, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61(a)) (when it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61(a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, the compression dimension of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the driving motor 5411 can be increased when the projecting leg 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although not described in the present embodiment, by keeping the driving motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61(a)), the force pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the force due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, contact between the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320 , not between the tilting device 310 . Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and to widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, the portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing can be moved. Vibration can be transmitted to the player through the device. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the weight member 5412 is activated only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembly load state. and the housing member 5430 abut to generate vibration.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed. Vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where vibration is generated from the body.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the hand is released immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (pulse pushing state), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. In this case, there is a possibility that vibration cannot be generated (vibration is not started in time) before the player releases his/her hand, and the player may not be able to experience the effects of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 rotates before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and preparations for vibration generation are completed. As a result, the player can experience the effect of the vibration.

In addition, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431 . Therefore, even if the driving motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

Therefore, by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed, a state in which vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized.

Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The driving device 5340 differs from the driving device 340 in the first embodiment in the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 . Others are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive 5340. FIG. As shown in FIG. 62, an elongated concave portion C1 is formed in the central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344, which are composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Since the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 5344L are configured in symmetrical shapes, only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of clamping arm portions A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R has, at its center position, a support cylinder portion P1 that extends from the disk portion toward the side where the circular rib 344b is arranged, and a support cylinder portion P1 that extends in the axial direction of the support cylinder portion P1. , the long hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion in an axially symmetric long hole shape, and the axis of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1 to a position about half the extension distance. It mainly includes a pair of holding arm portions A1 extending from the end portion of the direction toward the disk portion side along the axial direction.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343 . The support cylinder portion P1 includes a deformed portion P1a that is not recessed in the long hole recess C1 and remains in the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1.

The deformed portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged to sandwich the long hole recessed portion C1, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). configured as a part to

The long hole recess C1 is formed with a width dimension slightly longer than the width dimension of the clamping arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the recessed cross section of the long hole recess C1.

In addition, the opposing surface of the long hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed as a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed as an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, the cylindrical member 5343a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disk cam 5344. As shown in FIG.

The holding arm portion A1 includes an engagement convex portion A1a that protrudes from the surface of the pair of arm portions facing the opposing arm in a direction approaching the opposing arm. . The engagement projection A1a engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when coupled with the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disc cam 5344. As shown in FIG.

The shape of the tip of the engaging projection A1a is configured to match the circular arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, the radial overlap length (Fig. 65 (b) length in the left-right direction) can be ensured to be long.

The engaging projection A1a has a recessed surface portion C2 (a long hole recessed portion) recessed along the shaft near the shaft, and the side surface on the side closer to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disc cam 5344R. It is arranged at a position that is the plane position with the side surface on the opening side of C1.

As a result, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement projection A1a can be completed on the support cylinder P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) than the recessed surface portion C2 (FIG. 65(b)). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63(b)), compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted in the cylindrical member 5343a, the length by which the cylindrical member 5343a protrudes from the recessed surface portion C2 is determined by the e-ring. can be shortened by the thickness of (see FIG. 65(b)).

In addition, there is no need to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for sliding the e-ring in contact with the surface) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the width of the recess (the width in the radial direction) of the recessed surface portion C2. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. FIG. A difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

The columnar member 5343a is formed at both ends of the fixing portion 5343a1, which has a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 5344, and the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in the front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the cross-sectional shape, a fitting groove 5343a3 which is a groove into which the e-ring is fitted and which positions the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction by the e-ring, and its fitting groove. An engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove in which the engaging convex portion A1a of the holding arm portion A1 engages when the disk cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in the 5343a3, is mainly used. Prepare. The fitting grooves 5343a3 are arranged laterally outside the pair of plates in which the pivot holes 341b are formed in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted through the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides under the biasing force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

By fitting the e-ring into the fitting groove 5343a3 from behind, a portion of the cylindrical member 5343a whose diameter is partially increased is formed by the e-ring. The diameter of member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter uniform, the columnar member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62) by a predetermined amount, and then the e-ring is fitted, thereby adjusting the axial direction of the columnar member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b with the e-ring. In addition, the e-ring can prevent the disk cam 5344 from axially dislocating.

Due to the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 described above, the disk cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is positioned on the side of the end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 on which the engagement protrusion A1a is arranged. It is inserted from the opposite end to the position where the engaging projection A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engagement protrusions A1a are inserted into the engagement grooves 5343a4 to a position where the engagement protrusions A1a are fitted, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engagement protrusions A1a The clamping arms A1 are elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between them is increased. After that, when the tip of the columnar member 5343a passes through the engagement protrusion A1a, the engagement protrusion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted into the engagement groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only for one-touch assembly, but also as a destruction prevention structure in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG.

FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. FIG. 65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66(b) is a right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). 5344R is a cross-sectional view.

Note that FIG. 66 illustrates the right disc cam 5344R after being deformed when the player gives an overload to the unloaded right disc cam 5344R illustrated in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the columnar member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position spaced apart from the disc portion of the right disc cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, only the engaging protrusion A1a engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when the columnar member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, the columnar member 5343a can be tilted about the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), since the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of clamping arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a to axial tilt displacement is reduced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(c), the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disc cam 5344R extend along the axial direction of the right disc cam 5344R in the direction in which the supporting cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected. , the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a against axial tilting displacement is increased.

Therefore, when the player forcibly holds down (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). is applied), the deformation direction of the right disk cam 5344R with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R deforms in the direction of less resistance, so as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, The disk portion is axially tilted and deformed about a support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R compared to the position shown in FIG. 65(a).

67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 67(b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 67(b), illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345 and the releasing member 346 are illustrated. Further, in FIG. 67(a), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R in a state in which it is perpendicularly inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is illustrated by a solid line. The outline of the folded state is illustrated by imaginary lines.

FIG. 67(a) shows the second state of the tilting device 310, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310, and an enlarged state of the vicinity of the connecting pin 344d. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the player restricts the displacement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the axial tilting deformation described above, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after its axial tilt deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to axial tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating and the outer circumference of the right disc cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd, the arm member 345 is supported by the arm member 345 by the dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are displaced from each other, and the right disc cam 5344R is deformed to be axially tilted in order to absorb this displacement.

Since the connecting pin 344d falls in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. The position is shifted along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This positional deviation can partially absorb the positional deviation between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the right disc cam 5344R by the dimension Rd. 342 (see FIG. 62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 while holding the tilting device 310 fixedly. In this case, the load applied to arm member 345 connecting disk cam 5344 and tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates backward (in the direction of the arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on disc cam 5344 via release member 346 . In this case, the rotation claw member 347 is blocked by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates forward (the direction of the arrow CCW, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 acts against it. acts on the disc cam 5344 via the releasing member 346 and the rotating pawl member 347 . In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the releasing member 346 and the disk cam 5344 are in contact with each other and the releasing member 346 moves along the direction of movement of the disk cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 or Among the elastic forces of any of the second springs SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the disk cam 5344 can be increased. As a result, the load applied to the disk cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. can be reduced regardless of the direction of rotation.

In this embodiment, the right disk cam 5344R is formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). ), regardless of the rotation direction of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the positional deviation direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345), the right disc cam 5344R can be deformed in the same manner. It can be axially deformed by resistance.

FIG. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 68(b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. In addition, in FIG.68(b), illustration of the protective cover apparatus 350 is abbreviate|omitted. In addition, in FIG. 68(a), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R, which is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343, is shown in solid lines. The outline of the folded state is illustrated by imaginary lines.

FIG. 68(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and is tilted downward by an angle D2. A player's hand is shown holding a

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the player grips the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is in motion, the right disk cam 5344R is held regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not. , the tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The items described for the right disc cam 5344R also apply to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67(b) and 68(b), according to this embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, causing an overload. Then, the right disc cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to quickly notice the occurrence of overload. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period in which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right detection sensor 353R. However, when the player holds the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated. An overload is detected because the input to 353R does not change.

In this case, since it takes a period of time to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle in a state in which no overload occurs until the occurrence of overload is detected, there is a problem that the detection of overload is delayed. there were.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the overload occurs. Occurrences can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a method of detection, for example, a method using an informing device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c is exemplified (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66(a)). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input portion, and is arranged in pairs at positions where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arm portions A1 and the engagement rib 344c intersect. and the input portion protrudes toward the support cylinder portion P1. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65(b)), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are formed in a contact relationship (see FIG. 65(b)). 66(b)). Accordingly, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to quickly determine whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, an operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 344c and 344c are composed of separate members and configured to be relatively rotatable with each other. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG.

69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disc member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2 and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disc cam 6344L. is. Although the configuration of the right disc cam 6344R is also different from that of the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R is configured in a mirror image of the left disc cam 6344L. , and the description of the right disc cam 6344R is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L is provided with a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL as in the first embodiment, and is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a. It includes a disk member 6344L1 that is coaxially supported and rotates relative to the ring member 6344L2.

The disk member 6344L1 has the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment arranged at the center of the disk portion, and is spaced radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided protruding along.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring-shaped body 6344g having the same outer diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. and receiving gear teeth 6344i formed on and disposed radially outwardly at the thickened portion thereof.

Since the inner diameter of the ring main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b, in the assembled state, the ring main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, thereby forming the central shaft portion 344a. A ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around .

The axial end surface of the annular main body 6344g on the disk member 6344L1 side contacts the annular rib 6344f. As a result, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced compared to the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the surface is in contact with the disk member 6344L1. Therefore, relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i meshes with the speed reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348 . Therefore, the rotation of the second transmission device 6348 causes the ring member 6344L2 to rotate. In the present embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1 (the disk member 6344L1 rotates once while the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times). , the number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c and the receiving gear teeth 6344i are set).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and includes an auxiliary column member 6348a that is arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a, and the auxiliary column member 6348a. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a reduction transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. 6348c and .

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the tilting device 310 is lifted in a plurality of ways after the tilting device 310 is unlocked from the rotating claw member 347 in the first state.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 6300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 has made one rotation in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. , after rotating more than one rotation, the state in which the disk member 6344R1 rotates backward by the amount exceeded), and the state in which the disk member 6344R1 rotates ⅓ in the backward rotation direction (direction of arrow CW). is illustrated. FIG. 73 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 moves upward.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 immediately (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) moves up, the reaching position is the second state. It was limited to the position to be arranged (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the disc member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other. can be changed, and the types of reachable positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

72, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and is tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). In this manner, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) is released from the state shown in FIG. 344 rotation) can be varied.

As a result, for example, when the tilting device 310 is configured to change the degree of expectation for the performance depending on the difference in the height to which the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 can be increased. can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the degree of expectation is increased when the tilting device 310 rises higher or when the tilting device 310 reaches a lower elevation position.

However, by keeping the ascending reaching position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the degree of expectation reaches its maximum, the degree of expectation It is possible to associate the magnitude of the amount of displacement with which the player pushes and operates the tilting device 310, thereby making it easy for the player to understand the difference in expectations due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.例文帳に追加

In this case, it is possible to motivate the player to check to what position the tilting device 310 rises, so that the player does not have to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. can be directed to Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, a game method in which the tilting device 310 is operated chaotically can be suppressed.

Next, an operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and these separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the features of a disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

74(a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 75(a) is a front view of FIG. 75(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 75(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). Since the right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror copy of the right disk cam 7344R, a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disc cam 7344R includes a disc member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a through which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state, and a disc member 7344R1. and an engaging portion 7630 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. and an engaging member 7344R3 having a

The disk member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center, and has a detection hole 344eR in a portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup in a flange shape, and an engagement rib. 344c is a member configured with a shape that is partially omitted (a portion between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in the assembled state, and has a first circular recessed portion 7410 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a. Between the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion smaller in diameter than the first circular recessed portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and between the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracted portion 344c2, a radial An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 is bored, and a fixing projecting radially outward from the side surface of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (the outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430 A projection 7440 is mainly provided.

The insertion hole 7430 is a first rectangular long hole portion elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a position displaced from an intermediate position between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. A long hole 7431 and a second long hole 7432 which is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disc member 7344R1 from the end of the first long hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disc member 7344R1. and a return portion 7433 configured to protrude toward the second long hole 7432 with the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 serving as a fulcrum.

The dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (transverse direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 (lower end portion in FIG. 75(b)) as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outwardly of the second elongated hole 7432 .

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a protrusion height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, referring to FIG. 76, the ring member 7344R2 will be described. 76(a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(c) is a view in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 7344R2 is a side view of the ring member 7344R2. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c), the ring member 7344R2 includes a ring-shaped plate portion 7510 in which the connecting pin 344d is protruded, and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. and a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recess depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410 , and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410 . be. As a result, in the assembled state, the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 can be aligned with each other while preventing excessive resistance to relative rotation.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 to a length that reaches (does not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75(a)). is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recess 7420 . As a result, in the assembled state, the engagement member 7344R3 can be moved in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75(a)) while preventing the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 includes a deformed through-hole 7521 drilled along the axial direction, and recesses radially outward in the deformed through-hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (five equal intervals in this embodiment). It mainly includes an equally divided concave portion 7522 provided.

The deformed through-hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when the later-described engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward of the disk member 7344R1. Configured.

77(a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77(b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a).

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the engaging member 7344R3, in the assembled state (see FIG. 74(b)), is radially outward of the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the rear-side end of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 (the right end in FIG. 77B) of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610; An engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 77(b)) from the extended distal end of the portion 7620 and an arc-shaped plate portion 7610 disposed on the side facing the engaging portion 7630 and a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 has a spring fixing projection 7611, which is a projection into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the distal end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted through the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when pushed radially inward against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip is It is configured with an extension length that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction that is slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends to a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75(a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the release member 346 and is displaced, and a function that positions the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. 78(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(b) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78(a). 78(c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, FIG. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c), and FIG. 78(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e).

78(a), 78(b), 78(c) and 78(d) show a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disc member 7344R1, and FIG. ) and FIG. 78(f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1. In order to facilitate understanding, the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are omitted in FIGS. 78(b), 78(d) and 78(f).

As a method for assembling the right disc cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second long hole 7432 is made shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, thereby preventing the engaging portion 7630 from being erroneously inserted into the second long hole 7432. can be prevented. Therefore, erroneous assembly can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second long hole 7432, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the depth direction of FIG. Moving.

At this position after the movement, the fixing projection 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 suppresses positional deviation of the disk member 7344R1 in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 78(d)) and engages. The member 7344R3 can be held immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

In addition, the engaging member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433 . This will be explained. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is forced to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 in the vertical direction is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved to the second position by elastic recovery force. It enters inside the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(d)).

When the tip of the return portion 7433 is in contact with the extension portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in the state of entering the second long hole 7432, the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large). direction) (see FIG. 78(d)), movement of the extended portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction, thereby preventing the engaging member 7344R3 from being displaced during operation.

After the engagement member 7344R3 is held by the disc member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1 while the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward of the disc member 7344R1. do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 causes the engaging portion 7630 to move along the radially outward direction D7. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disk member 7344R1.

Through the steps described above, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. The right disc cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates backward will be described. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 7300 taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b), and 81, the releasing member 7346, the rotating pawl member 7347 and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and the other Illustration of unnecessary parts is omitted.

The rotary pawl member 7347 in this embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment in the length of the guide elongated hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the protruding pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes through.

The releasing member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the upper rear portion of the main body portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80(a)) is obliquely shaved in order to minimize interference with the engaging rib 344c.

79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 show how the disk cam 7344 rotates backward (clockwise direction in Fig. 79(a)). are shown in chronological order.

FIG. 79(a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts against the releasing member 7346 and the releasing member 7346 begins to rotate. ), and FIG. 80(a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 has been pushed into the disc member 7344R1 to the end, and M6-2. 80(b) shows a state in which the disk member 7344R1 has further rotated backward from the state shown in FIG. 80(a), and FIG. 81 shows the state shown in FIG. The state after the 7344R rotates backward and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is illustrated. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a) and 80(b), the state ( small angle state) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), immediately after the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 start contacting each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set larger than that of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and is maintained in an outwardly projecting state.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 abuts against the outermost diameter side surface of the engaging member 7344R3, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in a small angle state. be done.

In this embodiment, the release member 7346 rotates forward, and the rotation pawl member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form a small angle state. The disc cam 7344 is moved in such a positional relationship that the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the releasing member 346 while the inner peripheral surface is in contact with the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c. are placed (see FIG. 80(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344, and when the release member 7346 becomes unable to rotate further (small angle state), the release member A load is applied from 7346 to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 radially inward of the disc cam 7344 .

As shown in FIG. 79(b), in a state where the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, the backward rotation cannot be continued. , the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through-hole 7521 .

Therefore, since the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. Also, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its posture.

Due to this shift in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from the originally arranged one equally divided recessed portion 7522 to the different equally divided recessed portion 7522, so that the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 , and rotates relative to each other by one concave portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R rotates further, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward. , and the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, the equally divided concave portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted by one.

79(a) to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged in the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into recessed portions 7522. can be relatively displaced by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portions.

The operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 82(a), 82(b), 83(a) and 83(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 7300 taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 82, the releasing member 7346, the rotary pawl member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and the illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b) show how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)) in chronological order. FIG. 82(a) shows the state immediately before the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R abut against each other, and FIG. 82(b) shows that the engaging member 7344R3 FIG. 83(a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 82(b), and FIG. (b) shows the state after the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R are separated from each other.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary pawl member 7347 rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise rotation in FIG. 82(a)). direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation pawl member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation pawl member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction due to the elastic force of the first spring SP1. will only be available.

Therefore, a load that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 radially inward does not occur, and the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially outward from the contact of the engaging member 7344R3 to the releasing member 7346 until it is separated from the releasing member 7346. maintain the protruding state. Therefore, when rotating the disk cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

By switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the direction of rotation in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilt width, as in the first embodiment. Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81) that causes relative rotation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the direction of rotation of the disc member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disc member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is the direction opposite to the direction of releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 7347 (the direction in which the fixation is not released). Since they match, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be rotated relative to each other while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

As a result, a state in which the player does not pay attention (a state in which the tilting device 310 stops) is used as a state for changing the relative posture between the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place invisible to the player. be able to.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of modes for raising the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of manipulation device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 can be immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 85 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a displaceable phase relationship, and in FIG. 84 and 85, the state in which the equally divided concave portion 7522 is rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by one portion is illustrated, and in both FIGS. A contact state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2) by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state. You can change the range of movement.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. Moves until it is sunk below the 2nd state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the position to which the tilting device 310 reaches immediately (without rotation of the disk cam 7344) can be changed from the first state by the upward movement. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of presentations by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operation device 7300 as a presentation device.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment has a covering cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the front side of the paper surface is the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. Also, the definition of this direction is the same in the description referring to the drawings before FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11, FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployment) in which the back pack 92 is opened from the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened from the outer frame 11, and FIG. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed). FIG. 90 shows the pachinko machine 8010 with the front frame 14 removed. It is a front view of. Note that, in FIG. 90, the reference numerals for the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for the sake of convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed in the shape of a frame whose upper and lower sides are made of wooden plates and whose left and right sides are made of aluminum plates and whose four sides are fixed. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 etc.) and the locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is good also as a structure with which the member which has is equipped with the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12. In a front view, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side. (opening/closing front end side) is rotatable forward.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, with the left side as the base end of rotation (opening/closing base end) and the right side as viewed from the front. It is rotatable rearward as the moving tip side (opening/closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. , the front frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 12 so that the front frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010 as shown in FIG. By doing so, they are canceled respectively.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 . As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14. The front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a columnar portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft) are provided as shown in FIG. The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the metal plate having a hole with the inner frame 12 .

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a pivot plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) provided with a fitting size. In addition, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape projecting upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which columns with different diameters are connected vertically, the diameter of the upper column It is axially supported by being externally fitted on a support pin 19a having a shape with a small diameter.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12 . The front frame 14 includes a body frame 14a formed of a metal plate in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (electrical decoration parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front and rear sides of the body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 86). Since the window portion 14c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12. - 特許庁Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than the window portion 14c and having transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) that integrates the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. and have. The fixed frame is made of synthetic resin and formed into an annular shape that is one size larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame, whereby the glass unit 16 is integrated with double glazing. It is

Although the glass unit 16 is made of transparent glass 16a and 16b and is transparent and colorless, it is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin and transparent and colorless. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed in a colored transparent form instead of a colorless transparent form.

Around the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of decorative portions 8029 to 8033 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided. These illumination parts 8029 to 8033 light up or flash in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, the illumination section 8030 on the upper side of the window section 14c incorporates a light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of balls to be paid out and a light emitting means that lights up during prize ball payout are built in.

Further, speaker covers 27 (thin plate members made of punching metal) are provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover the speaker assemblies 450 that output sound effects according to the game state. . Below the window 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, an upper tray 17 and a lower tray 50 are arranged so as to protrude forward and are vertically arranged side by side.

The upper tray 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball shooting unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 50 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17 . A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower tray 50 is formed in the rear side surface of the lower tray 50 .

It should be noted that there is no need to separate the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 and provide a plurality of portions for storing game balls, and the lower tray 50 is eliminated and only the upper tray 17 is provided, and only one storage section is provided. Also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper tray 17 (game ball storage area). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided at a different location such as the periphery of the lower tray 50 other than the upper tray 17, or may be provided at a plurality of locations. Alternatively, a configuration in which information can be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor may be used.

A passage forming unit 140 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14 as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 140 is molded of synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper tray passage portion 141 leading to the upper tray 17, a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 leading to the lower tray 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( See FIG. 92).

A put-out ball receptacle 143 that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14). A passage entrance of the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 are formed by partitioning the passage 143 to the left and right by a partition wall 144 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a into the lower tray 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 that opens upward. A foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 is discharged to the lower tray 50 after flowing down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92). It should be noted that the foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50 so that the foul ball is discharged to the upper plate 17 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 merges with a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which an unfired ball flowing down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. is formed as

On the rear side of the front frame 14, multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper portion, are attached to protrude toward the rear side. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring connector for conducting electricity to the electrical decoration part 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, an internal substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14, and one end An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is connected is arranged, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 .

In the portion covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 of the front frame 14, there are a wiring groove 14h communicating toward the left and right electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032, and an electric decoration part 8031, 8031, and 8031 through the wiring groove 14h. An electronic board 14i is formed (see FIG. 103) to which the wiring drawn out from the 8032 is connected, and the terminal of each wiring is pulled out rearward through the wiring through groove 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the rear side. be

Therefore, when the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 89). A connector of conductive wiring and a connector of which one end is connected to the inner substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted into and removed from the electronic substrate 14i.

A pair of multifunctional cover members 171 attached to the front end of the front frame 14 are arranged on the upper and lower sides of the inner frame 12, and a board support device 600 ( FIG. 126) is opposed to the upper device in the front and rear direction, and can abut against each other depending on the situation, the details of which will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member made of a resin material and having an open front side is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates the wiring is attached from the rear side. The long cover member 173 is configured such that its cross-sectional area decreases as it moves from the rotation distal end side of the front frame 14 to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a that forms the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring is An upper wall portion 173b that is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, is arranged above the lower wall portion 173a so as to face the lower wall portion 173a, and constitutes the upper side of the space that accommodates the wiring. Consists of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged to contact the front frame 14 in the same manner as the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upwardly extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion of the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b protrudes in a semicircular shape toward the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14. , a space that can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction is secured from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. Protruded proximally. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the positional change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there are an upwardly extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (the portion closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14a that is the front frame. An inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178 that is formed of a resin material and that opens downward is provided between the vertically elongated plate portion on the rotation base end side of 14 .

The reverse cup part 178 is, for example, a part that countermeasures against fraudulent acts such as illegally spreading the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, and entering the game area. is. That is, even if the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the movement of the piano wire can be hindered, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are made of a resin material, it is possible to take measures against cheating by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is inserted and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the heat melts the reverse cup portion 178 and allows the long cover member to pass through the reverse cup portion 178. 173 can also be melted. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring housed in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out. , can make fraud easier to detect.

In particular, in this embodiment, the wall portion 178a of the reverse cup portion 178 on the side of the long cover 173 has a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173 and abuts (approaches) to each other. In addition, since the normal line of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the long cover 173 can also be melted with a high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts.

The wall portion 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the horizontal direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forced into the rotation base end of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire reaches the wall portion. 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a. It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire travels in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 (progresses in the left-right direction). can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who cheats via the piano wire from increasing. By arranging a detection device for detecting the entrance of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity before the fraudulent person escapes, making it easier to secure the fraudulent person. .

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits fraud cannot distinguish it, so he/she will believe that the piano wire is on its way to the game area. . Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the window part 14c), the action of inserting the piano wire further deeply is naturally given to the person who cheats (the piano wire (without raising suspicion that the plug-in is not working). Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for a person who commits a fraudulent act to realize that the fraudulent act has been discovered and to plan an escape.

The detection device may be a photocoupler device, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK or may be arranged on the rear side portion of the operation handle 51 . In the case where it is arranged on the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally arranged on the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine whether the piano wire has entered.

The ball shooting unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 90, this ball shooting unit 112a has an electromagnetic shooting solenoid 701 provided as a shooting device, and a game ball shot by the shooting solenoid 701 is disposed between an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A shooting rail 730 for guiding a game ball so as to be shot toward an area in between and a ball feeding device 720 are provided.

The ball feeding device 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) onto the launch rail 730 one by one. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as the hitting portion in the shooting solenoid 701 . By inputting an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the firing rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball shooting unit 112a is not limited to the shooting solenoid 701, and a shooting motor or the like may be used. A detailed configuration of the ball shooting unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. is set. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through-hole extending in the front-rear direction through the portion where the disc passage forming member 160 is provided. Fixed.

The plate passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and a main body side lower plate passage portion 162, as shown in FIG. One end of the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is opened toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with a through hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage is formed in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction) so that the end of the tube is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end, and is discharged from the other end. be.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the dispensed ball receptacle 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided on the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the disc passage forming member 160 . A front door side upper tray passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 , and a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 .

As shown in FIG. 90, a shutter 163 is provided on the lower side of the plate passage forming member 160 to restrict the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162. . The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position for narrowing the exit portions of both passages to block outflow of the game balls and a permitting position for permitting the outflow of the game balls.

A biasing member (such as a coil spring) is attached to the inner frame 12 to bias the shutter 163 toward the blocking position. It is configured such that the shutter 163 stays at the blocking position by force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state in which game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 or the main body side lower tray passage portion 162, the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out is avoided. there is

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is pressed against the biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the put-out ball socket portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 and the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicate with each other, so that the game balls flow down. Permissible.

The substrate 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is formed by separate substrates for the portions where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the portion where the connector CN3 is arranged. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main controller 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp controller 113, and the objects of transmission are different. By doing so, it is intended to prevent malfunction in advance.

The portion below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are shown exploded, and FIG. 92 is a window portion of the front frame 14. 14c is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are shown exploded. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the body frame 14c, is the front side of the upper tray 17 and obliquely above the lower tray 50 to the right. An operation device 300 is provided at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and a covering cover 370 is provided on the front side of the operation device 300 .

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and has a lateral width that is approximately the same as the lateral width of the front frame 14 . That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the electrical decoration portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right ends thereof, and has a body curved portion 371 configured in a curved shape in which the left and right central portions protrude toward the front side. Extending downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left-right central portion and the left-right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side adjacent to each other in the width direction, they merge at the extending lower end and are viewed from front V. A hanging portion 372 configured in a letter shape and a plate-like member that closes an opening surrounded by the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372, and is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is made of a main body curved portion 371 or the hanging portion 372. a left plane support portion 374 formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371; and a flat surface formed on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371. and a support groove 376 which is recessed from the back side of the right side planar support portion 375 and whose recessed width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back side. Prepare for.

The main body curved portion 371 has a rounded front edge, and a rear edge that matches the front edge of the upper plate 17. When the upper plate is assembled (see FIG. 86), the main body curved portion 371 has a curved shape. 17 in the front-rear direction, and the front-side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300 connected to the rear left edge 371a. A back middle edge portion 371b abuts against the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and the back middle edge portion 371b is connected to the back left edge portion 371a on the opposite side of the back left edge portion 371a. It mainly includes a rear right edge portion 371c that abuts on the ball rental operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The drooping portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the curved portion 371 of the main body, and is located between the right corner cover 380 which is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported and which is arranged at the right corner of the front frame 14 . It is a portion that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by forming a shape that does not create a gap (a shape that matches the contact position with the right corner cover 380). The drooping portion 372 is positioned on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later, by screwing a screw that is inserted from below into the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed. It is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate to be formed.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion that allows the light emitted from the operation device 300 to pass through to the front side, and is a portion that can perform an effect with the light, and is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. It is arranged close to the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED devices is an arbitrary matter, and in this embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, there are six LEDs that emit light upward (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e), and two LEDs that emit light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e). , respectively.

The light emitted from the LED device 341f that emits light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. FIG. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 before being transmitted. Pass through part 373 .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the translucent portion 373 is compared to when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Thus, it is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while making it unnecessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), the tilting device 310 can be adjusted according to the state change of the tilting device 310 . An effect of changing the amount of light visible through the translucent portion 373 can be performed.

As another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward in accordance with a change in the state of the tilting device 310 . For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is strongly changed (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 changes to the first state (see FIG. 22). The amount of light is controlled to be weaker (stepwise) in accordance with the change from the state 1 to the second state, so that the light visible through the translucent portion 373 accompanying the change in the state of the tilting device 310 is reduced. It is possible to reduce the degree of change in the amount of light in (can be eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8031 and the electrical decoration portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support portion 374 toward the electrical decoration portion 8031. . As a result, it is possible to suppress downward positional displacement of the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The right plane support portion 375 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8032 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side plane support portion 375 toward the electrical decoration portion 8032. . As a result, it is possible to suppress downward positional displacement of the electrical decoration part 8032 .

Although the details will be described later, the electrical decoration portions 8031 and 8032 are in contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the electrical decoration portions 8031 and 8032 are separated from each other. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400 . Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide area by the electrical decoration part 8031, the electrical decoration part 8032, and the covering cover 370 fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a. The force required to prop up the unit 400 can be widely distributed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end portion of the electrical decoration portion 8032 entering from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electrical decoration part 8032 is in a state of being inserted to the deepest part of the support groove 376. In this state, the front lower corner end of the electrical decoration part 8032 and the front side end of the right plane support part 375 are aligned. matches the position of

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 by the engaging relationship described later, the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 can be respectively fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a to form an assembled state. A separate fixing part for fastening the covering cover 370 and the electrical decoration part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is attached to the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17 The passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a on the back side of the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member that constitutes the upper plate 17), and the metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 covers the passage forming unit 140 from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or another member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (a member constituting the upper plate 17, etc.) sandwiches the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated through the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire or piano wire whose tip is heated is pressed and melted), the front frame is It functions as an entry prevention member that prevents entry from the front side of 14 to the inner frame 12 side. That is, even if a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 made of metal, it will not penetrate, and the wire can be prevented from entering the rear side of the front frame 14 . .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side in the front view, and the opened front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 to be fitted to 140 and a flat plate-like plate portion 152 covering the back surface of the lower side portions of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball extraction passage 147 .

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the upper, lower, right and left sides, the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion The illustrated wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140 not only when the passage forming unit 140 penetrates the lower end of the wire 145 in the front-back direction, but also when it penetrates in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. can be prevented.

Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the rear surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when a wire exemplified by the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 to form a through hole, Even so, it is possible to prevent an illegal member from entering the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 . In a case where such a situation occurs, for example, the operation device 300 is removed, and the exemplified wire is pressed against a portion (a portion obliquely upward to the rear of the recessed portion 15a) where the front and rear thickness is reduced accordingly. A case is exemplified in which a through-hole is opened by being pressed, and the exemplified wire enters.

Further, the front frame 14 is provided with an operating portion back member 155 fastened from the back side to the left end of the passage forming unit 140, and the operating portion back member 155 is arranged with the cylinder lock 20 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position where it is located.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation section back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly from the outer edge of a plate member elongated in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction. A through hole 156 is drilled in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can pass therethrough, and screws are drilled above and below the through hole 156 to fasten and fix the operation unit back member 155 to the body frame 14a. a pair of insertion holes 157 for connection, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 vertically aligned in a portion (left end) overlapping the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation proximal end from the through hole 156. and an opening/closing regulating portion 159 protruding toward the rear side on the side.

The connection insertion hole 158 is arranged so as to match the connection portion 148 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 has a columnar shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting through-hole 158 at a position that coincides with the upper connecting through-hole 158 in the front-to-rear direction. and a threaded portion 148b drilled as a hole into which a screw inserted through the connecting insertion hole 158 can be screwed at a position matching the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Prepare the Lord.

With this configuration, when the operating portion back member 155 is placed on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operating portion back surface are connected by passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158 on the upper side. After aligning with the member 155, the operation portion back surface member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140 by screwing the screw through the lower connection insertion hole 158 into the screw portion 148b. be able to.

An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155, in which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed, and the lower edge at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the rear side so as to partition the area. 148c is formed in an L-shape capable of coming into face contact with wall portion 158a in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

Therefore, when assembling the operation section back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, the projection 148a is passed through the connection insertion hole 158, and the wall 158a is positioned vertically with respect to the extension wall 148c. The position and posture of the operation section back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be adjusted quickly and easily by the lateral contact.

The opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that faces front and rear of the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and will be described later in detail. This has the effect of regulating the closing of the front frame 14 by coming into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13 under predetermined conditions.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion extending toward the back side of the operation portion back member 155 and made of synthetic resin. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and compared to the case where it is extended in a block shape that fills the U-shaped opening, the required amount of material is required while ensuring rigidity. can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of the other portions of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength can be relied on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion is formed as thin as possible). The strength of the open/close restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving moldability by forming the opening/closing restricting portion 159 with a plate thickness).

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not limited to the U-shape as long as it is a shape that ensures rigidity and maintains the shape. For example, instead of a flat cross section, a curved (wavy) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wave cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used.

Further, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear surface member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the rear side, or is attached to the rear side from a separate member fixed to the rear side of the main body frame 14a. You may comprise from a metal part extended to. However, in the case where the open/close restricting portion 159 is made of synthetic resin as in the present embodiment, the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90), which is formed of a metal member, may Chipping or denting can be prevented. As a result, a worker who changes the state of the board surface supporting device 600 to attach and detach the game board 13 can be less likely to be injured by touching the cracks or dents formed in the board surface supporting device 600.例文帳に追加

Here, since the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is arranged closer to the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock arranged further toward the rotation distal end side is arranged. A long interval can be secured between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, in a state in which the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is in contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged at the leading end of the rotation are locked by mistake. can.

As a route through which a foreign object such as a wire enters, for example, a route passing through a gap in the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely separable from the main body frame 14a toward the front side. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the rear surface of the main body frame 14a even if the operation device 300 is traced through the gap.

A harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying power to the operation device 300 is inserted through a wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) drilled in the front-rear direction of the body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like can reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 having a substantially case shape. Therefore, foreign matter such as wires can be easily prevented from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

It should be noted that the foreign matter entering the operation device 300 may be liquid. For example, a player who feels bad about the result of a game may pour drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10 . At that time, the operation device 300 in a convenient position is likely to fall prey to being splashed with drinking water. There is a risk of

Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic substrate or the like. Since the operation device 300 is separably independent, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water poured on the operation device 300 from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

A concave portion 15a is formed in a T-shape when viewed from above on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300). The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep recessed portion. It does not have a perfect case shape, and gaps are formed here and there (for example, see FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the gaps). The concave portion 15a serves to temporarily store the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, so the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)) and is connected to wiring. 17(b) and 18), the drive motor 342 is exposed to liquid such as drinking water. It is possible to prevent it from being directly applied and broken down.

Also, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, it may be exposed to liquid such as drinking water. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows down the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from breaking down.

With the above-described configuration, even if a liquid such as drinking water is splashed on the player on his way home, the next player can continue playing normally by simply wiping off the touched portion of the upper surface of the operation device 300. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from putting pressure on the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. 93 to 96 illustrate a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14, as in FIG.

93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member 180 are shown side by side. be. In FIG. 93(b), the movable binding member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the movable binding member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 extended leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

In the present embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are connected to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the binding movable member 180 respectively.

On the other hand, the harnesses connected to the electrical decorations 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) are once connected to the relay board arranged in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. , a bundle of extension harnesses HN3 is directed from the relay board to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported, and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arm portions 183 extending from the opposite side surface) and the other side surface in the rotation direction of the movable arm portion 182 (the side opposite to the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a) At a position (intermediate position) between a pair of locking portions 184, which are U-shaped portions in top view and can lock the binding arm portions 183, and the pair of binding arm portions 183 A temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and having an opening is mainly provided.

In the binding movable member 180 , the binding arm portion 183 is formed with high flexibility, while the other portions are formed at least with lower flexibility (higher rigidity) than the binding arm portion 183 .

The body portion 181 includes a fixed portion 181a having a substantially horseshoe-shaped cross section and a central through-hole through which a screw is inserted, and projecting from the left and right lower corners of the fixed portion 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of detent protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate stop portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front side end portion of the fixed portion 181a, and the extending tip thereof curving close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d (see FIG. 96(a)) extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a, and a portion disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d. and a cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed of a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, which is composed of through holes arranged in the same arrangement as the fixed portion 181a and the pair of anti-rotation portions 181b.

When the screws passing through the fixed portion 181a are fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening holes of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. As a result, the binding movable member 180 can be prevented from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a during fastening, and the posture of the binding movable member 180 with respect to the plate member 14d can be determined.

The intermediate stopper 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between them and the plate member 14d. In the present embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extension end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented from slipping downward, and the center of the harnesses can be positioned on the plate member 14d side. The curved shape along the arranged circle secures a large cross-sectional area for the area (the area sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 181c) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

The support plate portion 181d forms a flat surface that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e fits inside the portion on the base end side of the movable arm portion 182 to hold the movable arm portion 182 in place. Pivot (see Figure 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a proximal end that is smoothly connected to a plane OS1 that is offset from the axial support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with a portion that is externally and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a proximal end. 182a and an elongated thin plate portion 182b provided continuously on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the pivotal support position.

The base end portion 182a includes the left and right ends (the portion where the straight line connecting to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end (the portion closest to the plane OS1) of the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion that is fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Extending from each of the adjacent portions are rotational sidewalls. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of curvature radii are arranged on the same side. equal to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on the situation. .

Since a pair of binding arm portions 183 are configured to have the same shape, one will be described and the description of the other will be omitted. The binding arm portion 183 has a small width portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion with a width equivalent to the width of the root, and a large width portion 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a alternately at regular intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183 by forming the thickened portion on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)).

The engaging portion 184 is formed in a large opening 184a formed on the side of the movable arm portion 182 and on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 across the large opening 184a, and has an opening width larger than that of the large opening 184a. and a small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized to allow the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. , and the large-width portion 183b are of such a size that they cannot be passed through (locked).

According to this embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is to be moved relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the side of the large opening 184a (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). When the binding arm portion 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging it on the side of the small opening 184b. can be adjusted.

The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm portion 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

A movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94(b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94(a). FIG. 95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95(b) is the front frame along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG.

94(a) and 94(b) show a state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95(a) and 95 ( In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with the vertically elongated metal portion constituting the left portion of the body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees about an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis pointing in the vertical direction). Considering the situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are installed in the amusement arcade (a situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are arranged side by side and are rotated by 90 degrees or more, there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010), this angle is normally used. It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 cannot be elastically deformed and cannot be rotated relative to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no movable arm portion 182, it is possible to reduce the risk of the movable arm portion 182 deteriorating and breaking due to elastic deformation.

Next, the manner in which the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, it is possible to prevent, for example, accidental pinching between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and disconnection.

FIG. 96(a) is a schematic rear view of the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a). FIG. 96(c) is a schematic rear view of the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c).

96(a) and 96(b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96(c) and 96(d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is located at a position moved from the opening opened leftward in the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. be. That is, since the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened toward the left at the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c are on the same horizontal line, the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is extended from the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm portion 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c. . . . HN3 can be shaped along the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the binding movable member 180 . As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96(b) and 96(d), the bending portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are curved, and extreme bending deformation can be prevented.

Further, by arranging the engaging portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, especially when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. As a result, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

97(a) and 97(b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, which schematically illustrate the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. be. 97(a) shows one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIG. 97(b) shows the other limit state of the movable binding member 180. As shown in FIG.

97(a) and 97(b) show the rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86), and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are shown schematically. The imaginary lines schematically show the members fixed to the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported at the rotation center point P57, respectively. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14. Similarly to the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates about the rotation center point P57 with respect to the inner frame 12. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97(b), the proximal end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates around the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, thereby moving the internal Since it corresponds to the opening and closing of the frame 12 and the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (Fig. 96 ( b), see also FIG. 96(d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are connected to the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of whether the front frame 14 is opened or closed with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed along a route that passes near the vertically elongated metal portion (the portion with which the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 abuts in FIG. 96(d)) that constitutes the left portion of the frame 14a. That is, by forcibly detouring the harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the front end of the front frame .

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work performed by the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 fit ( 96(b) and 97(a)).

In this embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). The harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178. For example, the tip of a wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup portion 178. , it is possible to take countermeasures against a fraudulent act of inserting a wire between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12. - 特許庁

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted, penetrates the wire, and advances toward the game area, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature rises. The tips of the heated wires are pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate fixing portion 181c. As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out and rendered non-conductive.

By controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, fraud can be quickly discovered. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from gaining fraudulent profits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN1 is burned out, the ball can be shot even if the operating handle 51 is rotated. Gone. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period until the fraudulent act is discovered after the fraudulent act is committed (the fraudulent act can be detected early).

In this case, after inserting a wire into the game area and tampering with the game area (for example, after bending a nail to make it easier to illegally win a prize), the ball is inserted into the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. Since it is possible to make it impossible to shoot balls to a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent an illegal profit from being given. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Also, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burned out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) and the return button 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Therefore, a person who commits fraud may not be able to collect the bills or balls for the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his/her own fraud. Therefore, it can act as a deterrent against fraud.

Furthermore, in order to eliminate the risk of being unable to collect bills and balls for the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending unit) Unit) is 0 yen, but the player commits the fraudulent act without leaving the seat, so the gaming machine store can easily notice the fraudulent act.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is cut off, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is output, and the disconnection error (CR error) is confirmed at the game machine shop. Thus, the possibility of fraud can be easily grasped.

98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. FIG. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98 , the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145 . In this embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 in the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145 is partitioned by a partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining area on the right side of the ball guide opening 53 (an area about 1/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53).

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the ball can flow down toward the lower tray 50. , S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 whose extension directions are directed (switched) to the left and right sides at least once each are provided.

Due to the S-shaped path SL1, it is possible to increase the flow path length of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the liquid stays inside the front door side lower tray passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower tray 50 while securing a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86). The large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the lower tray 50 (and its upstream side) reduces the stress of ball replenishment given to the player (when the balls for 50 minutes of the lower tray run out, the balls are removed from the senryo box). It is possible to configure the pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing the stress caused by being requested to replenish.

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are respectively provided with bend regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions in which the extension direction is bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common. Features That is, the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEa1 formed upstream of the first bending region NEa1 and having a characteristic portion thereof reversed left and right. and an area NEa2.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending region NEb2 arranged on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 by reversing the right and left of the characteristic portion. , provided. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and descriptions of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, the side wall Na and the side wall Na disposed on the side opposite to the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. , a ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner that intersects the extending direction of the side wall Na; Each of the walls Na, Nb, and Nc extends from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by curving a surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a spherical guide surface. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as a wire or piano wire). It functions as a surface to support the surface, and the details will be described later. The adjacent wall Nc is set such that the gap Nin between the lower end of the extension and the side wall Na is larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the improperly inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an entry route for the illegally inserted wire HM, there is a possible route that advances upstream of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 from the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance. A person who commits fraud pushes the wire HM against the side wall of the front-door-side lower tray passage portion 142 while proceeding.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a person who commits fraud, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances rightward due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, so that it is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 with their left and right reversed, the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without exception.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the advancing route of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is indicated by a black circle, and the advancing direction of the wire HM at that time is indicated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM entering the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (caught) at this point, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from advancing any further, to prevent the wire HM from being held, and to quickly discover the fraudulent act. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not caught and continues to advance, if the wire HM protrudes from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM protrudes downward. Even so, the tip of the wire HM travels downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 or the game area arranged on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146 .

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) to cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an illegal payout ball, or causing the wire HM to reach the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). It is possible to prevent a person who commits a fraudulent act from gaining a fraudulent profit by forcibly opening a movable device such as a player and making it easier to fraudulently win a prize.

Returning to FIG. 98, description will be made. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE where the ball extraction passage 147 merges is about twice the diameter of the ball (twice or more in this embodiment). As a result, when the balls flowing down the ball removal passage 147 are arranged in the confluence area CE, the balls flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enter the confluence passage CE (the balls enter the confluence area CE at the same time). , even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility of the balls being caught between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other can be extremely reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being hindered from flowing down in the portion downstream from the confluence area CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a that is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage forming unit 140 protrudes toward the front side as the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 goes downward.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of is positioned flush with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set such that the front-to-rear width of the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a is larger than that of the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In this embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 downstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly larger than the diameter of the ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-to-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 upstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when balls stay in the foul ball passage portion 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged with their positions shifted forward and backward in the upstream of the passage portion 145, so that the number of balls that can stay can be increased. Since the centers of the balls are prevented from lining up in the front-rear direction (they are slightly shifted in the left, right, up and down directions), it is possible to prevent two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, it is possible to restrict the balls from entering the passage portion 145a one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, the foul balls can be prevented from reaching the confluence area CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other.

The foul ball receptacle 146 extends from the bottom plate on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 toward the front side, and the left end is connected to the left side wall, and the flow-down surface of the ball faces rightward. from the inclined plate portion 146a that is inclined downward as far as the inclination plate portion 146a, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c that extends in a plate shape toward the back side and curves in such a manner that the direction in which the guide plate extends toward the back side is directed upward.

While the ball is guided toward the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the blocking portion 146b moves the foul ball socket portion 146 to the front side. The passing position of the ball passing through can be shifted to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146 . That is, the ball that rolls down the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow rightward, and the block portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball socket portion 146. can be done.

As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be finished before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage part in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the sphere can flow down smoothly.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball) in the range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a). A tool can be prevented from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145 .

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 100 and 101 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 that constitute the electrical decoration portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit elongated in the left and right direction, and the left and right ends of the upper panel unit 400 are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032 . In this support structure, at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side. (see FIG. 118) are formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right hooks forming the supported groove 417. As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 can be connected and fixed to each other by fastening and fixing to the body frame 14a, respectively, without the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. FIG. The shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400 defines the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are fitted with left and right hooks forming the supported groove 417. Due to the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, it is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being left and right separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are connected to the main body frame. 14a is shown disassembled.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between itself and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101). A cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

The fastening portion 14e1 has a through-hole through which a screw is inserted from the rear side thereof, and the screw passing through the through-hole is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, whereby the upper frame is This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. Note that FIG. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a by screws inserted from the rear side into insertion holes drilled in the body frame 14a, is disassembled from the body frame 14a. The illustration of the upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 is omitted, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As for the actual assembly procedure, the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Also, the right panel unit 500 has a right side wall forming the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510, and FIG. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left stacking unit 500L and a right stacking unit 500R that are stacked in the left-right direction. 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws inserted through the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side. It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted toward the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed to have an L-shaped cross section by extending a plate-like extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side, and is assembled. In (see FIG. 86), a fixed plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extension portion 511a abuts against the outer surface of the body frame 14a, and a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511. a plurality of cover-side through holes 513 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512; a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512; and a pin support hole 515 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens-side through hole 514 .

The fixing plate 511 has a base portion 511b that overlaps the substrate member 512 when viewed from the front, and the portion on the side of the substrate member 512 protrudes toward the front side in a pedestal shape. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 .

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the platform 511b can abut against the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction (see FIG. 115(b)). collapse can be suppressed. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixing plate 511, the extending portion 511a is displaced to the right by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 relative to the base portion 511b. While the outer cover member 560 abuts against the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, the left side surface of the fixing plate 511 is formed up to the rear side end as a surface that is substantially at the same plane as the side surface of the base portion 511b. The back-side end of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the back-side end of the support plate portion 510, and in the assembled state (see FIG. abuts on the left side surface 511c of the .

The substrate member 512 is an electronic substrate (printed substrate) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a row curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in this embodiment) between adjacent LEDs 512a. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other. Illuminate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the side of the LED 512a is longer than the width of the LED 512a (the lateral width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a passes through the light guide member without leakage. The light enters 540 and exits from one of the surfaces of the light guide member 540. The entry and exit of light and its path will be described later.

The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and through which the screw fastened to the back fastening portion 527 is inserted from the back side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening screws to the back fastening portion 527 .

The lens-side through-hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 556 provided on the outer lens member 550 and through which the screw fastened to the back fastening portion 556 is inserted from the back side. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening screws to the back fastening portion 556 .

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the projecting portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The pin support hole 515 has a horizontal width slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566 and a vertical width approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566 . Therefore, while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined, the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed can be improved.

That is, in a fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut against the support plate portion 510 from the front side, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (projecting portion 566 ), the projecting portion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 . Accordingly, by inserting the protruding portion 566 into the pin support hole 515 and then moving the heavy plate units 500L and 500R up and down with respect to the support plate portion 510 by the amount corresponding to the positional displacement, the positional displacement is eliminated and fastening is facilitated. Fixation can be performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left stacking unit 500L includes an inner cover member 520 that constitutes the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86) and is made of a non-transmissive resin material. and an inner lens member 530 fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and made of a transparent colorless resin material.

The right stacking unit 500R faces the light guide member 540 arranged to face the left stacking unit 500L in the left-right direction, and the front side end is arranged to face the light guide member 540 in the front-rear direction. An outer lens member 550 made of a transparent white resin material, and a light guide member 540 and the outer lens member 550 arranged on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and made of a resin material that does not transmit light. and an outer cover member 560 that is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. FIG. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side. is shown exploded.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 522 disposed on the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560 . , a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560; a plurality of openings 524 opened in the body plate portion 521; A plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions that are attached and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed; A plurality of long fastening portions 526, which are cylindrical portions inserted through and into which screws for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and a plurality of long fastening portions 526 that protrude from the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and are viewed from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear fastening portions 527 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

The main body plate portion 521 has a wave-shaped front end portion 521a, and a connection plate portion 521c that connects the front end portion 521a and the back-side base portion 521b at the short width portion of the wave shape (portion closer to the back side). Prepare.

The back-side base portion 521b has an inner side surface 521b1 that comes into face contact (matches in shape) with the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion that is arranged in an attitude that inclines leftward toward the rear side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at even intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged such that the intervals increase in order from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 can be made different, and the presentation effect of light can be made different for each opening 524 .

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed. and a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a, which is a cylindrical portion into which screws for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 are screwed, and a fitting groove 523b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by two screws inserted at the upper end and one screw at the lower end.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged in parallel at four upper and lower positions and function as windows for viewing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape portion of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape projecting rightward with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is recessed rightward from the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back-side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the portion where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 protrudes leftward in the design of this embodiment (see FIG. 111). The surface of the back-side base portion 521b is recessed and curved to the right as designed between the boundary portions described above. That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back side of the portion projecting to the design surface side. When the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, the back surface of the design-like protruding portion is, conversely, formed with a recess that tends to become a dead space. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back side of the inner cover member 520 (on the side of the inner lens member 530) can be effectively used. Efficiency can be improved.

The front and rear end portions of the inner lens member 530 are formed to follow the shape of the front and rear end portions of the inner cover member 520 . That is, the inner lens member 530 has a front end portion 531a of a main body plate portion 531 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape and has a corrugated shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520. be done.

The front-side end portion 531a forms a curved surface that extends rightward from the front-side edge of the main body plate portion 531, and is perforated in the front-rear direction at the position where the curve forming the wave shape changes to the front-rear direction. and support holes 531b and 531c through which the projecting portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

The support hole 531b is formed in the corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the rear side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened behind the support hole 531b, even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the wave-shaped rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where the light guide member 540 can come into contact is arranged on the rear side thereof. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is reinforced by the inclined rib portion 532, even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531c, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced. be able to.

The main body plate portion 531 has a through hole 531d which is sized to allow the long fastening portion 526 to pass through and is drilled in the horizontal direction at a position between the support holes 531b and 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is formed by a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c. , and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b vertically connecting the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a extend so as to fill the gap between them and the light guide member 540. As shown in FIG. That is, since the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes leftward toward the back side like the inner cover member 520, the left and right widths become longer toward the back side (front side end portion in top view). is a triangular shape with a tip).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 that overhangs leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening portion 524 . The protruding portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the protruding side, which protrudes in a wavy shape and has a wavy curved surface with a shape that scatters light.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has a halftone dot pattern on both left and right sides in which recessed portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right directions are arranged in a grid pattern. A so-called light guide plate is formed. That is, at least part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is redirected in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. be. In addition, the light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is changed from the end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for changing light from a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a) into uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512 a so that the incident light is emitted from the surfaces of the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 .

In this embodiment, as an example, the recessed portion is formed by a thermoplastic mold plate having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of about 1 mm are arranged in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light reaching the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resins used in the present invention are not particularly limited, but those having transparency are preferable, and acrylic resins (methacrylic resins), polycarbonate resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, amorphous polyester resins, amorphous olefin resins, etc. Examples include resins, polystyrene resins, and AS resins (acrylonitrile-styrene copolymer compounds). Among these resins, by using an acrylic resin in particular, it is possible to obtain the light guide member 540 having a high average brightness and a small decrease in brightness distribution.

In this embodiment, the light guide member 540 has a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness between 3 mm and 8 mm, it is possible to efficiently guide the light from the LED 512a, improve shape retention after thermal bending, and obtain practical strength.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 has a corrugated front end portion that is slightly displaced from the front end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 toward the rear side, and has a wavy shape. are also formed from undulating corrugations.

The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. The degree of corrugation is not particularly limited, but the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion is preferably 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of imparting a three-dimensional degree of freedom while maintaining good practical mechanical properties with little distortion after heat bending. .

Although details of the wavy shape undulating to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114), it is positioned leftward at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c. The wavy shape is located rightward (located away from the inner cover member 520) at a position between .

The wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material having the recessed portions, as described above. As the method of thermal bending of the present invention, a metal having a concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (male mold) that are curved while being heated to a heating temperature of 10 to 40°C above the deflection temperature under load of the thermoplastic resin used as the base material. It is made by pressing the substrate into a mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower.

At this time, the heating temperature of the base material is lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40°C or lower and the melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light from the light source is emitted before and after the heat bending process. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and an uneven luminance distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such heating temperature conditions, it is possible to suppress distortion of the light guide plate.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 that constitutes a light guide plate, and screws extending vertically from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted. and a fastening portion 542 that is provided.

The light guide member 540 does not have a portion that penetrates in the left-right direction at positions other than the fastening portion 542 and the concave portion 541 a for retreating from the long fastening portion 526 . That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate without a hole at least inside the projection plane on which the opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, the rendering effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear-side end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear-side end of the inner lens member 530 .

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 which is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 and internally supported. An inner fitting portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and an area surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 protrude to the right so that the outer cover A protruding portion 554 visible through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a main body plate portion 551 protruding from the rear side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the outer lens member 550 follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540 . That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end portion 551a that extends leftward from the front edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forms a curved surface that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a corrugated shape and is arranged slightly shifted to the front side with respect to the front side end of the light guide member 540 . In this embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be spaced equally apart in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. be.

The front-side end portion 551a projects toward the front side at the position where the curve forming the wave shape is switched to the front-rear direction, and is fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). A setting portion 551b is provided.

On the surface of the front end portion 551a opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540, a bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a)) that bulges toward the front side in a semicircular shape in a side view is formed vertically. are formed countless times. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end face of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front side end surface can be made into a band-shaped light emission mode that is continuous in the vertical direction.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a recessed deep portion that is recessed inwardly (inwardly of the surface of the main body plate portion 551 ) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554 . Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560 .

In the right stacking unit 500R, a rear fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing with the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550 and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. FIG. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (it can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or screw arrangement). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be enlarged.

The main body plate portion 551 has a surface facing the light guide member 540 that is curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 and main body plate portion 551 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 114(b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which it faces the main body plate portion 551 . In addition, since the body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 , the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the body plate portion 551 .

Therefore, it is possible to prevent misalignment between the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540, and the light from the LED 512a enters the light guide member 540 with high accuracy. can be made

The outer cover member 560 has a body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end portion of the body plate portion 561. It has a long hole formed in an oval shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and a plurality of screws are inserted from the opposite side. A receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561, and the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a A lower fastened portion 563 formed in an elongated hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the vertical width and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and having a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side, and a main body plate portion 561 at the front side end of the inner cover member 520, a receiving surface capable of receiving the long fastening portion 526, the vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526, and the vertical width A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 are formed in an elongated hole shape with a long width and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the projecting portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is formed. It mainly includes an opening 565 and a plurality of projecting portions 566 projecting from the body plate portion 561 toward the back side.

The upper to-be-fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the lateral width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522 . The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower part to be fastened 563 has a fitting groove 563b recessed in the horizontal width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening part 523 . The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Since the right panel unit 500 contacts the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 vertically (see FIG. 86), the cover 370 protrudes the right panel unit 500 toward the front. The upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the right panel unit 500 that is stably supported. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape into which the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (formed with an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554). Therefore, the access path to the lateral gap between the opening 565 and the projecting portion 554 can be narrowed, so that the illegal act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

A method of assembling the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. FIG. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 113a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a).

112(a) and 112(b) illustrate a state in which the projecting portion 551b is arranged on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. A state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

To assemble the right panel unit 500, the main body plate portion 531 of the left stacking unit 500L and the left end of the front end portion 551a of the right stacking unit 500R are brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112(b)). ), the left stacking unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right stacking unit 500R, and the protrusions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, a configuration is adopted in which the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the projections 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b at the front end of the right panel unit 500. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in this embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are arranged at the front end of the right panel unit (front side of the light guide member 540). can reduce the number of screws that fasten and fix the , thereby reducing the area where light is blocked by the screws. It can be made easy to visually recognize in a strip|belt shape.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, by reducing the number of screws (fastening points) that fasten and fix the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to prevent misleading during fastening. It is possible to reduce the range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged by applying a load to the light member 540 . Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being discontinued and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500 .

When the left plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right plate unit 500R and the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left plate unit 500L and , and the light guide member 540 of the right stacking unit 500R form surfaces that are parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and are in a positional relationship in which the surfaces can contact each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving the left stacking unit 500L in the front-rear direction with respect to the right stacking unit 500R. Assembly of the panel unit 500 can be easily performed.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left layered plate unit 500L and the right layered plate unit 500R are assembled to the support plate portion 510 by fastening and fixing. .

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left plate unit 500L and the right plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing them to the support plate section 510. The second procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the right plate unit 500R. is fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 alone, then the left plate unit 500L is brought closer to the right plate unit 500R, the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left plate unit 500L is placed on the right side. In this method, the plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510 are respectively fastened and fixed. These two procedures can be similarly adopted when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

As described above, since assembly and disassembly can be performed in two ways, the operator who performs maintenance or the like can disassemble or assemble the right panel unit 500 according to which part of the parts needs to be replaced. can be selected, and the working time can be shortened.

It should be noted that, regardless of which procedure is used for disassembly, the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R must be slid in the plane direction to disassemble the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the engagement between the projecting portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b. When the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are to be slid relative to each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate section 510 .

In this way, the configuration in which the projecting portions 551b and 551c are fitted into the support hole 531b is such that the right panel unit 500 is pried open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and the right panel unit is assembled. 500 and is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by tightening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and cheating can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws that are inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are attached to the front surface. By making it difficult to disassemble the left panel unit 500L and the right panel unit 500R unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the right panel unit 500 can be removed from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. can be difficult to disassemble. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500 .

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of light guide member 540 of right panel unit 500 and its effect in presentation will be described. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . 114(a) to 114(c), illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the rear side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is directed to the left and right by the action of the light guide member 540. be redirected. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the light guide member 540 .

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(b)), light is condensed on the concave side, and light is diffused on the convex side. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a curvature radius R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) thereof has a convex shape, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 faces the outer lens member 550. It can be used for production by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode of light production (whether the light is condensed or diffused) performed on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It can be provided, and the production effect can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, but various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the notched concave portion of the light guide member 540 according to regions, or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to regions, it is possible to change the mode of light production on both the left and right sides. .

The light guide member 540 is always concave on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524 , and the radius of curvature of the concave surface changes according to the size of the opening 524 . That is, the curvature radius of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the same as that of the second opening from the top, corresponding to the increase in the vertical width of the openings 524 at the top three locations. The curvature radius R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the curvature radius R1 (R1>R2), and similarly the curvature radius R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is , is shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2>R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of the LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light differs for each opening 524. The amount of light emitted can be varied for each opening 524 . That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light compared to the lower opening 524 .

In addition, the curvature radius R4 at the position corresponding to the lowest opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top is formed to be the same as the curvature radius R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line coming out from the shape is a shape that points slightly upward. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be increased, and the light production can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the openings 524 at the bottom can be directed to the eyes of the player. Can be directed upwards.

As shown in FIG. 114(c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as lengths connecting the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R2 is the vertical width W2, and the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R3. The width of the openings 524 facing each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 facing the portion with the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, among the openings 524, the lower openings 524 are formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portion of the curvature radii R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship of the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitude relationship of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased at locations where the degree of light condensing is weak (for example, a portion with a radius of curvature R1) so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light is condensed. In a portion where the intensity of light is strong (for example, a portion with a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid too much light entering the opening 524 . Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode of each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center point of each radius of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114(b) is a point corresponding to the focal point of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and each vertical width W1 to W4 is arranged at approximately the middle position of

The light guide member 540 is convex leftward in the region KE of the boundary of the opening 524 . Here, the region KE is a strip-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with adjacent openings 524 . That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above it, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the opening 524 adjacent below it. matches the top edge of the . Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 512a to the area KE in the front-rear direction travels while being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114(c)).

In the area KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that even if the light gathering effect is reduced, the light is visible to the player. The difference in the amount of light is small.

On the other hand, by making the area KE convex to the left instead of the flat surface, the light guide member 540 can be formed in a curved shape with no corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. durability can be improved.

In addition, by forming a convex shape on the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side. can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the presentation of light visually recognized through the opening 565 .

That is, depending on whether or not light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a, it is possible to change the light seen through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light seen through the opening 524. .

For example, by turning off the LEDs 512a that make light incident on the area KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a, it is possible to irradiate the insides of the openings 524 and 565 with light without gaps. At this time, the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the area KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from above and below the area KE intersects on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being seen darkly in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and the edge is visually recognized by the player. You can increase the amount of light. Therefore, it is possible to sharpen the light emission mode of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 106).

It should be noted that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524 . In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the region KE, the corresponding portion (the region corresponding to the region KE) of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a strip shape. can be made

The region KE has a shorter front-to-rear width of the right panel unit 500 (a shorter distance from the LED 512a) than the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the area KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The light that reaches the front end portion may be used to produce an effect.

That is, a light effect is prepared that is not visible through the connecting plate portion 521c, but is visible through the front end portion 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500). By setting the degree of expectation for the big hit of the effect to be high, the position of the player's eyes can be moved away from the game board 13 rather than the front end of the right panel unit 500.例文帳に追加As a result, the degree of eyestrain of the player can be reduced, and the player can play games for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is viewed by the player through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106) from the right side. Therefore, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, but the clerk who views the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the cheating player is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the cheating player is prevented from trying to escape. can be prevented.

By reversing the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the area KE may be made visible only to the player and not visible to the store clerk.

115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115(b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 along line CXVb-CXVb of FIG. 115(a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end face (about 5 mm in thickness) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end of the front side of the light guide member 540 (the portion farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the horizontal width dimension is the same gradient over the entire area in the vertical direction. to shrink.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed with the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end surface is increased, the tapered portion is excessively tapered and the width dimension (thickness) is reduced. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched vertically between the portions near the support hole 531b and is arranged in a recessed position toward the rear side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the portion near the support hole 531b Due to the shadow created by , the portion near the support hole 531c is darker than the portion near the support hole 531b and is easily visible.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face of the light guide member 540 at the portion facing the support hole 531c is larger than the end face of the light guide member 540 at the portion facing the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed large, it is possible to ensure a large area of the surface that receives light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visible near the support hole 531c is increased by increasing the amount of light visible near the support hole 531b. It is possible to reduce the degree of darkness due to differences in front-to-rear distance and shadows. As a result, with the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 as the forefront, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform over the vertical direction (the difference in intensity is reduced). )can do.

116 is a partial rear view of right panel unit 500. FIG. 116, illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. In addition, in FIG. 116, an example of the path (advancing direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed due to the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and passes through the inner lens member 530 to be slightly It is diffused and progresses outward.

Conversely, light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as a result of the curving of the light guide member 540 . Therefore, while the arrangement of the LEDs 512a that generate light incident on the light guide member 540 is constant, the light emission modes (sparse and dense, bright and dark) can be made different on both surfaces of the light guide member 540 . In other words, the player can be made to visually recognize the light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

In addition, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is directed toward the player side instead of directly laterally by bending the inner lens member 530 as shown in FIG. 115(b). (See the phantom line arrow in FIG. 115(b). The phantom line arrow in FIG. 115(b) indicates an example of the traveling direction of the light passing through the light guide member 540.). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the lighting effect.

Returning to FIGS. 100 and 101, description will be made. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and has fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. ) and is supported from below, and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14 .

117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 includes an upper frame member 410 fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and a front surface of the upper frame member 410. The electrical decoration unit 401 is arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly 450 is arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. , is mainly provided. 117 and 118, illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side surface is decorated with a model name, etc., and includes a board on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. Light production is performed by emitting light from the enclosed LED.

The illumination unit 401 includes a box-shaped main body 402 made of a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall 403 formed on the rear outer wall of the main body 402, and the wavy wall 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending from the lower edge to the back side in a horizontally long plate shape, and a portion above the plate-like portion 404 that protrudes from the corrugated wall portion 403 to the back side in a cylindrical shape and is inside the cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 405 having a shape penetrating the waved wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted through the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , is mainly provided.

The main body part 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap each other with their open sides, and a space is formed inside. It should be noted that the enclosed LED is arranged on an electronic substrate, and the electronic substrate is fixed to the main body portion 402 .

The wavy wall portion 403 engages with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the mounting position in the left-right direction, thereby facilitating the work of assembling the illumination unit 401 to the upper frame member 410. It is the part that improves the performance.

The plate-like portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the corrugated wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410 , and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 . The front side wall of the upper frame member 410 is recessed with a horizontally long groove that sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 from above and below.

The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through-hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LEDs contained in the body portion 402 are arranged is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to a plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410 . Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 14e and access to the inside is made possible. formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the body frame 14a after the electrical decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

119 is an exploded front perspective view of upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of upper frame member 410. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 fastened and fixed from the rear side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the rear side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. , a left corner support member 430L fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and a left corner support member 430L that is fitted to the main body member 411 from the back side to a position that protrudes from the opening 414 to the front side. and a lens member 440 which is inserted and pressed from the back side by the right corner support member 430R so as to be restrained from coming off to the back side and which constitutes the illumination portion 8033.

The main body member 411 is a member elongated in the left and right direction, in which openings are formed on both left and right sides thereof for passing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and the speaker covers 27 are arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, a wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the tubular portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 is larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. It mainly includes a support through hole 413 penetrating with a slightly larger inner shape, and an opening 414 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electrical decoration unit 401 . This makes it possible to easily perform alignment in the horizontal direction when fitting the illumination unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 .

The tubular portion 405 is inserted through the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). As a result, the wiring projecting through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through-hole 413 to the rear side of the main body member 411 . Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. Thereby, the support through-holes 413 can be used for positioning the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 .

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be visually recognized when viewed from the front. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) is provided with an LED 14e2 at a position that coincides with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.

The main body member 411 has, on its back side, a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the right corner, and a recessed portion from the back side at the lower end surface of the left corner. a supported groove 418 formed at a position close to the upper end, a fastening portion 419 formed at a symmetrical position near the upper end and formed so that a screw can be screwed therein; A fastening portion 419b is mainly provided.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). This makes it possible to easily position the lower edge plate member 420 in the horizontal direction when fastening and fixing it to the main body member 411 .

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claw portions can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500. ), a load (such as weight) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface where the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the electrical decoration part 8031. In the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 through the surface in which the supported groove 418 is formed. It is configured to be able to apply a load (such as weight) given from to the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. and an enlarged rib 419a.

As will be described later, screws inserted through through holes 463a and 483a are fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419 so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e are attached to the main body frame 14a. (see FIG. 125(a)), the details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are three same-shaped ribs arranged at 120° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of screws to the fastening portion 419 .

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is connected to the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411. , and is formed at a position corresponding to recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of speaker assembly 450 at an upper position of main body member 411, details of which will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view at the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the waved wall portion 422 toward the front side, the L-shaped extending portion 423 extends upward from the extended end portion thereof and is formed to have an L-shaped cross section, and the main body plate portion 421 . It mainly includes an opening 424 which is arranged at a position equidistant left and right from the left and right center position (the upper end position of the curved shape) and which is configured by a plurality of small-diameter through holes penetrating in the vertical direction.

In a state in which the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and back contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 abuts the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the portion where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut on the upper and lower sides, thereby improving the strength.

The opening 424 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123) is an opening through which the vibration wave (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 passes (is emitted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L are provided with circular openings 430R1 and 430L1, which are circular openings through which vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450 pass.

The right corner support member 430R has a laterally long rectangular through hole 430R2 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. The player can visually recognize the light emitted to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430 R 2 through the opening 414 .

121 is an exploded front perspective view of speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of speaker assembly 450. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) by screws inserted through connecting holes 469. The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Since the speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having substantially symmetrical shapes, the speaker assembly 450R will be described and the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-shaped speaker) 451, which is an acoustic device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave, and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 inserted through a through hole 466. The front side assembly 460 is fastened and fixed from the front side, and the front side assembly 460 is formed with an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front side assembly 460 in a front view, and a space is formed between the front side assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). a side assembly 480;

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to block the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and emits an effect sound related to the game. A speaker connection wire 453 (for example, an electric wire made up of a copper wire and a coating that covers the copper wire) passes through a through hole drilled in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and the end of the speaker connection wire 453 By connecting the connector to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

A front portion of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451 . The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front portion aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) through the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 cannot be heard. You can play back and output with high sound quality without any loss. In addition, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front portion of the speaker 451 without degrading the sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a main body 461 that is elongated in the left and right direction and formed in a cup shape with an open back side, and a plurality of semicircular tip ends that are recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461 toward the center of the vertical width. and a recessed portion 462 and an extended plate 463 extending from the rear side edge of the recessed portion 463 b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 toward the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the upper and lower width outside. , a wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end of the body portion 461 toward the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner of the body portion 461 in the front-rear direction, and the body portion 461. A circular through hole 466 through which the speaker 451 is inserted on the right side, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and a rear A plurality of fastening portions 468 in which screws inserted through the side assembly 480 are fastened and fixed, and connecting holes 469 in which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted. and a front recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back side toward the front side at the lower end portion of the tip side main body portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 is divided in the left-right direction into a base end-side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a left-right center side of the base end-side main body portion 461B (see FIG. 121). left), and a distal end side main body 461T connected to the center in the left-right direction of the intermediate main body 461M (left side in FIG. 121). A space is continuously formed between the proximal body portion 461B, the intermediate body portion 461M, and the distal body portion 461T and the rear assembly 480 .

The main body portion 461 includes a rear side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in front view. The rear side wall portion 461H has an edge portion without barbs on the inside (an edge portion on the inside where no flange or the like is formed).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. be done.

The extension plate 463 has through holes 463a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. The screws inserted through the through-holes 463a are inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a through the common-fastening holes 14a2 and the common-fastening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and are inserted through the through-holes 483a and 483a of the rear assembly 480 and It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411. As shown in FIG.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted through the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the rear side of the main body frame 14a. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480 . Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the body member 411, thereby being firmly fixed to each other.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material interposed therebetween). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wire passage recess 464 forms part of an opening through which a speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The recess width of the wire passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 . As a result, pressure is applied to the covered portion of the speaker connection line 453 passing through the wire passage recess 464 , thereby preventing a gap from occurring between the wire passage recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. 121 and 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for the sake of convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is illustrated so as to be visible.

Here, in this embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. The speaker connection line 453 that is connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464 . As a result, the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passing through-hole 465 is a through-hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes.

The passage-forming rib 467 abuts on the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap in the front and rear, and bends multiple times into the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). is the rib that forms the This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass. A front side end portion of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to a front side plate of the main body portion 461 . This prevents the formation of a gap on the front side of the passage forming rib 467 .

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (protruding slightly outward from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 includes a body portion 481 formed in a cup shape that is elongated in the left and right direction and has an open front side, and a semicircular tip end recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width. A plurality of recessed portions 482 and an extended plate extending from the rear side edges of the recessed portions 482 and the recessed portions 483b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the upper and lower width outer sides. 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting toward the front side of the body portion 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed through the upper right corner of the body portion 481 in the front-rear direction, and a cup-shaped portion of the body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side and fastening portions 468 of the front assembly 460 are formed as through holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding in the front-rear direction. and a rear recessed portion 491 recessed from the front side toward the back side at a position corresponding to the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction.

The body portion 481 extends in a plate shape toward the front side in such a manner as to surround the outer periphery of the body portion 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the body portion 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. A front side wall portion 481H is formed in a shape that fits inside the inner side surface of the rear side wall portion 461H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R has a double wall portion that is fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire outer periphery, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary protrusions projecting toward the front side beyond the wire pressing protrusions 484 at positions sandwiching the wire pressing protrusions 484 on the left and right with a gap that allows the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. 481 Ha.

The auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily fixed in the wire passage recess 464 from being shifted when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460 . That is, the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are tapered so that they widen to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124(c)), so that the speaker connection line 453 can pass through the wiring passage recess 464. Even if it comes off and shifts to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary projections 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 in the assembly process, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection wire 453 is formed from the wire passage recess 464 and the wire pressing projection 484. can be easily accommodated in an opening in the

The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the recessed portion 462 in a front view, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a concave portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 has through holes 483a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. The screws inserted through the through-holes 483a are inserted from the back side of the body frame 14a through the common-fastening holes 14a2 and the common-fastening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and pass through the through-holes 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the back side of the body frame 14a to the extent that the screw is tightened by screwing a screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460 . Accordingly, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e and the body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing protrusion 484 is protruded along the upper edge of the rear side plate of the main body 481 and formed with a width that fits inside the wiring passage recess 464. The protruding length is slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 .

That is, by passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passage recess 464, the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and the wire press protrusion 484 and the wire passage recess 464 are compressed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the opening formed by being surrounded by 464 and the speaker connection line 453 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 is passed.

The light-passing through-hole 485 is a through-hole through which the light emitted toward the lens member 440 from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) passes. The light passing through-hole 485 is formed of a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passage through-hole 465 has a larger cross-sectional shape than the light-passing through hole 485, and is tapered so that the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side. ), the light passage through-holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage-forming ribs 487 are formed at the same position as the passage-forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear. It is a rib that forms a curved path (see FIG. 123). This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and formed at front and rear end portions and surface positions of the front side wall portion 481H. That is, the back side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the back side plate of the main body portion 481 . This prevents the formation of a gap on the rear side of the passage forming rib 487 .

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed to have dimensions such that the front side end abuts the passage forming rib 467 and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, the passage-forming rib 467 applies a compression force directed toward the back side to the passage-forming rib 487, and the passage-forming ribs 467, 487 elastically deform in the front-rear direction due to the compressive force to close the gap therebetween. (See FIG. 124(b)).

At this time, if the passage-forming rib 487 has a low rigidity in the left-right direction and bends in the left-right direction, the compressive force may not work well and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the passage-forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the overlapped rear surface is reduced). strength to be reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity in the lateral direction of the passage forming rib 487 can be strengthened, and the lateral bending of the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 467 can be closed well. can be done.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed to have a shape inverted from the front recessed portion 471 and forms an opening together with the front recessed portion 471 . The opening is sized to surround the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (protrudes slightly outside the outer shape). It is placed in a position surrounding the outer shape.

123(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460 and FIG. 123(b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. FIG. In FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are arranged to face each other, are shown on surfaces facing each other. is deployed toward the front side of the paper. 123(a) and 123(b) are folded along a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the left-right center of the paper surface, so that the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are adjusted. can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

When the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are assembled (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the speaker assembly 450 has an acoustic chamber on the rear side of the base end main body 461B of the front assembly 460. formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 extends toward the tip side main body portion 461T. This acoustic path is configured as a curved path by path forming ribs 467 and 487 .

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed laterally inward (to the left) of the wire passage recesses 464 through which the wires pass, and alternately vertically toward the left. and rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment).

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are formed at the time of assembly. , and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480 can be prevented from being caught.

Since the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body 461 and the rear side wall 461H, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e enhance the rigidity of the main body 461. can be done.

Each of the rib portions 467 a , 467 b , 467 c , 467 d , 467 e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 form a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, in the case where there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 travels in a straight line. going to proceed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 123(a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws travels to the left side (arrow L side) and the nearest rib portion (for example, rib portion 467b) in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (directions of arrows L and U).

On the other hand, after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is arranged on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is closest in the left-right direction. , rib portion 467c) are arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are arranged alternately in the vertical direction as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path that is bent vertically, Compared to the lateral width of the space, it is possible to secure a longer traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws.

As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the travel path length of the vibration wave Ws until it passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471 and 491, thereby suppressing the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 462 and 463b can also produce the same effect as the passage forming rib 467 does. That is, the vibration wave Ws is caused to move in the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). (Arrows L, U directions).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), the passage-forming ribs 487 are formed inward in the left-right direction (left side) from the wiring pressing protrusion 484 that presses the wiring, and are arranged at a plurality of locations (main ribs) alternately vertically toward the left side. In the embodiment, rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are arranged at five locations).

Since the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are connected to the main body 481 and the front side wall 481H, the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e strengthen the rigidity of the main body 481. can be done.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed to have a shape that matches the shape of each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. ), they are arranged facing each other in the front-rear direction.

The actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 482 and 483b can also produce the same function as the passage forming rib 487. As shown in FIG. That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Accordingly, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is narrowed in vertical width as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and is narrowed once at the position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are vertically aligned. Further, at a position away from the speaker 451 , the vertical width is expanded at once, and then communicates with the opening formed by the concave portions 471 and 491 . Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side body portion 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, so output from the rear side of the speaker 451 The generated vibration wave Ws (sound) seeks an exit and advances toward the distal end side body portion 461T, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the tip-side body portion 461T passes through the opening formed by the front-side recessed portion 471 and the rear-side recessed portion 491, and the opening portion 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420 in this order. As a result, the sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass-reflex type speaker box, and the rear portion of the speaker 451 includes an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, an opening formed by the concave portions 471 and 491, and an opening 424 ( 120), the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010, so the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 can be reproduced and output with high sound quality without being muffled. can be done.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 and the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 are in phase with each other. Sound can be emitted from the opening formed by That is, the bass-reflex type speaker assembly 450 can emphasize the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 by superimposing the sound output from the front side and the sound output from the front side by superimposing them in the same phase without canceling each other due to the opposite phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify heavy bass. As a result, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment is capable of performing realistic effects, and can heighten the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In this embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the low frequency sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is transmitted through the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and is released to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (released downward to the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86)). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player playing the game on the front side of the front frame 14 with the effect of the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 toward the front side.

The sound of the vibration wave Ws (sound) can be tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the vibration wave Ws has a path avoiding the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of the front assembly 460 and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480. is defined. Therefore, by individually setting the arrangement of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d and 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d and 487e and the vertical extension length, the vibration wave Ws (voice ) can be tuned.

In this embodiment, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of the front assembly 460 and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480 serve the following purposes in addition to the above purposes: It is arranged at a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and reinforces the speaker assembly 450 .

For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the fastening portion 468 and the vicinity of the through hole 488 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are screwed.

Further, the extension plates 463, 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125(a)). 467 d and 487 d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 which are closest thereto. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing screws into the fastening portions 468, the fastening portions 419 are inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a of the extension plates 463 and 483. are screwed into the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a. Deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by the ribs 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d.

Also, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, respectively. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is positioned on the upper side plate member. 14e, recessed portions 462 and 482 of speaker assembly 450 ride on fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied from fastening portion 14 e 1 to the upper ends of recessed portions 462 and 482 as reaction force generated when fastening portion 14 e 1 supports the weight of speaker assembly 450 .

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482 and improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 .

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, fraudulent acts such as illegally entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 with a wire, piano wire, or the like are prevented. It can be made easier to control.

In addition, in such fraudulent acts, wires, piano wires, etc. are illegally entered into the game area and nails are deformed. and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, and the opening formed by the wire passing concave portion 464 and the wire pressing convex portion 484. A gap in the opening formed by the wire pressing projection 484 is closed by the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like enters the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly 450 may be displaced through an opening other than the place where the wire or the piano wire entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connection wires 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speakers 451, so that wires and piano wires are not required. It is possible to lengthen the distance between the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 , which is the location where the sound and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 .

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, and it is possible to easily prevent fraudulent profit from being generated.

124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(c). 124(a) is a top view of speaker assembly 450R viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(d) is a partial bottom view of speaker assembly 450R viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a). be. 124(a) and 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, while the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated in the partially enlarged view of FIG. is omitted.

As shown enlarged in FIG. 124(b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that slopes inward toward the rear side. An outer side surface 481Ho (upper surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the rear side, and is fitted with the inner side surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said that As a result, the work efficiency of inserting the front sidewall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear sidewall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is illustrated by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is illustrated by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. A compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c due to the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the rib portions in contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 124(c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed shorter in front-rear dimension than the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the passage through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (squeezed) in the intermediate main body portion 461M compared to the distal end side main body portion 461T. Thereby, the improvement of an acoustic effect can be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 124(d), the internal space of the tip side body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 is the interior of the intermediate body portion 461M. A large space is ensured in a form that bulges in the front-rear direction compared to the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end side main body portion 461T and released at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, for example, it is possible to make it easier to hear deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e along line CXXVa-CXXVa of FIG. 124(a). b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. 124(a).

As shown in FIG. 125(a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419 by screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a. This is a portion that sandwiches the upper side plate member 14e with the body frame 14a. That is, by arranging the enlarged rib 419a on the surface of the extension plate 463 on the front side, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is attached at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450 .

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (passing through the recessed portions 462 and 482 in the fastening direction without coming into contact with each other). It is configured as a portion that fastens and fixes the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14 e without the side assembly 480 .

The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is arranged inside the concave portions 462, 482 (the portion extending toward the rear side is arranged inside). At a lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is arranged inside the concave portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending toward the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, since the separate left and right speakers 451 are arranged in the independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, the reproduction output from the speakers 451 arranged in the speaker assemblies 450R and 450L on the other side is reproduced. In addition to avoiding conflict with the sound to be played, it is possible to reproduce transparent sound with high quality without muddying the reproduced sound.

In this embodiment, the extended plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are in contact with each other at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125(a)). In the lower part, the rear surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e protrudes toward the front side in a portion arranged to face the lower end of the rear assembly 480, The projecting portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut on each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) with the upper side plate member 14e over the entire surface, but is in a line-contact manner particularly at the lower end.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper side plate member 14e (made of synthetic resin), but is limited to this. There is nothing to be done.

For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member made of ebony, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when arranging a metal member, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to employ cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, and the like. By using these metals, it is possible to add depth to the sound.

Moreover, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. Examples include cast iron, steel, glass, and ceramics. By using these members, the rise performance of sound can be improved.

As for the shape, they may protrude in the shape of an elongated plate, may protrude in the shape of spikes, or may protrude in a form with rounded ends. Also, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

The arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is not limited to the rear surface of the lower end portion of speaker assembly 450 . For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the right and left ends of the speaker assembly 450, the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.

For example, when arranged on the rear surface of the upper end portion, a member functioning as an insulator is cylindrical, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. Positioning may be done by In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate locking member for positioning the member that functions as an insulator, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the degree of tightening of the screw inserted through the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the sound effect by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (the load applied to each other).

At this time, even if the screws inserted through the through-holes 483a are loosened, the speaker assembly 450 remains in the same position as the screws inserted through the connecting holes 469 (see FIG. 123(a)) and the connecting holes 469. The upper side is fixed by a screw inserted through a through hole provided on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction in terms of shape, or through a through-hole provided at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through hole is arranged. Since it is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e.

Regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper side frame member 410 is inserted into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e from the rear side in addition to the screws inserted through the through holes 483a. The screw is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125(b)) to fasten and fix. As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, no load is applied to the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely tightening the screws inserted through the through holes 483a (adjusting the degree of tightening).

The relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e is similar to the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the body frame 14a connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can be made to function as an insulator, and the material and contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . 127(b) shows the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be explained. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, a left end front support portion 12a and a left end rear support portion 12b are spaced forward and backward for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. are placed.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines backward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed leftward from the left end. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 are in surface contact.

The rear left end support portion 12b has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting toward the front side toward the left in a state of natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 forms a tapered shape that expands to the side (rightward) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction together with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left front support portion 12a. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 . Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG.

128(a) and 128(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b), and FIGS. 3 is a side view of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the game board 13. FIG. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128(b) and 129(a) show the game board 13 just before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and FIG. 129(b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. illustrated. 128 and Z39, the configuration of a part of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted for easy understanding.

When the worker assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160, and after the upper and lower positions of the game board 13 are aligned to some extent, the left end of the game board 13 is placed. is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture rotated about an axis facing the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is provided. Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the front left end support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the front left end support portion 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the game board 13 is moved around the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the rear edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front surface of the game board 13). It is rotated so as to approach the inner frame 12. - 特許庁In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied toward the game board 13 from the elastic support portions 12b1. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12 .

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom portion 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in a position and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and supports the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1, which are supported from below and whose front upper end portions are cut as inclined surfaces, are provided in the left-right direction.

By configuring in this way, in the process of changing the state from FIG. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be progressed smoothly by causing the game board 13 to ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side. . Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to approximately 15°, which is larger than the backward inclination (approximately 10°) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement arcade. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from reversing in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation, so that the game can be played regardless of the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. Workability when the board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 is not limited to this, and may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the backward inclination at the time of installation of the amusement arcade. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be made horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128(b), as shown in FIG. 129(a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in a released state to be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It abuts on the front surface of the rear claw member 640 .

Here, in the released state, the board support device 600 allows the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the pre-regulation pawl member 630 (parts arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) to enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to be retracted from the path, the workability of assembling the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation pawl member 640 through the game board 13, and the board surface support device 600 is displaced as described later. , and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12.例文帳に追加That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the state of the upper and lower board support devices 600 changes substantially at the same time.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is regulated. As shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 129(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached as the board support device 600 is changed between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 is pushed to the rear side, the game board 13 rotates around the vicinity of the left end. The long width dimension of the game board 13 weakens the force required when applying a load to the inner frame 12, so that even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b at two upper and lower positions (see FIG. 126). 13 is insufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed to the inner frame 12, Also, the extent to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board surface support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is pushed in to close against the inner frame 12, and the game board 13 moves. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the recoil when the front frame 14 is pushed to close against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is fixed by the support parts 12a and 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is vertically positioned on the support bottom 12c. is regulated.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)), it is arranged at the lower end of the back side of the game board 13 and connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a which is connected to the wiring of the game board 13 and is supported on the game board 13 so as to be able to change its position in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a control board which is disposed on the inner frame 12 near the board surface support device 600 on the lower side. The receiving side connector 12d to which the wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back side is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13. FIG.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface supporting device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower members are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12 . Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, one of the board support devices 600 will be explained, and the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

130(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600, FIG. 130(b) is a back perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600. 131(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. 130(a) and 130(b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b) show A release state in which the fixation of the game board 13 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the board support device 600 displaces the open side of the U-shape formed by the front rotating claw member 620 and the rear rotating claw member 640 in the front-rear direction.

132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board support device 600 has a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610 so as to be rotatable. A pivotally supported pre-rotation pawl member 620, and a pre-regulation pawl member rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 disposed on the front side of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation pawl member 620. 630 and a post-rotation pawl member 640 rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 arranged on the rear side of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and fixed through the pre-rotation pawl member 620 .

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at its corners, and a pair of parts of the main body plate portion 611 that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arcuate hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc around the support hole 612 above the support hole 612 on the front side. , an arc recess 614 recessed from below in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612, and is inserted and fixed to the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A rod-shaped regulating rod 615 and a pair of flange-like extensions extending left and right from the plate portion 611a and fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by screws inserted through the through holes 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127(b)). and a fixing plate 616 of .

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member with an enlarged diameter end on the insertion base end side. , are fixed in the support holes 612 . Since the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63 are the same as this fixing method and the shape of the shaft member, the description thereof will be omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted through the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted through the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 includes a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed through the plate portions 621a that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right and are axially supported by the first shaft member P61, and through the plate portions 621a on a straight line at the upper corners on the front side. A pair of support holes 623 formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of support holes 623 formed through the rear side portion of the plate portion 621a on a straight line and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. and a hole 624 .

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted through the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted through the supported hole 632 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 at the same time, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. , the third shaft member P63 is also inserted through the supported hole 642 of the post-rotation pawl member 640 at the same time.

The body plate portion 621 is composed of a long portion 621a1 that is arranged to face the left and right sides and is elongated in the front-rear direction, and an extension portion 621a2 that extends vertically from the front end of the long portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape when viewed from the side, a connecting plate portion 621b connecting and fixing the upper edges of the plate portions 621a, and the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b from the rear side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b. and a rear side extension plate 621c that extends downwardly by about 45 degrees with respect to the plate portion 621a, and the extension portion 621a2 extends perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a toward the opposite side plate portion 621a from the rear side end portion of the extension portion 621a2. A hanging back plate portion 621d provided, and a front side extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d. and are mainly provided.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b are perpendicular to each other, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the hanging rear plate portion 621d are formed to be perpendicular to each other.

The rear-side extended plate 621c is arranged so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, in the released state, the torsion spring NBb abuts and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)). By retracting upward of NBb, the torsion spring NBb starts contacting the body plate portion 611 .

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while preventing the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb from being generated on the operator side. Immediately before finishing, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, it is possible to suppress the force of rotation of the game board 13 by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while reducing the force required at the start of pushing.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that contacts the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. The front-side extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in a direction to bring the front regulating claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction to move the lower end of the post-rotation claw member 640 away from the rear side wall of the body plate portion 611 .

The pre-restricting claw member 630 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 631, which is formed in a shape in which the sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at the corners, and a part of the main body plate portion 631 in the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 penetrating the plate portion 631a on a straight line and supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a to the lower end of the front connecting plate 631b are inclined to the front side. It is mainly provided with an inclined extension plate 633 extending in the same direction and a curved surface 634 curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The obliquely extending plate 633 is a plate portion arranged to face the front frame 14, and is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that abuts against the regulating rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), thereby regulating the free posture change of the front regulating claw member 630 .

The post-rotation claw member 640 includes a main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at corners, and a part of the main body plate portion 641, which is arranged opposite to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 642 formed through the plate portion 641a on a straight line and supported by the third shaft member P63, and a front connecting plate 641b connecting the pair of plate portions 641a to the rear side from the lower end portion thereof. and an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back side of the game board 13 and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and is inclined at an angle of contact with the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129(a)). It is formed.

134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b) show the process of changing the board support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state in chronological order. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), the multi-function cover member 171 arranged close to the board support device 600 and fixed to the board support device 600 The arrangement of the game board 13 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

That is, FIG. 134(a) shows the released state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 135(b) shows the fixed state of the board support device 600. As shown in FIG. In addition, in the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged right behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation pawl member 640 rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61. Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is applied with a biasing force in the direction of approaching the hanging rear plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the front regulating claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, the contact between the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 restricts the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 .

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), as the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotation front claw member 620 While the front side on which the extended portion 621a2 is arranged tilts, the front regulating claw member 630 rises in a manner to separate from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, the regulating rod 615 is in the front side portion of the curved surface 634 and is in contact with the resistance portion 634a that intersects the circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (FIGS. 134A to 134A). 135(a)), the front side end of the regulation front claw member 630 rises as the rotation front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation pawl member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 .

On the other hand, a non-resisting portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resisting portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulating rod 615, When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 are no longer in contact with each other in the circular direction about the second shaft member P62, the rising motion of the front regulating pawl member 630 is released, and the front regulating pawl member 630 faces the inclined extension plate 633. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (see FIGS. 135(a) to 135(b)).

In the angle range (range between FIGS. 134(a) and 135(a)) in which the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is raised, the front side end portion of the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is positioned relative to the pre-regulation pawl member 630. Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting the robot, is applied, the change in the posture of the regulating front pawl member 630 when it operates due to the downward load causes a change in posture in the direction facing the downward load (in the rising direction). As a result, the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive, and the change in the posture of the regulated front claw member 630 against the downward load is regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 abuts against the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

As a result, the rotation of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 due to the downward load applied to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the front regulating claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting motion of the front claw member 620 can be suppressed. In this embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 is released, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is positioned so as to abut on the inclined extension plate 633 of the front claw member 630 . , the shape of the front connection plate 631b, and the length and inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 134(b), the game board 13 abuts on the back surface of the back side extending plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extending plate Rubbing friction occurs between 621c and the game board 13 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) toward the front in the state of FIG. 134(b). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side due to the reaction. can be suppressed.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the release state of the board surface support device 600, in the case of a structure in which the front rotation claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, it is arranged on the front frame 14. Depending on the manner of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 may reach the fixed state, and the board surface support device 600 may not reach the fixed state and may be stabilized at an incomplete angle. may occur.

Assuming that the board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and that the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, the space between the rear surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 The distance between the two becomes shorter, which may interfere with the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multi-function When the cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630 abut against each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from being closed. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 aware that the board support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

Upon noticing this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state. You can stabilize the distance from the front.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135(a), the multifunctional cover member 171 provided on the front frame 14 and the restricting front claw member 171 are in a state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 is fixed. Depending on the manner of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 will reach the fixed state, or that the board surface support device 600 will not reach the fixed state and will be stabilized at an incomplete angle. The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 is projected to a position where it can contact the front regulation claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not regulated by the regulation bar 615 .

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the contact between the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13. None.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 in a state immediately before the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is fixed, the tilting operation of the front side end portion of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is allowed. there is

As a result, when the game board 13 is placed at a position immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the clerk's force to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, 90% of the time the game board is stable). In this case, when a load is applied to the board surface support device 600 from the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 Then, the board support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

Therefore, the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact (Fig. 134(a) )), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the rear side. That is, the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board support device 600 is changed to the fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front side end portion of the pre-regulating pawl member 630, the state of the board support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board support device 600 facing the game board 13 come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in this state, it moves (tilts) while pushing the hanging back plate portion 621d away. The biasing force of the torsion spring NBb given to is given as resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side due to the reaction. can be suppressed.

Between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the front regulating pawl member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resisting portion 634b is disposed facing the regulating rod 615. (See FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is the center. In the direction along the circular arc, the non-resisting portion 634b abuts against the regulation bar 615, and the resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 to the front side increases accordingly.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the possibility of the game board 13 moving (tilting) toward the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side due to the reaction. can be suppressed.

The non-resisting portion 634b of the curved surface 634 extends from the portion that abuts the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(a) to the portion that abuts the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(b). A curved surface is formed with a gradually increasing radius around the biaxial member P62.

135(a), the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed rearward by the multifunctional cover member 171, and when the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates and the second shaft member P62 is displaced, The non-resisting portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are momentarily separated from each other. Therefore, the resistance applied to the front regulating pawl member 630 from the regulating rod 615 is reduced for a moment, and the front regulating pawl member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging rear plate portion 621d by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135(a), the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position just before the board surface support device 600 is fixed, so that the multifunctional cover member 171 can be replaced by the front regulating claw member 630 or the inclined extension plate 633. , and then the board support device 600 can be brought into a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600. That is, in a state in which the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 and the multifunctional cover member 171 134(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when replacing the board surface), it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14. , can improve the work efficiency of workers.

When the board support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled upward in the front direction to rotate the pre-regulation pawl member 630 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, since the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 615 are not in contact with each other in the direction of rotation), the front regulating pawl member 630 can be rotated with a light force, and the rotation continues. By doing so, the board support device 600 can be placed in the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed forward by the displaced post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 134(a), the upper end surface of the game board 13 abuts the lower surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. This eliminates the risk of the game board 13 falling forward when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

Note that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be switched between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes, as in the present embodiment, if the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 will not match up and down. , the load applied to the game board 13 may become excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are operated when the board support device 600 is brought into the released state. does not match In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member 620 supporting the game board 13 are compared with the displacement amount of the pre-regulation pawl member 630. The amount by which 640 is displaced is smaller.

Therefore, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the return is regulated by the regulation rod 615), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are displaced. Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 . Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620 . That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135(b)) to the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the post-rotation pawl member 640 is pushed against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb and the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 can be displaced in the direction of widening the angle between them.

Therefore, compared with the displacement amount of the pre-rotation pawl member 620, since the displacement amount of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation pawl member 640 can be suppressed, 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. Thereby, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

136 shows the released state of the board support device 600, FIG. 137 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 139 shows the rotated state, the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed, and the thickness of the game board 13 supported by the board support device 600 is shown in phantom lines. be done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the board support device 600 and the opening/closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. 138 and 139, the open/close restricting portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed in FIGS. 136 and 137 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the open/close regulating portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operating portion back member 155 above the opening/closing restricting portion 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed when the game board 13 is removed, but the front frame 14 cannot be closed when the game board 13 is placed. is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), the interference between the opening/closing regulation part 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, by arranging the game board 13 on the back side compared to the arrangement when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13 interferes with the operation part back member 155 above the opening/closing regulation part 159. is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is permitted to be closed regardless of whether the game board 13 is present or not.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is rotated from the released state to the fixed state side by a predetermined angle, if the front frame 14 is placed at the closed position (see FIG. 138), The opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board support device 600 interfere with each other.

In this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 prevents the pre-rotation claw member 620 from rotating in the direction of rotation. (Clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the direction of rotation of the front regulating pawl member 630 (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) are opposite to each other, so that the reaction force becomes excessive. It is as described above (see FIG. 134(b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13, closing the front frame 14 is restricted. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, there is a possibility that the lower end of the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extension plate 621c may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is strengthened.

As shown in FIG. 139, in a state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the open/close restricting portion 159 and , and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, when an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 causes the pre-rotation claw member 620 to rotate. The direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotational direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) of the front regulating pawl member 630 are never opposite to each other, and the normal load can be easily pushed in as described above. (See FIG. 135(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the front regulation pawl member 630 can be pushed in via the open/close regulation portion 159, and the board support device 600 can be brought into a fixed state. Therefore, closing the front frame 14 is permitted.

140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12. FIG. 140 and 141 illustrate a state in which the cover member that closes the rear surface of the ball shooting unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will now be described with reference to FIGS. 142-148. FIG. 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit 112a, and FIG. 142(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit 112a. Figures 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. In addition, FIG. 143(a) shows a disassembled state after the cover member 721 is opened, and FIG. 143(b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then turned back and forth. . That is, in FIG. 143(b), the rear side of only the ball receiving member 731 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball shooting unit 112a includes a base member 710 made of metal or die-cast, and a base member 711 made of resin attached to the base member 710. 142(a) partially covering the front surface of the base member 710 and an open state (see FIG. 23(a)) opening the front surface of the base member 710. and a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721 that

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721. The base member 711 is engaged with the base member 710 by a hook or the like that is elastically deformable, is disposed on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of synthetic resin or the like. , a firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, a firing rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 shot by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and a ball receiving member 731 to regulate the posture. a fastening portion 716 which is cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a which bulges in a straight line toward the front side from the base member 710 and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed; mounting holes 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719 .

The base member 711 has a pair of receiving portions 712 at the right corner through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted, and a locking portion 713 drilled on the opposite side of the receiving portions 712 in the left-right direction so that the hook portion 723 can be locked. , and a projecting portion 714 projecting toward the front side close to the right side of the engaging portion 713, and arranged to face the attracting force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142(a)). It mainly includes a defect determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided.

The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142(a)), and extends to the left inner side of the ball passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is closed. An opposing plane 714a formed as a plane facing the side surface 724c and parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a plane opposite to the opposing plane 714a in the left and right direction and inclined rightward toward the rear side. and a surface 714b.

When the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not contact the attraction force generating solenoid 741, while the fastening force generating solenoid 741 is loosened ( It abuts against the cover member 721 when it is floating above the cover member 721 , and is formed with a protrusion height that restricts the rotation of the cover member 721 .

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening of the attractive force generating solenoid 741 is loosened. It is possible to make the user aware that the fastening of the generation solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, it is possible to perform repair (fasten and fix the attracting force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) before a problem occurs in the ball shooting unit 112a.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably and axially supported by a base member 711, a regulated state for regulating the flow of the ball P8 entering the cover member 721, and a control state for the ball P8 (see FIG. 144). and a switching device 740 that is controlled to change state between a permissive state that permits flow down to the launch rail 730 .

The cover member 721 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and formed into a cup shape with the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. a rod-shaped portion 722, a hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left-right opposite side of the rod-shaped portion 722, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144) passes through the position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722 side. a ball passage opening 724 having a possible size and extending in the front-rear direction; and a shaft rod portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740 .

The switching device 740 includes an attraction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member having one end loosely fitted to the shaft portion 726. The attraction force generating solenoid 741 generates magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not the ball guide arm member 742 rotates; A guide sloping portion 744 which is a part of the guide arm member 742 and which is arranged below the ball passage opening 724 and slopes downward as it moves away from the ball passage opening 724, and the ball P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide sloping portion 744. and a regulating projecting portion 745 which is extended by an interval and whose extended end projects toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to the axial rod portion 726 .

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided. A rib portion 724b is arranged above the flow-down plate portion 724a so as to face it and extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib-like manner, and the extended front end surface is inclined downward toward the rear side, and the flow-down plate portion 724a. It mainly includes a left inner side surface 724c that is connected to the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the rear and rightward.

In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)), when the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, since the sphere P8 flows down from the metal member for cutting 725 in a manner separating from the metal member for cutting 725 in the left-right direction, the metal member for cutting 725 is disposed in a manner to protrude inside the sphere passing opening 724, but the sphere P8 and the metal for cutting are separated from each other. Collision with the member 725 can be prevented.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends upward from the middle position of the base member 710 toward the left side. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 is arranged with an interval shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the elongated direction are parallel, and that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a formed as an elongated hole along the direction and for passing a fastening screw, and a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the direction of the elongated hole of the through hole 731a) like the bulging portion 716a. and a restricting groove 731b formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened to the base member 710, the position of the through hole 731a to be fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 716 is selected. The ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be slid along the drawn straight line, thereby adjusting the standby position (separation distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the firing strength when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be maintained unchanged.

The firing rail 730 is formed by bending a metal plate to have a substantially M-shaped cross section, and has a rolling plate portion 730a formed to have a substantially V-shaped cross section and extending obliquely upward to the left, and a rolling plate portion 730a. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c that hang down from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a. Attached to member 710 .

A rail guard 733 made of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c to prevent noise and vibration caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball. suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface with a substantially V-shaped cross-section, and contacts the two front and rear portions of the peripheral surface of the ball P8 (see FIG. 146(b)) to push the ball P8 upward. configured to guide.

FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device 720. FIG. 144(a) to 144(c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

144(a), the switching device 740 of the ball feeding device 720 is in the regulated state (the power supply to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). , the regulating projecting portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, contacts the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the allowable state (state in which power is supplied to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protruding portion 745 retreats above the sphere, and the restriction on the flow of the sphere P8 is released, so that the sphere P8 flows above the guide inclined portion 744. As shown in FIG. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts against the front side wall of the base member 711 to prevent it from further flowing down, and stays on the upper surface of the guide slope 744 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state, so that the ball P8 riding on the guide slope portion 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744 and is guided to the launch rail 730. As shown in FIG.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144(c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144(a), even in the state shown in FIG. flow is regulated. Thus, balls can be fed to launch rail 730 one ball at a time. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 86) and stored in the upper tray 17. be.

145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. FIG. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A cut with an acute angle is formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and the same plate as the plate on the proximal side of the lower blade portion 725b. and an upper blade portion 725c extending from.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back side more than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side projects upward from the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower edge of the upper blade portion 725c slopes downward toward the proximal side (left side), and the upper edge of the lower blade portion 725b slopes upward toward the proximal side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a string member such as a kite string fixed to the ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the ball P8 and entered will be described.

FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the sphere-launching unit 112a, FIG. 146(b) is a partial top view of the sphere-launching unit 112a as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a), and FIG. ) is a front view of the ball shooting unit 112a, and FIG. 147(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725, showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147(a). 148 is a partial front view of ball launching unit 112a, inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 after launching ball P8. In addition, in FIGS. 146 and 147, illustration of some constituent members of the ball shooting unit 112a is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146(a) and 146(b), the ball P8 guided to the launch rail 730 stays in contact with the left lower edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146(a)). ), a current is applied to the firing solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 protrudes vigorously, thereby applying a firing force to the ball P8 and launching the ball P8 along the firing rail 730 (Fig. 147(a)). )reference).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the string Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the string Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. , loosening, etc., is known to cause the ball P8 to be repeatedly detected by the winning opening.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut using the momentum of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in such a manner that it is drawn to the right as it goes toward the rear side. (See FIG. 146(b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the yarn Y8 is moved by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the launch rail 730 passing under the flow-down plate portion 724a. Since it moves along the upper surface, the yarn Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c that overhangs the flow-down plate portion 724a, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c. .

While the player is gripping the front end (the other end) of the string Y8, a load is applied to one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8 as the ball P8 is launched, causing the string Y8 to is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize winning opening.

If the launch strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the string Y8 will not be cut due to insufficient tensile force applied to the string Y8. The ball flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the prize-winning opening, so that the fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize-winning opening can be eliminated.

Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. FIG. The game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 is different from the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 in that the petal motion device 800 is visible from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. are substantially the same.

A performance operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and a forward/backward motion unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance/retreat operation unit 900 vertically moves the petal operation device 800 by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance/retreat operation, i.e., movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, movement including at least one of the movement of retracting toward the outside of the display area of the pattern display device 81), and the petal movement device 800 is connected to one end, and the other is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100 and the driving force of the driving motor 921 is transmitted through the arm gear 924 to rotate the driving side arm member 910, and the driving side arm member 910 is driven. A driving motor 921 that generates a driving force, a transmission means 920 that is composed of a plurality of gears that transmit the driving force of the driving motor 921 to the driving side arm member 910 , and the driving side arm member 910 rotates in conjunction with the driving side arm member 910 . A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930 that slides in the left-right direction with a second slide plate 930, a second thin plate-shaped effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding motion of the slide plate 930, and the drive side arm member 910 on the left and right opposite side, It mainly includes a long plate-like driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal motion device 800 .

Next, the structure of the petal motion device 800 will be described. 153 is a front view of petal motion device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of petal motion device 800 taken along line CLIV--CLIV of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 154, the supporting base material 801 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

The petal motion device 800 is configured such that members such as petals 802 are supported by a supporting base material 801 . As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the drawing, it is formed of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It comprises a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position near the upper right portion of the central body portion of the supporting base material 801 , and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 extends forward through a narrow gap formed in the supporting base material 801 . A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the projection.

An opening 801P is formed in the central main body of the supporting base 801 at a position slightly below and to the left of the central motor 804, and is arranged to the right of the opening 801P. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, a doughnut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) is recessed from the front side to the rear side in a donut shape through which an arc plate 880d for detection of a loose fitting device 880, which will be described later, can pass. It is formed.

An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the central motor 804 to the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the supporting base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening the vertically long, roughly oval area in the central portion. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion forming an upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion forming a region below the upper end portion.

In this embodiment, the support base 801 has a shape that extends slightly vertically as a whole. The operation space can be reduced by forming the 801 into a shape that is long in the vertical direction rather than in the shape that is long in the horizontal direction.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are interlocked (linked) to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G which are concentrically arranged so as to overlap the position of the opening 801P as will be described later. It can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other. It is placed on the right (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal motion device 800 that is supported in a slightly tilted posture toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from sagging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base 801 and the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base 801. driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base 801 by

155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 155 and 156, illustration of the supporting base material 801 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin molded to imitate the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes a hibiscus flower in an open state as a whole. , and has a plate-like flat plate member 803 on the back side.

157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820. FIG.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape that extends radially in the arranged state, and has a shape that gently bulges forward from the center to the outer periphery (see FIG. 154). ).

The surface of the petal 802 is formed with irregular unevenness including a large number of wrinkles, and the periphery also has an irregularly uneven shape when viewed from the front. Strictly speaking, the five petals 802 do not have the same shape, and although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like, they are formed in roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red), but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge is darkened in the specific color (red) without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. Coloring is done.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802S extending cylindrically rearward and having a screw hole inside, at two locations near the outer circumference of the rear side surface of each petal 802 and at the center portion in the radial direction. there is

The petal 802 is arranged from the rear side portion 802a to the round tip side (counterclockwise side when viewed from the front, right side of FIG. The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharp tip shape side (the clockwise side when viewed from the front, the left side of the paper surface of FIG. 157(a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side 802b is positioned closer to the rear cover 886 of the loose fit device 880 than the rear side 802a.

The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side 802a of one adjacent petal 802, and the rear side 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side 802b of the other adjacent petal 802, thus five petals. petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are directed toward the same center and gathered.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced in the front-rear direction. Since the positional relationship can be adjusted, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the petals 802 as a whole between the gathered position and the fully opened position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made remarkable.

The five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) posterior side surface with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, the flat plate members 803 are long plate-shaped resin members separated from each other and fixed to the five petals 802 respectively.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer peripheral edge extends forward.

In the vicinity of the opening S1 (in the vicinity of the inner periphery) of the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of screw-in portions 803S extending cylindrically to the rear and having screw holes therein are arranged in the circumferential direction (flat plate). It is integrally formed at a position separated in the lateral direction of the member 803 .

The screw-in portions 803S are formed on both side walls in the circumferential direction (transverse direction) of each flat plate member 803 so as to be substantially flush with each other. A slide rib 803a which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extends rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S. , formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803 has two screw insertion holes therein corresponding to the screw-in portions 802S of the petals 802. A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

The screw-in portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 is brought into contact with the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 from the front, and a screw is screwed in from the rear. fixed respectively.

158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. FIG. 155 and 156 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 158 and 159 as appropriate. A slit member 810 is arranged behind the flat plate member 803 as shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a plate-shaped member made of resin having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is bored in the center. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front side peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear side peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the periphery of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

Returning to FIG. 156, description will be made. On the rear side peripheral wall portion 813, two adjacent two out of five equally spaced places in the circumferential direction and one place in the middle of the three places excluding the two are cylindrically shaped in the front and rear direction. A screw-in portion 813S having a screw hole is formed integrally therewith, and a positioning boss 813a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the screw-in portion 813S is not formed among the above five locations. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to protrude in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, the details of which will be described later.

The slit member 810 has a central slit 814 and side slits 815 as shown in FIG. Each of the central slits 814 is formed to linearly extend further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811 . However, with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the central slit 814 is rotated by an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in this pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. It extends along the inclined direction D12.

Both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight gap.

In this manner, a set of three slits, that is, the central slit 814 and the two-side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five points in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72° intervals). Note that each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) when viewed from the front, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the two-side slit 815 located on the outermost side in the set of these three slits, that is, among the four corners of the three slits, the two corners on the smaller diameter side are the two-side slits. It has a substantially rectangular shape extending in the direction of extension of 815 (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extension (cut) is for inserting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803. As shown in FIG.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side ends of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815. is provided with an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811 .

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed in the circumferential direction and the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the set of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. , five sets of central slits 814 and two side slits 815 are arranged more densely in such a way that they are arranged inwardly, which also makes the slit member 810 compact in appearance.

In other words, compared to the case where the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 were arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. , the five pairs of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 can be laid out more densely when arranged and formed to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above. The peripheral shape can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , slide members 820 are arranged in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 from behind the slit member 810 . As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a member made of resin having a long plate-like front shape. A molded extending portion, a central portion that is thicker than the effecting portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extending portion, and the center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 that protrudes from the front side and is inserted through the central slit 814 in the assembled state, a slide pin 823 that is fixed in such a manner as to protrude from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side and penetrate back and forth, Prepare.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the sliding member 820 is positioned so that the extending direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 in the slit member 820 crosses the longitudinal direction at right angles. and the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted from the front side into the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810 . In the fully inserted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810 very slightly. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted through the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and are screwed into the screw portions 803S of the plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with little clearance, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost aligned along the corresponding outer edges of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. inserted without gaps.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810. At this time, the flat plate member 803 does not turn around the guide pin 822 and faces a certain outward direction. is regulated by the slide rib 803a.

160 is a front perspective view of slide member 820 and central motor 804, and FIGS. 161(a) and 161(b) are rear perspective views of slide member 820 and central motor 804. FIG. Note that the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted in FIG. 161(a). 155 and 156 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 160 and 161 as appropriate.

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

A peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall extends along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to form an elongated loop when viewed from the front. It is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830 .

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall of the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 . The width of the inner side of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight clearance of play. The edge corner portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to be rounded.

The guide rail 832 extends clockwise in a front view along a direction substantially midway between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 from a position in contact with the outer side of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. , and extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while curving in an arc further toward the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 175(a)).

The end of the guide rail 832 on the pivot opening 831 side, that is, the peripheral wall of the portion that contacts the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall on the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end portion thereof protrudes forward from the front end portion of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 .

Around the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831, four more guide rails 832 are formed in the same manner as described above. It extends so as to expand in a spiral shape from the surroundings to the outside.

As shown in FIG. 161, on the rear side of the rotating plate 830, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the form of a peripheral wall and having teeth on its outer periphery is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804. As shown in FIG.

The rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 154 . At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 projecting rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174(c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is linearly rather than surface-wise. As a result, the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted over the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly rotatably supported.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter than the second gear 830G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is concentrically arranged and fixed on the rear side of the second gear 830G. , are arranged to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 .

A circular pivot opening 810a is formed in the center of the third gear 810G. A screw insertion hole 810b is drilled at a position corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S, and a positioning hole 810c is drilled at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to be superimposed on the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. The positioning boss 810G 813a (see FIG. 156) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 810c, and fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw-in portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

As a result, the slit member 810 is linked to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805. is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to come off.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , a central shaft rotating device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810 . The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and loose fitting device 880. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the cylindrical peripheral wall is cut along the axial direction, and a shaft portion 852 of the shaft portion 852. A disk-shaped flange 855 is provided at the front end to increase the diameter, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a bore portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction. Around the bore portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, a front side threaded portion 857 having a screw hole inside and a threaded portion 857 on the side of the bore portion 856 from the front side threaded portion 857 are provided on the left and right sides of the bore portion 856. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a deviated position and is drilled toward the rear side, and two columnar support projections 859 that slightly extend slightly forward are integrally formed. . The front end of the front threaded portion 857 and the base of the support projection 859 have the same extension height.

On the inner peripheral surface of the inner cavity portion 856, there are cylindrically extending along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing locations, extend further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and extend inside. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, rear positioning bosses 854 are integrally formed at positions equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 on the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163 , an LED board 861 is arranged on the front side of the central shaft member 851 . The LED board 861 is a substantially disc-shaped board having a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED board 861 at positions corresponding to the front screw portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

By inserting the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 and positioning it, and inserting the screw through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861 into the front screw part 857 of the central shaft member 851 , the LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

In addition, an insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and has a size that allows the threaded portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be fitted therein.

As shown in FIG. 162, on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, there are a central point and a number of points arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles extending in multiple (double) directions around this one point. The LEDs 865 are arranged and fixed so as to emit light forward.

Sideways LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of positions arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction near the outer periphery on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 and the forward LEDs 865 are alternately arranged concentrically. A connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed to the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861 so as to face rearward.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861 . The central decorative member 868 has a specific color (yellow), but is made of a resin material that is almost transparent. It has a pair of threaded portions 869 in which screw holes are formed.

The threaded portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 . A screw portion 869 passing through an insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861 abuts against the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the LED substrate 861 sandwiched therebetween, and a screw is screwed into the screw portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855. Thereby, the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855 . Thereby, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861 .

The loose fitting device 880 includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed in a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an outer peripheral surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter It mainly includes a body cylindrical member 883 which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and rotatably and loosely fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 .

The main body cylindrical member 883 is provided with screw-in portions 883S, which extend cylindrically in the front-rear direction and have screw holes therein, integrally at two of the four locations equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the threaded portion 883S is not formed among the above-mentioned four portions.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, on the main body cylindrical member 883, rib-like projections are projected in the outer diameter direction at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with a projection length similar to that of the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. A sliding rib 883b is formed extending across.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 149), the decorative member 884 covering the LED board 861 from the front side and the decorative member 884 are arranged on the outside. A back cover 886 which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, forms a cup shape with an empty bottom rising toward the front from the outer peripheral side of the fastening portion, abuts on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the rear side, and is fastened and fixed. , are provided.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010) on the front and back surfaces, so that the side surfaces are mirror-finished. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light of the lateral LEDs 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery, it is possible to perform light emission effects.

The decorative member 884 is a member that emits light by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861. The decorative member 884 is shaped like a hibiscus flower and transmits light in a specific color (red). a front side plate portion made of a resin material having properties, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the rear side plate portion forming a disc shape in which the peripheral wall rises to the rear side on the rear side thereof. An opening 885 having a size that allows the central decorative member 868 to be inserted is formed in the central portion.

The body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851 . The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G arranged behind the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a fourth gear 880G having a slightly smaller diameter than the third gear 810G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is concentrically arranged and fixed. It is meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the supporting base material 801 and mesh with each other.

One gear of the intermediate gear 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear that meshes with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates through the intermediate gear 808 in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

A circular pivot opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and around the pivot opening 880a, screw insertion holes are provided at positions corresponding to the two screw portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are drilled at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a.

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to be superimposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted on the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850. 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 880c, and fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw-in portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from slipping off, and the slit The member 810 is held by the body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to come off.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d extending rearward in an arc around the rotation shaft on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. The detection arc plates 880d are arranged at five locations with equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) in the assembled state (see FIG. 154), and is arranged to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. It is detected by a coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotation angle (minimum angle 72° detection can be performed and rotations greater than 72° can be ensured by detection).

Assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their rear ends slightly protrude rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning. Further, the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base 801 by inserting the rear side threaded portion 853 protruding rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion portion 801S in the support base 801 and screwing.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the bore portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the mounting structure described above, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward from the support base member 801, and as shown in FIG. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 is fitted onto the large diameter cylindrical member 882 so that the front side peripheral wall portion 812 is fitted onto the large diameter cylindrical member 882 .

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is locally bulged at eight places along the circumferential direction by the screw-in portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted to the main cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is thereby brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the slit member 813 in a linear manner rather than in a planar manner. Smoothly rotatably pivoted.

164 is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800, the driving side arm member 910 and the driven side arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. FIG. The petal motion device 800 vertically moves (advances and retreats) by applying a load in the vertical direction from the drive-side arm member 910 . 150 to 152 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG. 164 and subsequent figures.

The back plate 1100 is a laterally elongated rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest part inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the game board 13. A support column 1110 that protrudes in the front side in a columnar shape, a gear housing portion 1120 that is recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a vertical alignment at the center position of the left and right. a rail fixing part 1130 arranged in the , and a support long hole 1140 drilled as a long hole inclined downward as it approaches the rail fixing part 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing part 1130 interposed therebetween, Mainly provide

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910. The support column 1110 has a pair of left and right holes in the vicinity of the outer circumference of the front end portion thereof, into which screws can be screwed. A screw-in portion 1111 is formed, and a pair of upper and lower positioning bosses 1112 extending to the front side on the same plane as the tip end edge of the screw-in portion 1111 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driving side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a V-shape when viewed from the rear, and one end thereof is perforated in a circular shape in the front-rear direction and has a support column. 1110, a rotary shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by 1110; A transmission long hole 913 is drilled in a linear long hole shape from the bending point of the long main body member toward the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the other end of the long main body member supports the petal motion device 800. A support portion 914 is mainly provided.

The drive-side arm member 910 includes an inner fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted in the transmission long hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that protrudes radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162 . In conjunction with it, it rotates about the support column 1110 as an axis.

The gear housing portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is housed. A first accommodation portion 1121, a second accommodation portion 1122 connected to the first accommodation portion 1121, and a drive-side arm member arranged opposite to the first accommodation portion 1121 with the second accommodation portion 1122 interposed therebetween. It mainly includes a third accommodation portion 1123 in which an arm gear 924 fitted with 910 is accommodated.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, illustration is omitted in FIG. 165) that is supported so as to be vertically slidable by stacking a plurality of metal plates in the front-rear direction. It has an insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits into the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. placed on a line. The rigidity of the motion rail 1000R keeps the attitude of the petal motion device 800 constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole for slidably supporting the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined at an angle of about 50° in a front view so as to descend toward the left. An extension wall 1141 extending to the front side is provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven-side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 slidably supported in the support slot 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a support portion 952 that supports the petal motion device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951 , and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951 a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state in which the collar is fitted in the long support hole 1140 . Thus, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100 . That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported projection 951 and the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the width of the support slot 1140 .

166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is slidably supported in the lateral base 1000S by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported elongated holes 931 drilled in the front-rear direction in the form of elongated holes extending in the left-right direction. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 through a base-end-side elongated hole 932 that is drilled in the front-back direction in the shape of a vertically-extending elongated hole provided on the left-end side, and is provided on the right-end-side. It is connected with the second effect member 940 through a tip side insertion hole 933 drilled in the front-rear direction.

The base-side elongated hole 932 has a stop portion 932a formed at its upper end along the trajectory of the connecting projection 912 rotating around the support column 1110, and extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stop portion 932a. Mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base member 1000S is a columnar portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in a front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 in a front view, and has a threaded portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed. a plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the support column portion 1150 that has a fastening plate portion 1001S that is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted; The support projections 1002S are provided in a columnar shape to the rear side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931, and the support projections 1002S are provided circularly in the front-view right corner in the front-rear direction. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940 together with the shaft support hole 1003S, and an arc recess 1004S that is recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and similarly the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. and a protruding streak portion 1005S protruding toward the front side along an arc shape having the same center.

The support projection 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar extends from the tip of the supported projection 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931. It is arranged in the gap between them, and in this state, it is configured as a part that supports the slide plate 930 so as to be slidable by screwing a retaining screw from the tip of the support projection 1002S.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recessed portion 1004S and the protruding portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second effect member 940. It is the part that In addition, the protrusion 1005S does not contact when the second effect member 940 is in the regular position, but is formed with a protrusion height that allows contact when it is displaced from the regular position or bent. be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body part whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed in a circle centered on the shaft support 941. A shaft support pillar 941 which is provided in a columnar shape and is pivotally supported with a collar interposed in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary projection which is arranged close to the shaft support pillar 941 and is provided in a columnar shape to the rear side. A part 942 is mainly provided.

The shaft support 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S. It has an inlet 941a (see FIG. 152). A disc-shaped cover member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is arranged at the tip of the shaft support portion 941 inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S with the collar interposed therebetween, and the threaded portion 941a is screwed. The lid member 945 plays a role of retaining by screwing a screw into the . Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted through the distal end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and is prevented from coming off the slide plate 930 by fastening and fixing a circular resin collar to the distal end thereof. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip end side insertion hole 933 .

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is a protrusion that displaces near the center of the width of the arc recess 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc recess 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary projections 942 come into contact with the arc recesses 1004S to generate resistance, thereby suppressing bending deformation.

Description will be made with reference to FIG. The back plate 1100 has three screw-in portions 1161 into which screws can be screwed when fastening a plate-like support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921, and a radial outward direction from the arm gear 924 within a predetermined angle range. A detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 projecting to the top, a shaft support 1163 that rotatably supports a collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates an urging force in the direction of lifting the petal motion device 800, and a long support hole. a cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to be able to support the board cover 1000C at the lower right side of 1140; A threaded portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed is mainly provided.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the direction of movement of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even if the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use and the portion that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 in front view is missing, the screw-in portion 1006S can 2 Displacement of the production member 940 can be regulated.

In this way, the board cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are arranged in a back-and-forth layered manner and fastened to each other. 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easy to suppress vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base member 1000S even when the petal motion device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive-side arm member 910. can be done.

Next, referring to FIGS. 168 to 173, the vertical motion of the petal motion device 800 by the forward/backward motion unit 900 will be described. 1100, and FIGS. 169, 171 and 173 are rear views of the petal motion device 800 and the forward/backward motion unit 900. FIG.

168 and 169 illustrate a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and FIGS. ) is arranged at the connecting position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the proximal side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, when the driving side arm member 910 is located at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the driving side arm member 910 is aligned with the inner fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 173). 151) as a base point and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924 . Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced, and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (an idle rotation range), thereby reducing the resistance when the drive motor 921 is started. can do.

In FIGS. 170 and 171, the petal motion device 800 is slightly lowered compared to the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are kept in the same position. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal motion device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 .

From FIGS. 170 and 171 to FIGS. 172 and 173, it is visually recognized that the petal operating device 800 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked due to the interlocking of the driving side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930. can be made

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 to the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, the second effect member 940 acts as if following the petal motion device 800. It can be visually recognized as if

Next, the collection and rotation operation of the petal motion device 800 will be described. FIG. 174(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 174(b) is a front view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 174(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

175(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175(b) is a rear view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 175(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. 175(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 176(b) is a front view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 176(c) is a central shaft rotation device 850. 176(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

177(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 177(b) is a rear view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 177(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. 177(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 178(b) is a front view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 178(c) is a central shaft rotation device 850. 178(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

179(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 179(b) is a rear view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 179(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. 179(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal motion device 800 is lowered by the up-and-down motion and is at the lowest position, it changes from the initial position (collected position) shown in FIGS. 178 and 179 to the fully open position, and then perform a rotating operation (second operation) at the fully open position. operation) and return to the initial position (collecting position).

At the initial position (concentrated position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is aligned with the inner end of the central slit 814 in the slit member 810 (the end on the side of the circular opening 811). 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are at the central decorative member 868 in the center, and the flowered hibiscus as a whole. It is in a state of gathering to form a flower.

When the petals 802 are at the initial position (concentrated position) as described above, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G counterclockwise as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. As the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175(d)) is interlocked with the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175(d)), the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate clockwise as indicated by an arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotary plate 830 is fitted on the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance. can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted on the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above. Since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a torque small enough to cause the above-described rotary plate 830 to start.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially only the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, and the slit member 810 is held stationary (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

When the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, as shown in FIG. Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction while being guided by the guide rail 832 .

At this time, the movement of the slide pin 823 is restricted by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. move under the guidance of

At this time, since the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, some torque is also applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held stationary, the slide pin 823 linearly moves outward along the central slit 814 as the rotary plate 830 rotates.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start expanding radially outward from the concentrated position. In this expanding operation, as described above, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is tilted counterclockwise by an angle θ11 with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward. faster to

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction in front view, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large, but the slide pin is moved by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotary plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, so that the petals 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the case described above, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and furthermore, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed increases. Both declines become more pronounced.

Also, at this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the front view along the middle direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 from the center side end as shown in FIG. After that, it extends outward from the direction D15 while curving in an arc toward the clockwise side in the front view, and the five guide rails 832 extend outward in a spiral shape as a whole. .

As the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in this manner, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed decreases. Furthermore, the more the guide rail 832 curves in an arc toward the clockwise side in front view than the direction D15, the more remarkable the decrease in the load on the slide pin 823 and the decrease in the moving speed.

That is, in the case of the central slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by inclining the slide pin 823 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in a front view and curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830 is formed in a groove shape, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 to reduce it.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates therethrough, there is little fear of deviation. is configured to

In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, troubles such as deviation are prevented and power transmission is ensured. , and has a structure in which roles are divided.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178(d)), the five pairs of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It spreads radially to reach a fully open state, and the spreading operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially and discretely to a position continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 in a front view. A petal 802 is arranged in the . As a result, the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 can be seen together like a slightly larger hibiscus flower compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visible (see FIG. 174(b)). 178(b)).

In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end of the central slit 814, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and cannot move outward any more, the slide pin 823 is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814 thereafter. Therefore, a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805 prevents the rotary plate 830 from rotating further in the same direction as before. Therefore, by stopping the operation of the central motor 804, it is possible to maintain the fully open state after the expansion operation is completed.

After completion of the opening operation, the center motor 804 transmits rotational power in the same direction to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction as indicated by arrow A12 in FIG. 178(d) together with the rotary plate 830. In this way, after the opening operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a fully opened state as indicated by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178(b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expanding operation and the rotary plate 830 is continuously applied with rotational power, the expanding operation and the rotating operation can be performed immediately without any interval. can be transferred.

When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in front view in the fully open state as indicated by arrow A13, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise in front view) as indicated by arrow A14 in FIG. 178(b). rotate to Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the single petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 becomes larger. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

When the above rotation operation is finished, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G in the clockwise direction as indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. While being braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, first only the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction as indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b). are assembled in the opposite direction.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement, to the inner end, which is the inner limit of movement in the central slit 814, and along with this, the five pairs of petals 802 move from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 at the center. 174 and 175, and returns to the gathering state to complete the gathering operation.

Thereafter, the central motor 804 may be stopped to terminate the operation of the petal motion device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. 179(b), the first gear 804G is rotated clockwise as indicated by arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b). Rotate clockwise when viewed from the front.

When the petals 802 rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front as indicated by arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) as indicated by arrow A17 in FIG. 174(b). rotate to Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the single petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 becomes larger. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

By controlling the central motor 804 as described above, the gathering operation can be stopped and then shifted after an interval, or can be changed immediately so as to be continuous without an interval. can also be

Here, in this embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. , the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal motion device 800 is rotating by determining the output of the detection sensor 801c.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed by walls on all sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 9140 is configured in such a manner that a notch 9145b is formed in the wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and the sheet metal member 9150 protrudes along the notch 9145b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 has an internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and a lower end portion and a front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the rear side in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending upward from the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the end of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recess direction, and the depth of the recess is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 is in contact with the lower surface of a top stop projection (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) toward the back side, and the upward force generated from the interior of the foul ball passage portion 9145. configured to withstand the load.

This thin plate blade part 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage part 9145, and by pulling or loosening the thread Y8, illegally manipulates the ball inside the game area to take countermeasures against fraudulent profits. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Possible frauds are now discussed.

Returning to FIG. 148, description will be made. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with the cutting metal member 725 for cutting the string Y8 fixed to the ball. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball by utilizing the momentum of the ball being shot, but if the momentum of the ball is weak, the yarn Y8 will be cut. The ball was sometimes launched without

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146 , passes through the foul ball passage portion 145 , and is discharged to the lower tray 50 . Therefore, there is no risk that the ball will enter the game area directly.

On the other hand, for example, if the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the thread Y8 is weakly struck, and in a state where the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, the other end of the thread Y9 is hit. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the thread Y8 is placed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701). Y8 is not cut by the metal member 725 for cutting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is hit vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without being cut by the string Y8. The previously shot ball P8 passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the player's front side, and is stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who commits fraud can pull or loosen the string Y8 by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower tray 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2), etc., and gain illicit benefits.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the thread Y8 to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends thereof is used to commit a fraudulent act as described above, the thin plate blade is attached to the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when a person who commits fraud pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed on the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the thread Y8 is pulled, the thread Y8 can be arranged inside the notch 9145b, and the thin plate blade portion 9153 can rub the thread Y8.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 contacts the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145, thereby increasing the resistance force against the upward load. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 toward the outside of the foul ball passage portion 9145 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the thread Y8 to the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the thread Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153 . As a result, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be prevented from being cracked or chipped due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140 , the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is positioned lower than the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 . More specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. This makes it easier for the yarn Y8 to be damaged by the payout ball. That is, since the person who commits the fraudulent act is afraid that the fraudulent act will be discovered, after holding the ball P8, in order to prevent the store clerk from suspicion, the person should keep the ball P8 close to the body (for example, in the pocket of the trousers). ), it is easy to cheat by pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the thread Y8 is maintained in a state of extending toward the player along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (in contact with the upper surface). At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched through a position above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 by about the diameter of the ball (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when a prize ball is paid out, the ball discharged from the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 to the lower tray 50 collides with the lower tray 50 and bounces around. The bottom plate 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down toward the right while stepping on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the 53 and hitting the thread Y8, and the bottom opening arranged behind the ball removing lever 52. flow down through That is, by arranging the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 above the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the upper limit position for jumping around), the front door side lower tray The ball discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 can contact the thread Y8, increasing the possibility of damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 at an early stage.

Thirdly, the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is formed with a right inclined surface 9142a which is inclined downward toward the right. The right sloping surface 9142a makes it easy to impart a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 .

As a result, the ball can be directed toward the yarn Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball delivered to the lower tray 50 declines. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly impart a rightward (foul ball passage portion 9145 side) velocity component to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower tray 50. It is possible to increase the percentage of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, The lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area on the right side of the ball guide opening 53 (an area of about 1/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53), and a boarding restricting stepped portion is provided at the boundary thereof. 9053a is formed.

As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a consists of the right end (right edge) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 and the foul disposed on the right side of the right inclined surface 9142a. It is configured as a plane portion that connects the left end (left end side) of the bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding restriction stepped portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 and the foul ball passage portion. 9145 are communicated. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 can flow rightward along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought closer to the thread Y8.

Note that the vertical width of the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, the ball that rolls in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction stepped portion 9053a can be restricted from riding up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. In other words, the riding restricting stepped portion 9053a allows the passage of the ball in the horizontal direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (direction from right to left). Acts as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on four sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in the wall forming the foul ball passage 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 protrudes along the notch 10145c. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG.

Figures 184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed obliquely from the upper right, FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 seen from the oblique upper left, and FIG. A state seen obliquely from below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, passage forming unit 10140 differs from passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of foul ball passage portion 10145. FIG.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 includes a notch 10145c recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the rear side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. The sheet metal member 10150 is provided with thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending toward the front side in a manner covering the lower portion of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the depth of the recessedness is approximately twice the radius Ra (see FIG. 180) of the sphere (diameter). be. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole drilled in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d in which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the rear side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has an outer shape of the front view shape of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. An auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to protrude from the side surface on the back side of the . 184 and 185, the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and is omitted from the drawing in FIG.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)). It is about the radius Ra of P8. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the foul ball passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are cracked or chipped by colliding with the ball P8. , and the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

A projecting distal end 14d3 of the auxiliary projecting portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape extending toward the back side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-to-rear width) of the gap on the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 becomes wider as it is closer to the passage portion 145a. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a can be easily introduced into the clearance on the rear side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2, which is the clearance in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is located on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and a part that constitutes a forked blade portion, and extends leftward from the right end of the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153 in a manner that is slightly upwardly inclined. As a result, an acute-angled concave portion 10155 having an acute angle is formed between the first thin-plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin-plate blade portion 10154 .

Note that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, like the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute-angled concave portion 10155 is arranged on the rear side of the projecting tip 14d3 and on the front side of the rear side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, the thread Y8 can be made to enter the acute-angled recess 10155 and be easily damaged.

Since the second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side compared to the first thin plate blade portion 10153, the thread Y8 is pulled obliquely downward on the front side by the person who commits the fraudulent act. can easily enter deep into the acute recess 10155 .

A plate-like portion connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is configured to abut against the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145 d and withstand the upward load generated from inside the foul ball passage portion 10145 .

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged to face opposite left and right sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the left and right opposite directions. be. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the left-right opposite direction.

For example, a person who commits a fraudulent act releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area, thereby avoiding the discovery of the fraudulent act. However, according to this embodiment, a load is applied to the thread Y8 or the ball P8 in the left-right opposite direction at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays there.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 remain inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the length of time during which the thread Y8 is exposed to the game area can be increased, thereby expediting the discovery of fraud.

Note that an adhesive member (glue, trimming, etc.) may be disposed deep in the acute recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute recess 10155 . In this case, even if the string Y8 that is attached to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheater is cut, the string is adhered to the adhesive member provided in the acute recess 10155, and the ball P9 is returned to the game area. Since the yarn Y8 is not ejected from the yarn Y8 and is maintained there, it is possible to hasten the discovery of fraudulent use of the yarn Y8.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) that has a weak launch strength and has not reached the playing area is discharged to the lower tray 50. A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the disc passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of a resin material so as to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. A tip member 2062a is formed and arranged close to the ball firing unit 112a, and a guide member formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 between which the ball can flow down. 2062b.

A foul ball passage 2062c that communicates with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner of the interior of the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 is formed downstream of the gap V11. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width that one ball can pass through, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above it.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is disposed in the above-described embodiment. formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper tray 17 via the upper tray passage portion 161 on the main body side. When the number of balls on the upper tray 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full-tank switch (not shown) protruding inside the ball flow path on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the balls. It is configured so that the ball payout from 133 is stopped.

That is, in this embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper tray 17. FIG. Therefore, when considering the above-described fraudulent act of sticking balls to both ends of the thread Y8 and passing one of the balls through the foul ball path 2062c to make the thread Y8 enter the game area along the foul ball path 2062c. In addition, the action of damaging the yarn Y8 by striking the yarn Y8 with the payout ball can be produced regardless of the state of the balls accumulated on the upper plate 17. - 特許庁This makes it easier to cut the yarn Y8 at an early stage.

189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of outer rail 2062. FIG. In FIG. 189, a spare of the return-ball prevention member 68 disposed above the foul-ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. In addition, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 with a long metal screw B11 in such a manner that the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollowed on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68. As shown in FIG. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed which protrudes from the rear side surface of the guide member 2062b toward the front side in a cylindrical shape and has an inner wall formed with a threaded groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side abuts against the front end of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2. A long screw B11 is inserted through a through-hole drilled as a mounting hole and a through-hole 2062b5 drilled in the blocking plate 2062b4 so as to align with the through-hole. By inserting, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The upper surface and the left surface of the closing plate 2062b4, which are the sides that contact the guide member 2062b, are formed so as to match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface with the same gradient as the increased gradient portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

The slope increasing portion 2062d is sloped downward toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface forming the outer frame of the play area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is below the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) forming the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, , about ⅓ of the diameter of the sphere) intersects the tip member 2062a.

With this configuration, when the ball is shot toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower tip of the gradient increasing portion 2062d collides with the ball. can be avoided. On the other hand, when the ball that did not reach the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so the ball moves left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through and returning to the ball shooting unit 112a side beyond the tip member 2062a.

A side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d can form a cut 2062b1 with a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and allowing the thread to enter (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment) between the closing plate 2062b4 and the closing plate 2062b4. It is recessed to the back side up to the position. The cut 2062b1 is formed at a point where the path of the ball hit into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is provided with a semicircular notch 2062b3 on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 to be screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the notch 2062b1 is formed. When the thread Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends thereof is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8 can rub against the long screw B11 in the event of a fraudulent act.

That is, due to the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged deep in the notch 2062b1 when subjected to a load that pulls both ends (see FIG. 190(a)). In this state, the thread Y8 is slid in the longitudinal direction, so that the thread Y8 is rubbed against the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be quickly cut.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged closer to the front than the position through which the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being arranged at a position (vertical lower part of the center of the ball) where the ball to be shot contacts the outer rail 2062, so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the ball to be shot. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Also, a person who commits cheating through the thread Y8, to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends, through the foul ball passage 2062c, will not be able to handle the end of the thread Y8 that protrudes toward the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). 182) is pulled forward to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the yarn Y8 to enter the cut 2062c compared to when the cut 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

A button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion projecting downward is disposed in a cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed under a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the button type switch SW11 will interfere with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and is arranged so as to be able to switch between ON and OFF when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes.

Figures 190(a) and 190(b) are partial front enlarged views of foul ball passage 2062c. FIG. 190(a) shows a state in which the weight portion 68a2 of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c by the weight of the weight portion 68a2. A state in which the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the opening/closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 190(a), the route of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is shown for reference, and the button type switch SW11 is shown to be ON, and FIG. 190(b) shows the button type switch. It is illustrated that SW11 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), the return-ball preventing member 68 only gives a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul-ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away under its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening/closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state shown in 190(a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190(a) is restored by the next timing when the ball is guided to the foul ball passage 2062c (0.6 seconds at the shortest). because it can

On the other hand, the ball-return preventing member 68 provides great resistance to an object that does not flow away like a ball, for example, an object that advances while filling the passage, such as an endoscope. This is a structure as an anti-fraud measure.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, reaches the inside of the game area, and attempts to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, Bending a nail (not shown) planted in the game board 13, grasping a ball and putting it into the winning slot, using the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning slot, and emitting a laser from the tip (e.g. cutting nails).

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of foul ball passageway 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 191, the outline of a device such as an endoscope that is illegally intruded is illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the present embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is displaced while advancing. Become. Here, when the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is displaced by the distal end portion of the endoscope) shifts to the state shown in FIG. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2 and maintains the weight portion 68a2 in a state of being pushed up. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to disengage the opening/closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is impossible to prevent fraud. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, an alarm may be sounded when the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined period of time. , fraud can be detected early.

Also, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button type switch SW11 is turned on immediately. (see FIG. 190(a)), the period during which the ball is not put out from the payout device 133 can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, the state in which the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 is stopped can be maintained.

It should be noted that the member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c need not be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in this embodiment, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side of the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, can be exchanged for As a result, compared to the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, it has the effect of being able to play a role in preventing fraudulent acts before replacement, and the trouble of forgetting and searching for a storage place can be saved. It is possible to achieve the effect of Further, it is not necessary to include the entire structure of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported by a fixed shaft (the support member 68b may not be provided).

Also, if the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and is replaced, whether or not the above-described fraudulent action prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of damage to the return ball prevention member 68. From the point of view of the person committing fraud, it is difficult to maintain a deterrent to fraudulent activity by not knowing whether or not the replacement has been made, and even if it has been replaced, the degree of damage cannot be known. can.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal motion device 800 rotates only at the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal motion device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even at the expanded position. configured in a manner. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end and a and a restricting portion 2888 projecting from the extended tip of the flange portion 2887 toward the rear side. The loose fitting device 2880 of this embodiment differs from the loose fitting device 880 of the eighth embodiment only in the rear cover 2886, and other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880. .

The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 . That is, the restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position where it can contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a single flange portion 2887 and a single restricting portion 2888 are arranged, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886 . Next, actions of the flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194. FIG.

193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal motion device 2800, and FIGS. 194(a) and 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. . 193 and 194 show an operation example of the petal operating device 2800 in chronological order. is illustrated.

194(a) and 194(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section. Also, in FIG. 193, the petal 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 is shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), a pair of threaded portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are provided with opposite threaded portions centered on the screw insertion portion 803H. It has a sloped surface 2803T that slopes away from 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is formed to be inclined by about 30° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The action of the restricting portion 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( Rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in a front view), restricting portion 2888 and front side portion 802b of petal 802 come into contact, and petal 802 receives a load from restricting portion 2888.

When the petals 802 are further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front) while the petals 802 are receiving the load from the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802 receive the load. To do so, change your posture.

At this time, the sliding member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the posture can be changed to an inclined posture with respect to the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides. Petals 802 undergo posture changes as much as possible.

As the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 change their postures in this manner, the load from the restricting portion 2888 is shed, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), only the narrow slide ribs 803a of the slide member 2820 are in contact with the slits 815 on both sides. can move smoothly in the longitudinal direction.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the sliding member 2820 contacts the slits 815 on both sides with the slide rib 803a against the outer inner wall, and with the inclined surface 2803T against the inner inner wall. (pressed), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance is remarkable. Since the inclined surfaces 2803T are in contact with the inner walls of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the short direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. .

Therefore, in the tilted posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 against the movement of the slits 814 and 815 in the longitudinal direction increases, so that the slide member 2820 reaches the ends of the slits 814 and 815. without waiting, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the slide member 2820 in the normal posture and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the inclined position).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193(b), the rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is started. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petals 802 move away from the restricting portion 2888, the load applied to the petals 802 from the restricting portion 2888 can be released.

195 is a front view of petal motion device 2800. FIG. Note that FIG. 195 shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193(b).

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal actuator 2800 can be rotated in the expanded position. At this time, the rear cover 2886 rotates in a direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) opposite to the rotating direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is greater than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so the position during expansion is maintained. In this state, the petals 802 can be rotated forward and backward.

196(a), 196(b) and 197 are front views of the petal motion device 2800. FIG. 196(a), 196(b), and 197 show how the petals 802 move from the expanded position to the collected position in time series.

In FIG. 196(a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. When the rotating plate 830 rotates further in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. returned.

Furthermore, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830. The rotational motion of 802 subsides and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petals 802 can be automatically rotated at the spreading position and then returned to the gathered position.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where it abuts against the restricting portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, ), contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided, so it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate it at the fully open position.

The restricting portion 2888 may be placed at a position where it does not come into contact with the petals 802 at the gathered position or at the fully opened position, or at a position where the petals 802 slightly change their posture even if they come into contact with the petals 802 rotating at the fully opened position. By locating the position where the restricting portion 2888 can be slipped through and the load can be received, the restricting portion 2888 can be prevented from hindering the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

Further, as shown in this embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it can be used as a mark as to whether it passes through a position near or far from the star-shaped pattern. Depending on the distance, the petal 802 can be expanded to the maximum and rotated, or can be expanded halfway and rotated.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win varies depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. It is possible to make the pattern of the mold function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation part 2888 can be used as part of the effect device.

Note that the restricting portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, there is no need to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 in terms of design, so the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 abutting against the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing its posture may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win). In this case, depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating, or are rotating while abutting the restricting portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture (flutteringly), it is possible to change the meaning and content conveyed to the player. .

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts against the restricting portion 2888 is the leading end position. The degree of spreading varies. Therefore, even with the configuration in which the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the rear cover 2886, it is possible to change the extent of expansion of the petals 802 when the attitude thereof changes.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. FIG. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates along with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanded position has been described. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be switchable between the case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently depending on the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 show, in chronological order, an operation example of the petal motion device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 198(a) when viewed from the front. 198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rails 832 of the rotating plate 830 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 rotate together, exceeding the resistance applied, the description is omitted here.

198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view, the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 , so that the slide member 2820 that receives the load from the guide rail 832 Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (see FIG. 198(b)). In this embodiment, additional concave portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815b are formed on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that displaces in this way.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that, of the walls extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814, the wall portion on the clockwise side in front view is recessed so as to widen the width of the central slit 814. Among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a provided and the both side slits 815 arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front, the two side slits 815 are formed in the wall portions on the clockwise side when viewed from the front. A clockwise side recessed portion 3815a that is recessed to increase the width in the lateral direction of the center slit 814, and a wall portion that extends along the radial direction of both side slits 815 that are arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. Among them, it mainly includes a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in the wall portion on the clockwise side in a front view so as to widen the width of the slits 815 on both sides in the lateral direction.

The clockwise recessed portion 3815a is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the central recessed portion 3814a extends continuously from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198(a)). formed in

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recess depth greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is positioned facing the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803 toward the rotation center of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198(a)). is continuously formed.

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and has a longer radial length than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The action when the rotating plate 830 of the petal motion device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described. First, when the rotating plate 830 starts to rotate clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(b)).

As a result, the contact between the counterclockwise side walls of the both-side slits 815 and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in front view, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move toward the contact portion between the clockwise concave portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member). 3810, the first contact portion) is used as a fulcrum to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 199(a) and 199(b)).

Note that the center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b are deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a. contact with the central recessed portion 3814a and contact between the screw-in portion 2803S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b.

Further, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are recessed to a depth that does not abut the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A turning side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 falls below the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together.

As shown in FIG. 199(b), the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of threaded portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are perpendicular to each other. When the radial center side slide rib 803a housed in the clockwise side slits 815 abuts against the walls of the both side slits 815, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move around the contact portion as a fulcrum when viewed from the front. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a moves counterclockwise in a front view from the base end of the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move radially (see FIG. 194(a)). The flat plate member 2803 can be moved radially toward the center.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. , the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the attitude of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) can be made to perform movements that could not be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 194(b) )), until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) rotate (rotate together with the slit member 3810). rotational movement) intervenes (see Figures 195, 196(a) and 196(b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (Fig. 198 ( a)), and by rotating the rotary plate 830 clockwise in front view, the attitudes of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be restored (see FIG. 199(b)). That is, until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) are rotated (rotated along with the slit member 3810). can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (Fig. 198(a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise from an arbitrary state (phase or orientation) in front view, the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or orientation) are rotated. From the position of the clamped petals 802, the slide member 2820 and plate member 2803 can begin to move toward the gathered position. As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) rotate (see FIG. 195) in the middle of expanding (see FIG. 198(a)), and then reach the collected position. (See FIG. 197), the arrangement of the petals 802 can be diversified when the petals 802 gather and the movement of the petal movement device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed of a plate with no opening has been described. A plurality of through holes 8326 a to 8326 c are formed through the wall portion 8326 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 200, 201, 202(a) and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202(a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202(b) illustrates the tilting device 310 in the first state. A state in the middle of changing from state 1 to state 2 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, in the operation device 8300 of this embodiment, the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is not explained in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 of the above-described embodiments. There is, and the rest of the configuration is almost already explained in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described below, and other configurations will be limited to a few supplementary descriptions.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is bored in a substantially oval shape at the left-right central position. and the first through hole 8326a formed on the right and left sides of the vibrating device 5400. When viewed in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, the cross-sectional shape of the bottom plate portion 321 has a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape. A pair of second through holes 8326b drilled along the bottom plate portion 321 and connecting the upper surface and the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at surface positions, and a pair of third through holes 8326b drilled at the left and right corners to have a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a through hole 8326c.

Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c has the purpose of facilitating the downward passage of liquid such as drinking water, and the purpose of facilitating removal of coin-shaped foreign objects inserted into gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. and a through hole. For example, a coin-shaped foreign object may cause the tilting device 310 and the upper frame to cause the tilting device 310 and the upper frame to cause a player to stop the tilting device 300 forcibly, or a curious player to cause the tilting device 310 and the upper frame to become meaningless. It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330 and the member 330 .

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310 . By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but on the other hand, the possibility of foreign objects being inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 increases.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around a ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) arranged at the end on the back side, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the tilting position is closer to the rear end, the longer the tilting device 310 is in the front-rear direction, the more likely it is to be misaligned (deformed) to the left or right near the end on the front side. Note that this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (deformation) is included.

Therefore, in normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both left and right sides is designed so as not to be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a one-yen coin). Also, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the left and right sides (for example, to the left), the gap V13 created on the other side (for example, to the right) is formed between the upper frame member 330 and the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. The gap V13 has a size obtained by summing the gaps V13 formed between and, and can be a size that allows a coin-shaped foreign object to be inserted.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is misaligned to the left or right, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted.

Also, the gap V14 between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction is also formed by the tilting device 310 using the backlash near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14(b)) of the tilting device 310. Since the gap V14 can be easily enlarged by applying a load toward the rear side to shift (deform) the gap V14, a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 tilts with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in either the left or right gap V13 or the front-rear direction gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, the coin There is a possibility that a foreign object with a shape may enter the lower frame member 8320 .

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b), when the left and right walls of the tilting device 310 are formed in a shape that narrows left and right inward toward the center of the vertical direction, it is easy to fit the fingers of the player. On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 202(a)), the coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V13 protrudes outward from the constriction of the case main body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, making it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. FIG. In addition, rubbing between the coin-shaped foreign matter and the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate the translucency of the protective lens member 311i, which may interfere with the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, the operation device 8300 cannot perform the intended effect, so the coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. It is desirable to remove it as soon as possible when it is discovered, but if the lower frame member 320 is not formed with a through hole, it is necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, so that coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described below.

203(a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203(b) is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. FIG. 203(d) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 along line CCIIId-CCIIId of FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 8300 along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe; FIG.

The first through-hole 8326a has the same center in the horizontal direction as the center in the horizontal direction of the vibrating device 5400, and is drilled with a lateral width larger than the lateral width of the vibrating device 5400 (the first accommodating portion 5431 of the vibrating device 5400, see FIG. 58). be. Therefore, even if liquid such as drinking water is poured into the vicinity of the left-right central position of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. Liquids can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400 .

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h, the upper surface of the extension portion 311h is inclined (horizontally when viewed vertically in the second state). an inclination D81 downwardly inclined toward the center of the left and right in the first state of the tilting device 310 due to being curved toward the tilting device 310; 201), coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while the coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed, so that the lower frame member 8320 can be designed freely. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily ensured compared to the case where the first through-hole 8326a needs to be widened to the left and right.

In this embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is such that the portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object. It is assumed that the size is equal to or larger than the size of the target object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a horizontal width and a vertical width of approximately 30 [mm].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens member 313, which are continuously arranged on the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313, are mirror-finished in the present embodiment (mirror-finished member is fixed), the light passing through the spherical shell portion 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first through hole 8326a is used to make a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When a coin-shaped foreign object is placed at a position that partially closes the first through hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player is It is weaker than when there is no foreign matter (a coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, since it is possible to make it easy to notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame can be easily detected. The possibility of remaining on the member 8320 can be reduced. This effect is obtained not only when viewed through the first through hole 8326a, but also when viewed through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

The second through-hole 8326b is configured as a through-hole that can discharge a coin-shaped foreign object fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lateral width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is formed with a width of about 2 [mm] in the normal direction.

Since the second through-hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the bottom plate portion 321 in the left-right direction, even after a coin-shaped foreign object slides down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321, it can be easily removed. Coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed immediately.

Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, the liquid such as drinking water that flows along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be utilized for forward outward discharge.

The third through hole 8326c has a central axis along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203(a)), and removes coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310. It is formed as a through-hole that can be removed in its upright state (posture).

That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be set to a size that allows coin-shaped foreign matter to be discharged when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. , the third through-hole 8326c has a length of about 30 mm and a width of about 2 mm when viewed along the surface of the bottom plate 321 .

When removing the coin-shaped foreign matter, the worker can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the covering cover 370 to expose the operation device 8300 in a front view (see FIG. 92). The covering cover 370 has a fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body curved portion 371 fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by a screw inserted in the front-rear direction, and a drooping portion 372 recessed by a screw inserted in the vertical direction. Since it is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the installation portion 15a is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws while the front frame 14 is open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be shortened.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to easily remove coin-shaped foreign objects that have entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 without disassembling the operation device 8300 .

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that opens outward to the right at the lower right corner of the body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)). Including each embodiment described above, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, the operation can be easily performed by removing the screw that fastens the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14 . Therefore, if a replacement for a normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be quickly replaced with a normal operation device 8300 .

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to malfunction, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly restarted.

Next, referring to FIG. 204, a fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the board support device 600 does not receive the load from the front frame 14 when it is in the fixed state has been described. The load from the front frame 14 is received via the front-rear displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be able to abut on the front frame 14 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

204(a) and 204(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 204(a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and in FIG. 204(b), the front frame 14 is shown closed with respect to the Also, in FIG. 204(a), the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified, and in FIG. 204(b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are respectively illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (the plate portion arranged on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 can be vertically displaced; A longitudinally displacing member 2652 arranged to be able to abut on the lower end of the vertically displacing member 2651 and supported so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction; A support portion 2654 fixed to the plate portion 611a, which is a portion that sandwiches the member 2652 from above and below so as to be displaceable at two front and rear portions, and a front side of the front-rear displacement member 2652 that abuts on the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653. and a biasing member 2655, such as a coil spring, that applies a biasing force toward.

The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in which it abuts against the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board support device 600 and a state in which it separates. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204(a), it retreats from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. Deform the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204(a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at a position with a slight gap from the torsion spring NBb at the lower position. is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is placed at a front position (see FIG. 204(a)) where it is pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655, and at a position where it is pushed backward by the front frame 14. 204(b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a is formed at the rear end portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652, the inclined surface 2652a being inclined downward toward the end side. The inclined surface 2652a extends from a vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is arranged at the front position to a vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 with the longitudinal displacement member 2652 arranged at the rear position. , is a continuous inclined plane.

The inclined surface 2652a has an inclination angle and a forming range such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned downward at the front position of the front/rear displacement member 2652, and the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at the upper position at the rear position of the front/rear displacement member 2652. set.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is increased by the thickness in the front-rear direction. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load that the post-rotation pawl member 640 applies to the game board 13 from the back side, and to facilitate maintaining the state in which the game board 13 abuts the hanging back plate portion 621d of the pre-rotation pawl member 620. The distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the rear surface of the front frame 14 (the rear surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore, it is possible to easily define the thickness of the game area, and to stabilize the flow of the ball.

Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, namely that the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, so a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring used in the eighth embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, when the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb can be reduced. Since it is possible to reduce the force that causes this, it is possible to improve the operator's degree of freedom in selection and workability.

Next, referring to FIG. 205, a fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid above the reverse cup portion 178 to prevent the intrusion into the inside of the reverse cup portion 178 by melting the reverse cup portion 178 with a heated piano wire. A case has been described in which burning due to a heated piano wire is detected to detect fraud at an early stage. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205(b) and 205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. FIG. In addition, FIG. 205(b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a contracted shape, and FIG. be done. 205(b) and 205(c), the fraud detection device 2280 is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position in the front and rear of the main body box portion 2281. As shown in FIG.

The fraud detection device 2280 includes a main body box portion 2281 which is configured in a box-like shape with openings on the back side and the bottom side and is superimposed on the reverse cup portion 2178, and a back side so as to cover the back side opening of the main body box portion 2281. and a rear lid member 2282 attached from the main body box portion 2281 and the rear lid member 2282 .

The body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, and includes an extension portion 2283 that extends from the lower right corner and contacts the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of the reverse cup portion 2178, and an opening that narrows upward from the lower corner. A constricted portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, a projecting portion 2285 protruding upward from near the edge of the upper end opening of the constricted portion 2284, and a recessed portion 2285 recessed from the back side of the left side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. A first conductive portion 2286 that is housed in a concave portion of the body box portion 2281, one end of which protrudes outside the body box portion 2281, and the other end of which extends in the left-right direction inside the body box portion 2281, and the right wall portion of the body box portion 2281. It is housed in a recess recessed from the back side, one end protrudes outside the main body box part 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box part 2281 and contacts the upper surface of the first conducting part 2286. A second conduction part 2287 formed with a length that allows contact, a torsion spring SP15 that generates a biasing force that presses the second conduction part 2287 against the first conduction part 2286, and a shape memory spring 2288 supported by the portion 2285 and arranged below the second conducting portion 2287 .

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. The first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are each connected at one end of separate wiring to the portion protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is connected to the main control device. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205 ( c)), the conduction is cut off, and the interruption of the conduction is used as an input and controlled to output an error signal.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the ball dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) stops the dispensing of balls, etc., and continues. It is controlled so that it is impossible to play a game by

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205( a ) to 205 ( c ), the body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178 . Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in this embodiment, the formation location of the wall portion 2178a is displaced to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extended portion 2283 is provided between the long cover member 173 and the elongated cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire still covers the long cover member 173. can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and advances further is guided by the constricted portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 that is arranged in the upper opening of the constricted portion 2284. be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is made of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining its deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to its pre-memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to about the melting point of the reverse cup portion 2178 (approximately 80°), and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205(c)) is stored in advance. .

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is disconnected and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of fraud can be achieved.

An extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a that is vertically elongated and is drilled in the front and back direction in the back cover member 2282, and extends to the front side. overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the low temperature state after being in the tension state, the operator pushes down the extension part 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and contract the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205(b)). ) can be changed back again. That is, even after the fraudulent act is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, referring to FIG. 206, a sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved so that the traveling directions of the light emitted from both sides are different. , the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment has recesses with different shapes for each region. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) is an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206(c) schematically shows the downward recessed portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of a light guide member 2540 schematically shown in FIG. 206(a), and FIG. 206(e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206(e) schematically shows an upward concave portion 2543e provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVIe of FIG. 206(a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. Note that the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically in a straight line according to the shape of the light guide member 2540. FIG.

On both sides of the light guide member 2540, concave portions are formed in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment. can be changed.

That is, with the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, an area CCVIb arranged above and on the side of the inner lens member 530, an area CCVIc arranged above and on the side of the outer lens member 550, and an area CCVIc arranged below and on the side of the inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between the region CCVId arranged on the side and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206(b), in the area CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the upper side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction at the position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543b refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(c), in the area CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is heat-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface is arranged on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. , it is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(d), in the region CCVId, a downward concave portion 2543d is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has flat surfaces on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. , it is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543d refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(e), in the region CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. , it is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543e refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as in the eighth embodiment (an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of approximately 1 mm cone). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is slightly refracted vertically and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, with the configuration described above, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the light is allowed to travel toward the inner lens member 530 in the direction in which the light is collected, and toward the outer lens member 550 in the direction in which the light spreads. can be made That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is possible to give a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides thereof, so that the left-right width of the right panel unit 2500 can be suppressed and the lighting performance can be achieved. You can improve the effect.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed downward has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, so the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the end of the push has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for effects (for example, a "button that cannot be pushed" effect can be performed. can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 has moved to the end of the operation (the end of the extension operation), the voice coil motor 352 cannot move because of the dimensional relationship that causes a slight gap between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320 . and the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact sound due to collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 operates. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is protruding in advance, and it is possible to make the player aware that it is in the state of "a button that cannot be pushed" only when the tilting device 310 is pushed. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are fixed relative to each other has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. As shown in FIG. In this case, for example, it is possible to change the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first projecting portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other. It is possible to change the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises immediately after changing the posture of the rotating claw member 347 . Therefore, it is possible to form more operation states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

In addition, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be sequentially switched) by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the drive motor 342 and perform a complex operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched to a raised position.

In the third embodiment, the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operation speed and the direction of the operation of the tilting device 310. However, this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that drives the weight member 5412 to rotate may be controlled by the operating speed and the operating direction of the tilting device 310 . For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the end of pushing (during the downward movement), the drive motor 5411 is fixed so that the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is positioned above the rotation axis, and the tilting device 310 pushes. The rotation operation of the driving motor 5411 may be started immediately before starting to move upward after reaching the terminal end. In this case, the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced while the tilting device 310 is repeatedly pushed, and the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be increased when the tilting device 310 starts to move upward. .

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the holding member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside thereof. When the housing member 5430 is fixed to the tilting device 310, for example, the projecting leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321, and when the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the pushing end, the projecting leg By setting the portion 5424 to be pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 can be changed, and whether or not the weight member 5412 can contact the housing member 5430 can be switched. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated. By increasing the amount of deformation of the weight member 5412, a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts against the housing member 5430 can be formed. That is, the player can feel the vibration not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the push end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, the third symbol display device 81 displays "Press the button." A great chance.", it is possible to provide an effect for the player to specify how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in the specified way of pressing is set as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to operate and to prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

As for the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in a manner in which they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the slow pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 by force.

In the above-described fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the player can feel the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the housing member 5430 in a state in which the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, the weight member can 5412 may be formed in such a manner as to be arranged so as to be unable to abut on housing member 5430 . In this case, while the tilting device 310 is not operated, the vibration can be transmitted to the player to make the effect lively, while the vibration is stopped when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, which is a method that is difficult for the surroundings to notice. Therefore, it is possible to produce a premium feeling that only the player who is playing the machine can perceive the change in the production mode, excluding the surrounding players. can.

As a variation of the effect, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the accommodation member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot contact each other, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodation member 5430 continue. It is desirable to have both the case where the weight member 5412 can contact with the weight member 5412 , and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412 . For example, two different cases can occur due to the difference in the direction of rotation of the weight member 5412 .

In the above-described fifth embodiment, the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other to generate a frictional force. do not have. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is formed partially protrudes in a direction approaching the disk cam 5344, and is configured to abut when the disk cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed. can be In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a moving part, a greater frictional force is ensured between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 than when the disc cam 5344 and the operable releasing member 346 are in contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut against the front frame 14, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to contact the front frame 14 . For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600, the case in which the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side. It may be configured to be arranged below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear-side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom, the game board 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable to form a path that is long in the front-rear direction directly behind the ball guide opening 53, because the ball can be ejected smoothly. Further, by making the path curved back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, thereby preventing interference between the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145. can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 is concave has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be convex. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Moreover, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straightly extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a vertically curved path, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 contacts the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection wire 453 can be clamped between the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the clamping resistance causes the speaker connection wire 453 to be pulled out of the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, even if a load of 100 psi is applied, it is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from coming off the speaker 451 .

Further, the auxiliary projection 481Ha abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H in the thickness direction within the range of the projection length corresponding to the recess depth of the wiring passage recess 464. In the range of length, a step may be formed in the middle such that the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H are separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the range where the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H form a double wall is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex speaker in which the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chambers, and the intermediate body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by extending the width of the intermediate main body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to the same extent as that of the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal side main body portion 461T, the proximal side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal side main body portion 461T can be A large speaker room may be configured with

Also, although the base end side main body portion 461B has a larger volume than the distal end side main body portion 461T, the size relationship may be reversed, and the capacities may be the same. The placement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be the center in the left and right direction, or a position between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e forming the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions extend in the left-right direction (the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T). The connecting direction, the direction intersecting with the opening direction of the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491) has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portion 467d and rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the horizontal direction. In this case, the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent like a maze. It is possible to suppress cheating by making it difficult to cheat by intruding the tip into the game area and prolonging the time required for the cheating. Here, the suppression of fraudulent activity includes suppression of fraudulent activity itself, suppression of gaining fraudulent profit from fraudulent activity (successful fraudulent activity), and the like.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotating plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked, the loose fitting device 880 rotates not only during the rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 but also during the spreading operation and the gathering operation. can be made As a result, the petals 802 can be slid in the radial direction and the decorative member 884 can be rotated at the same time, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotary plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract as the rotating plate 830 rotates, or may rotate on an axis different from the rotation axis of the rotating plate 830 .

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting a driving force through the slide plate 930 that slides according to the operation of the drive arm member 910, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal motion device 800 and the tip of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 is operated based on the displacement of the petal motion device 800. can be In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the above eighth embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the case where the operation portion back surface member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening/closing regulation portion 159 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface supporting device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to contact each other in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing regulation part 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board surface support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game As the right side of the board 13 tilts toward the front side, the portion of the game board 13 facing the operation section back member 155 is also displaced toward the front side, causing the operation section back member 155 and the game board 13 to interfere with each other. be able to. This prevents the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12 .

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 Whether or not 600 is in a fixed state is determined by the relationship between the operation part back member 155 arranged opposite to the board surface support device 600 on the lower side and the game board 13, and the board surface arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 is determined. When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the closing of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 can be restricted. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 may be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600 . In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 made of synthetic resin can be less likely to be damaged by colliding with the board support device 600 made of metal. can be used for a long time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the above eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 from which the light irradiated to the end face of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86 . In this case, for example, the state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and the case in which the other surface is arranged on the front side can be switched (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate about an axis, it is possible to switch the mode of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 . In addition, by switching the mode of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 and the correspondence with the moving accessory projecting inside the center frame 86, it is possible to diversify the effects.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is placed in a state where one surface is arranged on the front side and the other surface is arranged on the front side. Consider switching between the case of being arranged on the front side and the case of being arranged on the front side. When the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged opposite to the portion corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the portion near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member When the surface on the side of 560 faces the side of the moving object, the moving objects arranged opposite to each other over a wide area of the opening 565 (in a wide range compared to the opening 524 at the top) emit light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, it is possible to switch the light emitting position of the moving accessory.

In this case, for example, by moving the moving accessory in time with the timing of the change in the light-emitting portion, it is possible to improve the presentation effect. For example, at the timing when the surface on the side of the inner cover member 520 faces the moving accessory, the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 is reduced and changed so as to fit in the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524, while the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 faces the moving accessory. At the timing of turning the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) in the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to change the position to emit light in accordance with the action of the moving accessory by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a that controls light emission.

In addition, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (brightness increases, the amount of light increases, and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side becomes clear). Diffused (lower brightness, lower light intensity, faint emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting target (liquid crystal or moving accessory).

Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed so that the front side end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving object or the liquid crystal). , the front side end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to the posture that is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), so that beam-like (narrow) light is emitted to the moving object and the liquid crystal. While irradiating, light can be emitted over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or liquid crystal. As a result, it is possible to light up a wide range of positions away from the moving role and the liquid crystal while only the details of the moving role and the liquid crystal are illuminated.

In the ninth and tenth embodiments described above, the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 cut the thread Y8, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken portion is so fragile that it falls, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position through which the broken portion falls. Also good. In this case, due to the detection of the sheet metal member by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the launch of the ball is forcibly stopped. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss suffered by the gaming machine hall) obtained by a person who commits fraudulent acts.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve frictional force may be added. For example, the frictional force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or by arranging a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810). The movement resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810 .

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can be inserted into the walls of the both side slits 815 arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T. may be formed. In this case, it is possible to improve the motion resistance by inserting the inclined surface 2803T into the recessed portion.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, by changing the shape of the recessed portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the direction in which light travels can be changed to the direction in which the light is collected or the direction in which the light is spread. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is inclined upward in all of the areas CCVIb to CCVIe. Towards, the light can be made easier to travel. As a result, the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, downward concave portions 2543c are formed in the regions CCVIc and CCVIe, which are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530, and upward concave portions 2543b are formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId, which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. may be formed. In this case, the light that travels in the opposite direction to the player playing pachinko 8010, and the light that is emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined upward. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of the person walking on the floor, the light that travels toward the player side and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is in a downwardly inclined direction. Therefore, for example, it is possible to illuminate the ball stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the players playing the game while improving the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010 .

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Points where the player pushes in the direction from the back to the front>
In an operation device having operation means that a player pushes in, the operation device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position in which the operation means protrudes from the first state with respect to the player. and a biasing means for biasing the operating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the pressing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the depth side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is directed to the side.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the performance is performed in a manner that heightens the player's expectation of a big win at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , it was necessary to design the operating means with high strength. In this case, there is a problem that the operation means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operation means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that a straightforward up and down linear motion is performed. By causing the slippage between the player's hand and the operating means, the momentum of pushing can be released.

In addition, considering the game posture of the player, when pushing the operation means around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force in the front direction, so the force applied to the operation means by the player should be naturally weakened. can be done.

In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is rotatable about an axial rod arranged on the far side for the player, tilts up and down about the axial rod, and has the operation means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized by comprising a tilting means, wherein the tilting means is arranged so that the operating means faces the opposite direction of the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured in a manner to rotate, and in the second state, the operation means is arranged in the direction opposite to the player, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from performing an operation of hitting the operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft and tilting the hand around that position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be easily pushed in, so that a new pushing operation method with less acceleration can be provided. , it is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

The new push operation method is, for example, placing the outer side of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft, placing the hand near the operation means with the palm up and down, and then turning the thumb side toward the operation means. A method in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft and the palm is placed facing the operation means, and then a method in which the palm is dropped toward the operation means is exemplified. be done.

A gaming machine A3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is vertical.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operation means in the first state is the vertical direction. It is possible to prevent breakage due to the pushing operation in the state.

In the game machine A3, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can be automatically operated, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force for the automatic operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it acts in the direction of one side and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is directed in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the player. can be prevented from working. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operation.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pushed, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled in the opposite direction by the player when the button is retracted and receiving a high load.

In the game machine A4, a maintenance state that maintains the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and the maintenance means is operated by the driving means. a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, wherein the rotating means is capable of phase change between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while the maintaining means is maintained; In the first phase and the second phase, when the maintenance state is canceled, the range in which the operation means can move is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation A gaming machine A5 configured to be capable of canceling the maintaining state.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintaining means is kept in the maintained state, and in the phase after the change, the movement to release the maintained state is rotated. The movement width of the operation device can be changed by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the biasing means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating means. , a game machine A6 configured such that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so the mode of movement is limited to one way. Since it is possible to add a moving mode of moving following the maintaining means to the operating means, it is possible to increase the types of moving modes of the operating means. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device can be improved.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, light emitting means disposed inside the operation device and emitting light toward the player is provided, and the second state is more favorable than the first state. However, from a player's point of view, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is more illuminated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view than the first state. Since the irradiation range of the emitted light is expanded and the area of the operation means is reduced, the player can be made to pay attention to the light and the performance effect can be improved, and at the same time, it is difficult to press the operation means unless aiming. By adopting this mode, it is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operation means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means is changed by moving the operation means toward and away from the display means. Characterized game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, the operation means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operation means moves toward and away from the display means to emit light from the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from reflecting on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<The point of making the repulsive force at normal times small while making it possible to respond to repeated hits>
A first state and a second state in which the movable range of operation to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state in the operation device having the operation means that allows the player to perform the operation to the terminal position. and includes first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state in accordance with the player's operation.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the force for returning the operation means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the automatic operation of the operation means is performed by the drive motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and if the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to repeat the operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the biasing force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. By pushing back the operation means with the two drive means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with repeated hitting determination means for determining whether or not a repeated hitting operation is being performed based on a sensor detection value of the stroke operation means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is operated based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, whether or not to drive the second drive means is determined based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means, so the player does not perform repeated hitting operations (for example, single pressing operation, long pressing, and so on). It is possible to prevent the second driving means from operating even when the player is performing an operation, etc., and the player feels the load of pushing back the hand.

In the gaming machine B2, terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position shifted by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. position difference detection means for detecting; and movement direction determination means for determining the direction of movement of the operation means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal end detection means and the detection value of the position difference detection means; a game machine B3 characterized in that the second drive means is driven when the direction of movement determined by is the direction from the end of the push-in to return to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction of returning from the end of the push to the first state, that is, when the player's hand moves away from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second driving device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, and placing a heavy load on the player's hand.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, the second drive means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate the driving force for moving the operating means.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means includes a drive motor for rotating an eccentric weight and elastically supports the drive motor on the support frame. a supporting means, wherein the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state toward the position of the second state increases as the operating means approaches the terminal position. The game machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame in a state in which the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, thereby generating a driving force.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is unnecessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame based on the arrangement of the operation means at the end position. A game machine B6 characterized by.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame. By doing so, the drive motor can be moved away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in the direction away from the support frame (the direction toward the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and vibration effect device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operation means, the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, measuring means for measuring the speed of the operation means from the detection interval of the detection sensors, and the measurement means threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold; The driving force generated by the repulsion means increases when the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the player's light operation is emphasized, the operation resistance will be low, and there is a risk that the operation means will be damaged by the player's operation. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility of damage to the operating means can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases, and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for weak players. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the threshold determination means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold, and if it is equal to or higher than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, it is possible to improve operability and prevent destruction by the repulsion means.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and when the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and driving the voice coil motor in advance before the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operation means is arranged at a position capable of coming into contact with the voice coil motor. Game machine C2 to play.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means can be arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before moving, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the operation means is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor. While suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, the degree of braking the operation means can be gradually improved, and the sense of discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operation means by means of spring elasticity. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by means of spring elasticity. can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the value measured by the threshold value determining means when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value to the case where the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a movable area of an end portion of said repulsion means opposite to a side contacting said operation means is narrowed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means, which is the end opposite to the side that contacts the operation means, is narrowed, thereby making it possible to operate the operation means. A higher velocity can increase the elastic force generated by the repulsive means.

<Damage of the driving means is prevented by interrupting the transmission of the driving force with the clutch>
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, a releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the releasing means releasing the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means through the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the operation means is automatically operated for the effect, if the operation means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the canceling means cancels the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means while the operation means is automatically operating, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the game machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and during driving in the first direction, The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the game machine is being driven in the second direction.

Here, when whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depends on the direction of operation of the driving means, the operating means is operated by the player when the driving means is driven in the direction of operation in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be canceled. Then, there is a possibility that a large load is generated on the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom of performance is reduced when the operating means is operated to effect performance.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the unlocking direction or in the unlocking direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward. Toggles whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, two modes of button operation can be created (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the driving force must be interrupted in both cases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both driving directions regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of action in the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

It should be noted that, as a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch is moved in a direction intersecting with the operating direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes biasing means for biasing the driving means and the transmission means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the release means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmission means. and engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force when they are engaged with each other. A game machine D3, characterized in that the game machine D3 has a shape that tapers away from the contact surface and is inclined with respect to the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the release means applies the driving force in the engaged state on the contact surfaces of the pressing means. On the other hand, since both surfaces facing the direction of movement of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are tapered away from the abutment surfaces, the engagement between the engaging teeth causes the transmission means to move from the driving means. It is possible to separate them, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, a biasing force is constantly applied by the biasing means between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means is separated from the driving means, the biasing force acts in the direction of movement of the driving means via the engagement teeth. load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is cancelled.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means increases, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically reinstated, rather than completely de-resistance away. As a result, when the player releases the button, the button can be started to operate within a short period of time.

That is, when the button is driven "as an effect", if the player is holding the button, one phase of the button operation will pass. In addition, if the player releases the hand in the middle of the game, if the player moves from the end of the first phase, the period during which the button is stopped becomes long, and the feeling that "the player starts to move because the load on the player has been released" is reduced. escape.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operation means can be started within a short period of time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling that the player starts to move because the load on the player is relieved.

A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the engaging surfaces of the transmitting means and the releasing means are formed in a saw-tooth shape that engage with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage. That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means move toward and away from each other, the transmission means and the release means collide with each other at this plane, and the release means is disengaged. It is possible to suppress the movement along the direction of approaching and separating from the means to be stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate early.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs between when the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction and when the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by:

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission can be canceled without being limited to any one operation mode. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is the following for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means when there is a difference between whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D6 is similar in that the operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operation direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the drive means is the same. Since the action after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by combining the difference in the operating mode of the operating means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the degree of expectation for a big win, the player is instructed to operate the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operating mode of the operating means changes. can be supervised.

In addition, since the difference in operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the degree of expectation for the big win without watching the operation of the operation means. can be done. However, the drive means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the direction of action cannot be recognized from the vibration sound. can be made to watch over the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the protrusion of the cam based on the rotation of the cam>
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; biasing means for biasing the operating means in a direction from the first position to the second position; and operating means for moving from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means. terminating means for variably forming the movement terminating end of the first means, wherein the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means; 1 means includes releasing load means for applying a load to the first means for releasing the engagement with the operating means, and releasing the engagement by the releasing load means and terminating the movement of the operating means in the terminating means. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a cam-operated and movable operating means is fixed at a first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, whereby the urging force of the urging means expands and operates. , There is a game machine that can change the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation by the termination means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation of the operation means is changed according to the phase of the cam when the fixation is released, the phase of the cam when the fixation is released varies in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation are driven by separate driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the game machine E1, the releasing load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means by the terminal means and the driving means for moving the release load means can be used together, so the number of driving means can be reduced.

A game machine E2 characterized in that, in the game machine E1, the change in the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the position of the release load means can be changed based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detecting means such as position sensors for detecting the state of the load release means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method for switching the state of the load release means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the load release means is composed of a projection that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotational cycle of the cam and the projection, or , a method of desynchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection in other phases.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load applied from the first means, and the operation of the release load means causes the release load means and the transmission means to operate. A game machine E3 characterized in that it is possible to switch whether or not to operate synchronously with.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not to operate synchronously with the transmission means, the synchronous state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotating shaft of the first rotating member, and the release load means includes a rotating second rotating member. A gaming machine E4 comprising members, wherein the rotation periods of the first rotating member and the second rotating member are different.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single drive means, but the rotation cycles are different, so that the second rotating means can be operated at a predetermined speed. A plurality of phases of the first rotary member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of end positions when the operating means is held at the first position and then released and moved toward the second position. , can expand the range of production. For example, an effect of gradually moving the end position away from the first position or an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device has a first position for the operation means and a second position reached by the operation means when the player performs an operation from the first position. A game machine comprising vibrating means having a vibrating portion configured to be movable between and vibrating; and receiving means arranged to be able to contact with the vibrating portion, wherein the operating means is arranged at the first position Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut against the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operating means that can be operated by the player and vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, regardless of whether the operation means is operated or not, when the vibration means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operation means or the frame of the game machine. Alternatively, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the game machine, in the case of performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. . Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the operation means. mode), there is a problem that the vibration may not start in time before releasing the hand, and the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion contacts the receiving means is determined depending on whether the operating means is placed at the first position or is placed at the second position by being operated by the player. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operating means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pressing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand regardless of the mode of operation by the player. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the game machine F1, the vibration means is arranged to protrude in the occupation area occupied when the operation means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operation means moves to the second position. The game machine F2 changes to the abutting state by moving the vibrating means out of the occupied area.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operation means, thereby changing from the separated state to the contact state. The strength of contact between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed, and the strength of transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the player's operation strength can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibrating means without any particular change in the driving mode.

A game machine F3 characterized in that, in the game machines F1 or F2, the vibration means is supported by the receiving means via support means having spring elasticity.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, it is possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means, prevent transmission of vibration, and suppress displacement occurring in the vibrating means during vibration.

A game machine F4 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, in the contact state, the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the extension and contraction of the supporting means can give momentum when the vibrating part moves in the direction of approaching the receiving means.

The game machine F5 in the game machine F3, wherein the support means has a deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means that is lower than a deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means. .

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the direction in which the support means deforms can be finely set when the operation means is operated and interferes with the support means due to the difference in deformation resistance of the support means. can.

Thus, even if the amount of movement of the operating means is slightly different, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. .

As a method for differentiating the deformation resistance, in the case where the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending rubber legs along the movement direction of the operating means, or a method in which the support means surrounds the vibrating means. A method of manufacturing a rubber member by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance for each direction when it is composed of a rubber member; , and a coil spring that biases the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means.

A game machine F6 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, the portion with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operation means, but the vibration is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is separate from the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, thereby suppressing a state in which a load is applied to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, among the frame parts of the game machine, the part near the upper tray to which the game balls are supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc. Examples include a portion that may be touched by hands, a housing portion that partially encloses the operation means, and the like.

<One-touch attachment between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured such that the operation means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means is operated by a player. and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, wherein the transmission means comprises a deformation portion that elastically deforms due to an overload. Gaming machine G1 to play.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means. There is a game machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the player holds and fixes the operation means, if the drive means generates a driving force for driving the operation means, the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operation means and the transmission means There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the motor and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformable portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the drive means and the transmission means It is possible to relax the load applied to the connection part with.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deforming portion constitutes a connection portion of the cam member with the rotating shaft, and the elasticity of the deforming portion causes the cam member to move toward the rotating shaft. A game machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of is generated.

According to the game machine G2, the deforming part has a role of a part responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means and a role of a part generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the transmission member by sharing the functions. For example, separate securing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member has a projecting portion projecting parallel to the rotation shaft, the projecting portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion causes the cam member to On the other hand, a gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the projecting portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to construct the cam member and the projecting portion as one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotating shaft tilts with respect to the cam member. Compared to the case where the cam member is slid relative to the cam member, the cam member can be easily constructed from a single member, and the members can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the elastic deformation resistance of the deforming portion is greater than that of the rotating shaft in comparison with the first rotating direction in which the cam member is rotated about a straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the projecting portion. A gaming machine characterized in that deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which rotation is performed around a straight line perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the projecting portion and the extending direction of the rotation shaft. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformation portion different for each direction, the state after the deformation portion is elastically deformed when viewed from the rotation axis direction is more Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the projecting tip of the projecting portion can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the projecting portion of the cam member can be displaced along the direction in which the projecting portion is to move, so that the elastic deformation of the deformation portion relieves the load generated between the projecting portion and the operating means. can do.

The game machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, wherein the deformation portion elastically deforms to change the posture of the cam member, The game machine G5 is characterized in that the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformable portion elastically deforms, thereby changing the attitude of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member are brought into contact with each other. contact, the movement resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the gaming machine G6 comprises detection means for detecting that at least part of the cam member is tilted with respect to an axis.

Here, in a situation where an overload is applied to the operating device and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not, for example, the displacement expected by driving the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of a deviation from , it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period of time before the occurrence of the overload is detected. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting displacement deviation becomes smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the structure of the detection means and the higher the cost. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of an overload at a low cost and at an early stage.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time when the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member, without the need to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the driving means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent balls with threads. Game machine H>
In a game machine provided with a foul ball passage through which foul balls flowing back toward a launching device, among game balls shot into a game area, can pass, the foul ball passage permits passage of the falling game balls. The game machine H1 is characterized by comprising a one-way obstruction means for obstructing the movement of objects flowing backward.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, where a thread cutting blade is arranged inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper tray to the launcher, and the game ball with the thread connected is driven into the game area. There is a game machine with a function to prevent (cut the thread) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024179). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth when the ball is shot, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. It may be returned to the player side as a foul ball. For this reason, for example, a cheating tool is prepared in which game balls are connected to both ends of a string, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the string is shot with a weak firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and be returned to the player. By hitting the other game ball connected to the other end of the string into the game area while gripping one of the game balls that have been drawn, the string can be removed from the guide path and passed through the foul ball passage to the other side. Since it is possible to create a state in which one game ball and the other game ball are connected by a string, a load is applied from the outside to the string connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball placed in the game area There is a problem that there is a possibility that it may be possible to obtain illicit profits by manipulating the

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball using the string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage is performed, the one-way obstruction means However, by interfering with the movement of the string in the reverse direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illicit profits.

A game machine H2 characterized in that the foul ball path in the game machine H1 has a bent portion for bending a downflow path of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the string guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the string can be quickly cut.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion is provided with a load means on the inner corner side of the bending, which does not apply a load to the game ball flowing down but applies a load to the object flowing backward.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, it is possible to apply a load to the backflowing object (for example, a thread-like member) by the load means.

In the game machine H3, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the load means is arranged in a concave portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed part, collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H3 or H4, the gaming machine H5 comprises regulation means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the restricting means restricts the outward movement of the load means in the foul ball passage. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the on-line member from weakening due to the deformation of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, a receiving tray is provided as a tray on the front side of the front door for the foul balls to reach first, and the receiving tray is a portion for discharging the game balls paid out from the payout device. The game machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharge part is arranged above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the game balls paid out from the payout device pass in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage. To reduce the durability of the string by intentionally hitting the put out game ball to apply the load when the string guided to the game area is used to apply the load to the other game ball. be able to.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the put-out ball discharge part that discharges the game balls put out from the pay-out device to the receiving tray, which is the tray where the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door. , a game machine H7 characterized by being positioned below the lower end of the discharge-side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H6, a cheating act was performed in which a string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage was used to apply a load to the other game ball. In this case, the thread can be easily damaged by the game balls that are paid out.

<Structure of board holding down. Game machine I>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means receives the game means. A state changing means is provided for changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state, wherein the state changing means changes the gaming means to the usable state. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising an approach means for approaching the game means from the one side when setting the above.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is rotatable in a rotational direction parallel to the front surface of the game board and the game board is fixed to the inner frame, and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a game machine provided with a fixing means for holding (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the game board is pushed into the position of the use state, if the game board is pushed in halfway, it can be pushed again. Therefore, there is a problem that the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the state changing means has a means for approaching the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is incomplete, the approaching means contacts the game board and applies a pushing force, thereby exerting an effect that the game board can be pushed to the use state position.

In the game machine I1, the state changing means displaces the game means to the one side as the game means is changed to an unusable state. .

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the game means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the game means is changed to the unusable state, so that the game means can be removed. It is effective in improving the working efficiency of the work.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the state changing means makes the game means unusable and the proximity means retreats to the outside of the game means. Gaming machine I3.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1 or I2, the proximity means retracts to the outside of the game means, so that it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of removing the game means. Since this is performed along with disabling the means, the working efficiency can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I3, the game machine I4 is provided with contact means for receiving a load from the game means when the state changing means is changed to the usable state.

According to the game machine I4, since the contact means receives a load from the game means to change the state of the state changing means to the usable state, the operation of pressing the game means against the state changing means causes the usable state as a series of flows. can change state to

In the gaming machine I4, the game means is supported by a shaft on one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means by approaching the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, the width of the game means can be used to efficiently apply a load to the contact means via the game means.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I5, there is provided closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means, and the closing means is disabled by the state changing means making the game means unusable. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by comprising a closing regulation part that prevents the opening on one side of the gaming means from being closed when the state is maintained.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means puts the gaming means into a usable state depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. You can decide whether to As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means is maintained in an unusable state.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from getting stuck. Game machine J>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means being connected to the game means. A game machine J1, characterized in that it comprises an arranging means arranged on a path that communicates with the outside, wherein the arranging means is constructed so as to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of points.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-26573. ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is only one anti-fraud section, and there is a problem that the anti-fraud effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the game machine J1, the arranging means is arranged in the path where the piano wire is likely to be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of points. can improve the effect of

In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different in first means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a first location and second means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a second location. A game machine J2 characterized by suppressing entry of a member from the outside by a method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means differs in the method of suppressing the entry of members from the outside between the first location and the second location. Entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed as compared with the case where the number of is increased.

In addition, the method of suppressing the intrusion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of restricting entry by blocking a route, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the placement means comprises an intrusion control portion formed in a cup shape that opens outward of the receiving means.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed in the shape of a cup, so that the intruding member can be prevented from further intrusion.

In the game machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting electric wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry control section in a route from the outside to the game means. Characterized game machine J4.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J3, when a fraudulent act of penetrating the entry control part with high heat occurs, the change (disconnection due to heat, etc.) caused in the wiring due to the high heat is detected. It is possible to easily produce the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any one of game machines J1 to J4, game machine J5 is characterized in that said placement means comprises elimination means for guiding a member entering from the outside to an elimination area far from the game means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the member entering from the outside is guided to the resolution area far from the game means by the arranging means. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member entering from the outside from reaching the game means.

<Structure of five decorative plates. Including fraud prevention. Game machine K>
a first means and a second means arranged oppositely along a first direction and connected by at least one side; A gaming machine comprising a third means for connecting the first means and the second means, wherein the connection direction of the connecting part is set in a second direction that intersects the first direction A gaming machine K1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, first means and second means arranged to face each other and connected on at least one side, and disposed between the first means and second means along the first direction There is a gaming machine comprising a third means that However, in the above-described conventional game machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as adhesion or screwing, and when the first means and the second means are connected, the load along the first direction is the first. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being hung up on the third means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the third means It is possible to reduce the load applied from Thereby, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

A game machine K2 characterized in that, in the game machine K1, the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 comprises connected means connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, wherein the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means A gaming machine K3 characterized by being connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction of approaching and fitting them to each other.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, it is provided with a connected means connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. Thereby, even if a fraudulent act of breaking the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the fraudulent act can be detected early.

In the game machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening and fixing direction is the same as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any one of game machines K3 to K5, light irradiation means for irradiating light toward said first means or second means side and fixed to said connected means, and one of said first means or second means a light guiding means fixed to a member of the light emitting means and capable of introducing the light emitted by the light emitting means.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent positional deviation between the first and second means and the light guide means.

A game machine K7 characterized in that a game machine K7 is characterized by comprising contact means for surface contact in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machine K6, a space corresponding to the size of the abutting means is maintained in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means. can be done. This prevents the gap between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposing direction and is displaced. can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposing direction when an illegal attempt is made to disassemble the first means or the second means. can do.

<Point L for utilizing curved light guiding means. As a point, unachieved>
A light guide means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in an irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projecting means arranged opposite to the light guide means and onto which the light that has passed through the light guide means is projected, The game machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means comprises a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitting light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means has the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion It is possible to change the light emission intensity of the projection target means depending on the part.

In the game machine L1, the projection target means is characterized in that the concave surface opposing portion is made of a light-transmissive material, and the convex surface opposing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave surface opposing portion. Gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion, the light emitted from the light guiding means is condensed at the concave facing portion. The production effect of the production by the light can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, a reverse projection means is provided on the opposite side of the projection target means with the light guide means therebetween, and the light passing through the light guide means is projected. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light means facing the concave surface and a portion of the light guiding means facing the convex surface are made of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L2, the part of the counterprojection means arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide means and the part arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide means emit light. Since they are made of a material with substantially the same transmittance, by making the same light incident on the light guiding means, the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the means to be projected and the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the opposite projection means can be achieved. can be different from

<Arrangement structure of the bass reflex speaker. Game machine M>
first means and second means arranged opposite to each other and fixed to form an internal space in the fixed state; acoustic means disposed so as to enter at least a part of the internal space; A gaming machine M1, characterized by comprising bending means for constructing a bending path in an internal space.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame, and effects are produced by sounds output from the speakers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16088). In such a game machine, the vibration wave that advances toward the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left-right center position of the game machine and sent out to the outside of the game machine. , there is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the horizontal width of the game machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means constitutes a curved path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by configuring a path longer than the length of one piece, the By removing the restriction on the left-right width, it is possible to make the vibration wave travel an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that loads are applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is a rib-like member extending from at least one of the first means and the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2, characterized in that it has a protruding part protruding from the second means, and a protruding tip of the protruding part abuts on the other of the first means and the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, the projecting end of the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means and the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluid such as vibration waves from passing through the gap in the curved path.

In the game machine M1 or M2, an opening connecting the internal space and the outside is provided, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the sound means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is closed by

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the sound means, so it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls forming the internal space can be closed appropriately in a state where the passage member passes from the internal space to the outside.

The game machine M4, wherein the opening is arranged closer to the sound means than the protruding part in the game machine M3.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, when the wiring of the sound means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the sound means is prevented from being caught by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any one of game machines M1 to M4, support fastening means to which at least one of the first means and second means is fastened and fixed, and presentation means arranged below the support fastening means and performing presentation accompanying a game. and wherein the effect means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M1 to M4, the supporting and fastening means is supported by the effect means from below, so that the supporting and fastening means does not have to press the space used for the effect. things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, reverse rotating flower. Petals that stop on the way. Game machine N>
a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; and a second displacement means switchable between a non-following state displacing in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, wherein at least the second displacement means is in the following state, A game machine N1, further comprising third displacement means for displacing in a direction opposite to a displacement direction of said second displacement means by a driving force of said driving means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates in the vicinity of the extension end. When doing so, there is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion and contraction direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the performance becomes slow and the performance effect is not sufficient. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means displaces in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, so that the displacement speed of the second displacement means , can be visually recognized as a velocity based on the third displacement means. Therefore, compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized by comprising resistance means for generating resistance against the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. Game machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means by the action of the resistance means, and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of modes of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means using a driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means. be able to.

A game machine N4 characterized in that, in the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means has a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and is visually recognized by the player. It can also serve as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 is characterized by comprising a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, the shaft means coaxially and rotatably supporting the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means. Gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, since the shaft means functioning as the rotating shaft of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, the first displacement means, To prevent the displacement resistance from increasing excessively because the attitude of any one of the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, and the attitudes of the other members or means also follow and change. can be done.

<Utilization of shell buttons and holes. As a point, unachieved>
In a game machine comprising first means and housing means capable of housing the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: a first opening; and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operation means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operation means from below, and that the operation means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate. See JP-A-2012-048970). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, there is a problem that the foreign object remains inside and may induce a malfunction. .

On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 is provided with the second opening formed with a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the accommodation means includes a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. game machine O2.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support part.

A gaming machine O3, in the gaming machine O1 or O2, wherein the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistance portion. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of allowing a predetermined solid object to pass through and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any one of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are configured from a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are configured based on the shape of the solid object in the opposite direction. A solid object can be easily removed through the part.

A gaming machine O5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object can be visually recognized by the player when the second opening is partially blocked by the solid object. can be made As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the containing means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain. .

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, A gaming machine Z1 in any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, A game machine Z2 in any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, A game machine Z3 in any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, wherein said game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
12 inner frame (receiving means)
13 game board (game means)
14 front frame (blocking means)
14d2 Auxiliary projection (part of recess)
17 upper plate (part of receiving plate)
50 lower plate (part of receiving plate)
68 return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
145, 9145, 10145 Foul ball passage (foul ball passage)
159 opening and closing regulation part (closure regulation part)
173 long cover member (part of elimination means)
178 Inverted cup portion (part of arrangement means, first means, intrusion control part, part of elimination means)
180 binding movable member (part of arranging means, second means, supporting means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300
Operation device 310, 2310, 3310, 4310 tilting device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311gL, 3311gL Left side detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
311gR Right detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 shaft (shaft)
315 torsion spring (biasing means)
324L Left side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R right side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 upper frame member (part of housing means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 upper bearing (part of support)
340, 5340, 6340 drive device (drive means, first drive means)
341 body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 transmission shaft (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engagement tooth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engagement tooth)
343d coil spring (biasing means)
344, 6344, 7344 disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d connecting pin (protruding portion)
345 arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating pawl member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 Speaker (Sound Means)
453 Speaker connection wire (passing member)
460 front assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 passage forming rib (bending means, projecting portion)
480 rear side assembly (second means)
481Ha auxiliary projection (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing protrusion (part of opening)
487 passage forming rib (bending means, projecting portion)
500 right panel unit (directing means)
500L left stack unit (first means)
500R right stack unit (second means)
510 support plate portion (connected means)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 531c Support hole (part of connecting part)
532 inclined rib portion (abutting means)
540 light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b projecting portion (part of connecting portion)
600 board support device (state changing means)
620 Rotating front pawl member (approaching means)
640 post-rotation claw member (contact means)
801 Support substrate (base member)
802 petals (a part of the second displacement means)
804 central motor (driving means)
830 Rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 central shaft member (shaft means)
880 loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul Ball Passage (Foul Ball Passage)
2347 rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 slide pawl member (part of retaining means)
2888 Regulating part (resisting means)
4321d upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 drive motor (low water resistant part)
5412 weight member (vibration part, part of repulsion means)
5420 flexible member (part of support means, repulsion means)
5430 accommodation member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 disk member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 disc member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engagement member (release load means)
8320 lower frame member (part of housing means)
8326a First through hole (part of second opening)
8326b Second through hole (part of second opening)
8326c Third through hole (part of second opening)
9142a right slanted surface (a part of the payout ball discharge part)
9150, 10150 sheet metal member (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recess)
10145d rolling plate portion (restricting means)
E1 notification device (detection means)
P1a deformed part (deformed part)
S52 termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped path (bend)
V13, V14 Gap

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion/contraction direction of the first displacement means (Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-229580 A

However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the performance effect. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with a good performance effect.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a base member, first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means. , a second displacement means capable of switching between a following state displacing in the displacement direction of said first displacement means and a non-following state displacing in a direction different from the displacement direction of said first displacement means. and a third displacement means that is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means at least when the second displacement means is in the follow-up state.

According to the game machine according to claim 1, it is possible to improve the presentation effect.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6(a). (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a). FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6; FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device on line XIVc; It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. Fig. 10 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device; (a) is a front view of the driving device, and (b) is a side view of the driving device viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. 18. (a) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a release member and a rotary pawl member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 38; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); (a) is a side view of a slide claw member in a second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of a releasing member. (a) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of an operation device according to a fifth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and (c) is FIG. 59(a). is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc. 59(a) and 59(b) are sectional views of the vibrating device taken along line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59(a). 59(a) and 59(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive. (a) is a front perspective view of a right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. (a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). 67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a); is. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a); is. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member and a second transmission member of the left disk cam; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); (a) is a front view of a right disc cam in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. 74(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74(a), and (b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). is. (a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). (a) is a front view of an engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disc cam. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c); (e) is a front view of the right disc cam; (f) [ Fig. 78 ] is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in Fig. 78(e) ; 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to an outer frame; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened from an outer frame and a back pack is opened from the inner frame (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is closed with respect to an outer frame and a front frame is opened (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a front frame removed; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a movable binding member in which a released state and a fixed state of the movable binding member are shown side by side. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb of FIG. 94(a). (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95(a). (a) is a rear view schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and (c) is the movable binding member and the harness. FIG. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c). (a) And (b) is a front frame which illustrates a binding movable member and a harness typically, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and the upper surface schematic diagram of a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a first bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112(a). 113(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. 115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member taken along line CXVb-CXVb of FIG. 115(a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of an upper frame member; It is an exploded rear perspective view of an upper frame member. 1 is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly; FIG. Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly; (a) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and (c) is a view of FIG. FIG. 124D is a top view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame, and the upper side plate member taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa of FIG. 124(a); is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame and the upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (a) is a back view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. 127(a) and 127(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b). (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit. (a) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the ball launching unit showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device. 1 is a front perspective view of a metal member for cutting; FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball shooting unit viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). 147(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 10 is a partial front view of the ball launching unit, inner rail and outer rail after launching the ball; It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the production operation unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal motion device taken along line CLIV-CLIV of FIG. 153; Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor; (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; It is a back perspective view of a petal motion device, a drive-side arm member, and a driven-side arm member. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the back plate; It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a 2nd production|presentation member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive-side arm member, a slide plate, and a second effect member. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit in a ninth embodiment; It is a back perspective view of a passage formation unit. Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit according to a tenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a disc passage forming member in an eleventh embodiment. Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; (a) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of a loose fitting device according to a twelfth embodiment; (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal motion device. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment; 4 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of an operation device according to a thirteenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the operation device. (a) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, 203(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 203(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203(a). 87(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit according to the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward recess recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). FIG. FIG. 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206(a); 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in region CCVId of FIG. 206(a), and (e) is FIG. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the area CCVIe of (a);

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 are arranged to be operated by the player to hit the ball to the front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. Note that the operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 62, a general prize-winning port 63, a first prize-winning port 64, a second prize-winning port 640, a variable prize-winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. 1) is attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. etc. is fixed.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during probability variation) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol (to be described later) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the top, middle and bottom three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be, for example, one. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so in the variation display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 640 so as to pass the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 640 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A pair of out ports 71 are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motor 342 and voice coil motor 352 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged in the center of the inner frame 12 in the left-right direction (that is, the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction) when viewed from the front.

The operation device 300 is provided with a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable when pushed by the player, and is positioned in a region formed by a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. are placed. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

Between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a, a clearance is provided that is at least large enough for a finger to be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the fingertip is placed on the back side of the top surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 7(a). 7 is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7(b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a).

6 and 7 partially show the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces the vertical direction, and FIG. A state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in a second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and rearward is illustrated. Note that in FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340 . Details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player when, for example, a specific display (for example, a display of "Push button") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

Here, for example, if the tilting device 310 is pushed in by dropping the hand downward forcefully, as in the case of pushing a button that advances and retreats up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves forward depending on the degree of tilting. In this mode, the operation surface 312a1 is easily rubbed against the palm of the hand. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and to prevent the player from performing a pressing operation by dropping the hand downward forcefully.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertip near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward using the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to drop the hand vigorously downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

The difference in how the tilting device 310 looks from the player's point of view will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. In addition, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible in the first state from the player's point of view, while its area is reduced to such an extent that it becomes invisible in the second state. (the operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state.

In this embodiment, the area of the protective lens member 311i gradually increases in the process of changing from the first state to the second state. 12) is visually recognized gradually, the difference in the amount of light visible to the player between the first state and the second state (the degree of brightness and darkness) increases, and the difference between the first state and the second state increases. , the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum. Thus (by rotating around the wrist), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by dropping the palm downward with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the player to drop the hand downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft 314 on which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end.

As shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that imparts an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state move the tilting device 310 downward. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310 and the voice coil motor for applying the driving force outside the lower frame member 320, a large area inside the lower frame member 320 can be used for tilting. Device 310 can be housed in lower frame member 320 . Thereby, a large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at each of the left and right ends at the back side end (the far side end of the paper surface of FIG. 12), and a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1. A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member that has a recessed portion that is arranged to face the lower frame member 320 and has a large opening in the center, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 An upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and constitutes a link mechanism with the tilting device 310 to the tilting device 310. It mainly includes a driving device 340 that transmits a driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and protects the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from three sides, ie, the left-right direction and the rear.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface slope downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 slopes downward toward the front side. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end on the far side of the tilting device 310, and a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal portion 322, which is the tilting device 310. A lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from below, a left detection sensor 324L and a right detection sensor 324R that are arranged in pairs on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321, and a horizontal It is mainly provided with an opening 325 which is an opening formed by cutting a portion arranged on the lower side of the portion 322 .

The bottom plate portion 321 abuts on the tilting device 310 to determine the end of movement of the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321. be.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, detection holes 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right and an insertion hole 321c drilled symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed with a size that allows the projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 protrudes below the bottom plate portion 321, the tilting device 310 can be provided with a driving force in the linear motion direction.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole through which detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. The posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected by arranging the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the detection hole 321b in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R.

The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted therein, and the arm member Through-holes are formed up to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so that it does not move backward. By locking the torsion spring 315 with the locking portion 322a, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310 . In addition, the detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the separation distance (the position of the detection groove) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 is equal on the left and right.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor is equipped with a light projecting part that projects light and a light receiving part that receives the light from this light projecting part, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the part to be detected can be inserted. means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341 f of the drive device 340 , the rotary claw member 347 , and the like to enter the lower frame member 320 . Therefore, the lateral width thereof is made larger than the lateral width of the pair of rotary pawl members 347 .

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the driving device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f to the upper front side (see FIG. 17(b)), the driving device 341f is positioned after the LED device 341f passes through the opening 325. By pushing up 340, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the opening 325 is wider than the vertical width from the LED device 341f to the rotary claw member 347. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged to face the opening 331, which is large enough to catch the extended portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. and an upper bearing portion 332 configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom and an upper bearing portion 332 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 .

The protective cover device 350 is structured to be vertically divisible and covered in three directions except for the front side. A voice coil motor 352 that is supported by the bottom plate and arranged on the front side so that the vibration surface faces obliquely forward and upward, a left detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and a right side detection sensor 353L. A detection sensor 353R is mainly provided.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left-right center can be visually recognized.

The voice coil motor 352 is disposed in an assembled state (see FIG. 10) such that its vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 . As a result, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 . The disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 are arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether the detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R, and detecting that the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase. can be done.

In this embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, there are two specific phases detectable by the detection sensors 353L and 353R. be a type.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. 14(a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. FIG. 14(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device 310 along line XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14(a). 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 includes a case body 311 which is a box-shaped body having fan-shaped side surfaces and openings in the upper and lower sides, and the upper opening of the case body 311 is covered. Lid 312 fastened and fixed to case main body 311, spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side end of lid 312 and hanging down, and a mode sandwiched between the rear ends of case main body 311 and lid 312. a torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314; and a ring member BR1.

The case main body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening portion 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right sides of the opening portion 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending toward the center in the left-right direction from a flange projecting downward along the edge of the shaft 311c, and a concave portion 311d having a semicircular cross-section supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. , an insertion groove 311e which is a groove arranged at a position where both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. , a pair of left detection pieces 311gL and a right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) which are extended below the bottom plate portion 311a, and extension portions which are extended from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. a provision portion 311h, a protective lens member 311i which is arranged on the upper side of the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a, has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a bottom plate portion. 311a mainly includes an overhang projecting portion 311j projecting downward from the central portion in the left-right direction of the front side end portion of 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into surface contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member inserted through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17(b)) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to and from the drive device 340. Prepare.

The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. is longer than the right detecting piece 311gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL about 3° centered on the shaft portion 314 (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the push end (see FIG. 22) 23)), the left detection piece 311gL is projected more than the right detection piece 311gR.

The extended portion 311h projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i toward the front side, and projects to a position where it is engaged with the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). configured in a manner.

The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from above (see FIG. 14(a)) and a curved shape when viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 14(c)). The structure is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 can be easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhang projecting portion 311j projects perpendicularly from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 29), it is inserted through the transmission hole 321a and the tip projects downward from the lower frame member 320. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b connected to the top plate member 312a. and a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape and having a size to surround the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by its rigidity in the axial direction. While it is fixed inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such limitation is lifted, and the light from the LED device 341f can be widely irradiated.

The lens member 313 is made of a light-transmitting material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has a shape conforming to the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , and a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 at a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , provided.

Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17(a) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the drive device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. is a front exploded perspective view of the.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disk cams 344 (left disk cam 344L, right disk cam 344L, right disk cam 344R), an arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and an arm member 345 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341, and the first projecting portion 344c1 and the second A release member 346 that abuts on the overhanging portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, a rotary pawl member 347 that is coaxially and pivotally supported with the release member 346 and moves relative to the release member 346 as the release member 346 rotates, and the rotary pawl member 347 is tilted downward. A first spring SP1, which is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of releasing, and a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of separating the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 from each other. and a second spring SP2, which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 is formed at the same position of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is bent rearward on the left and right sides to form a U-shape when viewed from the top, and the plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is arranged to face the motor accommodating portion 341a. A shaft support hole 341b that supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that protrudes in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b in a manner having an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. , an extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, a lighting support portion 341e extending forward and upward from the motor housing portion 341a, and the lighting support portion 341e. and an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end and having an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f has a triangular-shaped member on its upper surface, and has a light-refracting portion (a light-refracting portion). This makes it possible to evenly irradiate the light from the LED device 341f upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing portion 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341a.

The fixed member 342a supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

One end of the arm member 345 has a perfectly circular shaft support hole 345a that is supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the other end of the arm member 345 has a rectangular shaft support hole 345a. and a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the opposite end of the shaft support hole 345a abuts against the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end of the guide hole 345a is positioned so that the disk cam 344 rotates more than once. It is formed in a position sufficient to allow rotation.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. FIG. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which disc cams 344 (see FIG. 18) are fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotating gear of the drive motor 342. a movable clutch 343c capable of switching whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction; a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b; Mainly provide

The cylindrical member 343a has fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 each having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. be. Here, in detail, the fixed portion 343a2 is formed with a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b has a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and a clutch in which unevenness along the axial direction is formed at the circumferential position of the shaft center from the surface facing the movable clutch 343c. and a portion 343b2.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 is perfectly circular, even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and unevenness along the axial direction is formed at the circumferential position of the shaft center from the surface facing the transmission gear 343b. and a clutch portion 343c2 configured to be engaged with the clutch portion 343b2.

In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are composed of mountain-shaped protrusions and recesses having a top angle of approximately 100°.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, relative rotation of the movable clutch 343c with respect to the cylindrical member 343a is disabled, so that the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged. As a result, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. Accordingly, by rotating the drive motor 342, it becomes possible to rotate the disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18).

The movable clutch 343c is normally arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when an axial load is applied to the movable clutch 343c, it is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 so as to separate from the transmission gear 343b.

Disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. In the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R are substantially mirror images of each other, and the only difference is the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR. , and the description of the right disc cam 344R is omitted.

20(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. be. 20(a) and 20(b) illustrate a state in which the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions protruding from both sides of a perfectly circular disc, and is positioned at the center of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a protruding inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b protruding inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centering on the central shaft portion 344a, and an outer side of the circular rib 344b. An engaging rib 344c projecting inward as a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344b and having two portions projecting radially outward at two locations, and an outer rib between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d projecting in a cylindrical shape in the direction and connected to the arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL drilled near the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and otherwise has a shape that mirrors the shape of the left disk cam 344L. .

The center shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross-section whose inner periphery is engaged with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19), and whose outer periphery is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). Configured. That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disc cam 344 is supported by the shaft support hole 341b. As a result, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c projects radially outward at a position shifted by 80° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. a protruding portion 344c1; At a position deviated by an angle θ2 (angle θ2=150° in this embodiment), the second projecting portion 344c3 projects radially outward again, and the second projecting portion 344c3 extends at an angle θ3 (angle θ3=20°), and a second lead-in portion 344c4 that retracts radially inward at a shifted position.

In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at the position with the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 are arranged as a pair on the left and right, and the configurations thereof are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are front views of the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 21(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated with respect to the release member 346 to the terminal position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 21(b) shows the release member 346 A small angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

The state in which the releasing member 346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the projecting pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). state) (see FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and includes a shaft support hole 346a supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), A protruding pin 346b projecting in the plate thickness direction in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and from the shaft support hole 346a and an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting with the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is configured to contact the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the engaging portion 346d is curved, so that the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

The rotary pawl member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. An elongated guide hole 347b is drilled along the guide pin 346b of the release member 346 (drilled with a size that includes the movement locus of the pin 346b), and the end of the second spring SP2. a hook-shaped portion 347d protruding downward at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a; and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). Mainly includes a pull-down hole 347e drilled in the.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21(a), the release member 346 is arranged at the end position of the rotation claw member 347 in the backward rolling direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21(a)). Therefore, in the large angle state, when a load is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the downward direction, the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 rotate together in the backward rotation direction. When a load in the upward direction is applied to 346d, only the releasing member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotating claw member 347 until reaching the small angle state shown in FIG. 21(b).

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example when the player performs the pushing operation when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In addition, in the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 22 to the terminal position, and FIG. 23 shows the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state. Also, FIGS. 22 to 24 show an example of a player's hand repeatedly operating the tilting device 310 .

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 is subjected to an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked on the hook portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347. As shown in FIG. As a result, the posture of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the tilting device 310 is always biased in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22).

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 23) by about 3 degrees. In this state, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection states of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is hit repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated. is not returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at an incomplete position, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this can be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 , but in this embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 moves against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 . It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) for pushing down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342 . As a result, there are problems such as an increase in product cost and an inability to save space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of effecting by vibrating motion is arranged at a position facing the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. be.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 310 can be quickly restored without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. can.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player presses the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player cannot Since unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and if the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is turned on. By driving the motor 352, the load for returning the tilting device 310 can be improved only when the player performs a repeated hitting operation. This allows the player to comfortably operate the tilting device 310 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts to reciprocate vertically from the first state (tilting operation) will be described. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).

25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed back and forth from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the terminal position, and FIG. The plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c contacts the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. is illustrated. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. As shown in FIG. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, it is possible to ensure a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c serves as a rib of the lid 312 to improve the strength, and in the first state of the tilting device 310, the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f can be adjusted.

As shown in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in direction), the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 presses down the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, thereby rotating the releasing member 346 in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotary pawl member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction until it is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 .

The posture change of the releasing member 346 is continued until the disc cam 344 is rotated until the first retracted portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 346d face each other. It rises by the biasing force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the far side from the rotation shaft of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345 , the upward movement of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344 .

As shown in FIG. 27, when the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 27) and the first retraction portion 344c2 of the disk cam 344 passes through the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, By the biasing force of the first spring SP1, the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27), and the rotating claw member 347 can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 27). 25). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (upper angle in FIG. 27). 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area where the protective lens member 311i can be seen from the player's point of view increases compared to the tilting device 310 in the first state. , the light from the LED device 341f can also be emitted in the front direction (the direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the lighting effect can be improved.

In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned ON, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating motion can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, from the state shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 is seen by the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side of the LED device 341f (on the left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. , and not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 28).

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light from the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also emitted in the direction toward the player (frontal direction), and the illumination range is widened by the lens member 313 .

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

As shown in FIG. 29, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. When the member 347 rotates backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and the tilting device 310 is subsequently pushed in, the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d. Return to engageable position (rotate forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state of vertically moving the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 28, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the tilting device 310. .

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibrating operation (an operation that repeats movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 310 can be performed.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force for assisting the upward movement of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 24), and the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the pushing end position to perform a vibration effect. can be used for

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 moves from the lower frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the push end.

Therefore, compared to a game machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, the player who pushed the tilting device 310 can check whether or not the voice coil motor 352 vibrates at the end of the pushing operation when the tilting device 310 is pushed. can be comprehended only by

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big win does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 . Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only when the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to perform a vibration effect when a big win is confirmed, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 value as a look-ahead means of As a result, the tilting device 310 can be easily operated by the player, and the value of the tilting device 310 as operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (reversed in FIG. The driving device 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating it clockwise) by a predetermined amount.

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first projecting portion 344c1 contacts the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second projecting portion 344c3 contacts the engaging rib 344c.

29, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) so that the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d, and then reversely rotates. 29 can be returned to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load is applied to the releasing member 346 in a direction to push up the releasing member 346, and only the releasing member 346 can be rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 29) while the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained. can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting motion) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( Second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (tilting operation) to reciprocate up and down after passing through the second state.

31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, and the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 are rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. FIG. 32 shows a state where the disk cam 344 has rotated a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 31 and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state, and FIG. 33 shows the state shown in FIG. 34 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 reciprocates from the position shown in FIG. Also, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 moves toward the disk cam 344 via the arm member 345. The tilting device 310 can be lifted with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 310 can be placed in the second state (posture in which the disc cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 attempts to reach the second state from the state of FIG. It is possible to prevent the situation that the tilting device 310 takes a long time to reach the second state because the cam 344 is slow to rotate by a predetermined angle.

As shown in FIG. 33, from the state shown in FIG. 32, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32). 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 is seen by the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side of the LED device 341f (on the left side in FIG. 33), so that the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is oriented forward and backward. , and not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 33).

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, two types of vertical motion (tilting motion), namely, the vertical motion shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical motion shown in FIG. This can be done immediately after releasing the restriction on the upward movement of the device 310 . Therefore, it is possible to create two modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342 .

As a result, compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation each time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big win), and the player's attention to the tilting device 310. degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load to lift the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. As shown in FIG. The rotating pawl member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rolling direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 34) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down shown in FIG. can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the operation of setting the disk cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by the rotary pawl member 347 after the pushing operation by the player will be described. do. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two kinds of vertical motions (tilting motions) of the tilting device 310, or to perform one of them continuously.

35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 35 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 36, after rotating cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) beyond the state shown in FIG. 37, the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the sensor 353L is in the ON state is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 346d. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346 to change the posture of the release member 346. It stops, and the rotary pawl member 347 is maintained in the posture shown in FIG.

35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35) to release the engagement between the engaging rib 344c and the releasing member 346. Regulation of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

35, the disc cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotating cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35), thereby , the drive device 340 can be in a second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the vertical motion (tilting motion) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2, as described above.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can perform an action of keeping his hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if there is no special display such as "long press". be.

This is, for example, an action that occurs when the user forgets to release the hand that pushed the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the performance. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating motion (normal/reverse switching motion) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (tilting motion) within the range of the angle D2, the attitude of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disc cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350, as shown in FIG. (See FIG. 14) is controlled to stop the rotation of the disc cam 344 (stop the drive of the drive motor 342) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned ON (see FIG. 14).

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the player's hand is placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 does not move upward. A change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the player's hand continues to be placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, and the driving motor 342 is reciprocated (normal/reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

It should be noted that when the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately reversely rotate and return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the driving device 340 can be quickly returned to the second initial state, and no unnecessary load is applied to the driving device 340, so that the motor life of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing breakage of the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of operation device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 38, the player's hand holding and fixing the tilting device 310 in the second state is shown in phantom lines, and FIG. 39 shows the upper member of the body cover 351. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b. be.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be idly rotatable with respect to the transmission shaft 343a that fixes the disc cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts to drive with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the transmission gear 343b is driven through the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the transmission gear 343b is disengaged from the movable clutch 343c, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

Note that when the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state by rotating the disk cam 344 once due to the structure of the operation device 300. FIG. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 does not turn ON while the driving motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360°) (when the tilting device 310 does not turn to the first state). In addition, it is determined that the player is intentionally performing an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and is notified by, for example, displaying on the third symbol display device 81 to stop the gripping operation. While doing so, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation, and only at that time, it is possible to notify to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the driving motor 342 early to prevent failure. be able to.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disk cam 344, which is in phase with the movable clutch 343c, are shifted. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (with the number of steps, etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

In contrast, in the present embodiment, it is possible to specify that the driving device 340 has entered the first initial state by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 has been turned ON. , by resuming the control of the drive motor 352 (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342) with that state as the initial position, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, Control can be performed in a state in which the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are matched again.

As a result, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, there is a discrepancy between the motion to be performed by the tilting device 310 by controlling the rotation of the drive motor 342 and the motion actually performed by the tilting device 310. prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform an effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that idles with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be explained below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 40 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CCW. 42 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CW.

As shown in FIG. 41, when disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CCW, tilting device 310 moves through the first state shown in FIG. 40 to the second state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG.

This is not only because the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the releasing member 346, the fixation by the rotary pawl member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below. A load in the direction of pushing up the member 347 is not generated. Therefore, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is never released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, the operations from FIG. 38 to the first state shown in FIGS. is a different operation from either FIG. 41 or FIG.

For example, the difference in the operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39), but the drive noise caused by the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in change, the player will notice the mode of the control being performed, and the player will grasp the effect that will be executed from now on, which may diminish the player's interest. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the driving motor 342, the load on the driving motor 342 increases, and the durability of the driving motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. Since only the direction is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of rotation due to the drive mode (vibration, sound, etc.). For this reason, for example, when the degree of expectation for the presentation changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the driving motor 342 rotates, the player can confirm whether the tilting device 310 is raised or maintained in the first state. Since it is possible to grasp the change in the degree of expectation, it is possible for the player to understand the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. can be directed to watch over

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to suppress the tilting device 310 from being held by the player. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

In addition, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the load given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. The durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, regarding the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 44 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340, and the first The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle that does not allow the projecting portion 344c1 to pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by imaginary lines. .

As shown in FIG. 44, when the release member 346 is pushed down by the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are engaged with the releasing member 346. By reciprocatingly rotating the disk cam 344 while maintaining a positional relationship that does not pass through 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346. FIG.

In this case, the attitude of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 44) as the attitude of the release member 346 changes, so that the tilting device 310 can be operated in the manner shown in FIG. In the vertical movement, even if the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 does not engage with the rotating claw member 347, and when the player releases the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves to the first state (rotation). It is possible to implement an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is moved upward from the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310 and the vertical motion is continued.

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the above-described first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. Manipulation of the device 300 can have non-traditional meanings. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first motion mode or the second motion mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the robot was moving up and down in the third motion mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first action mode and the second action mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state). case) is compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (the case where the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). If a difference is provided in that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, the player recognizes the degree of expectation as to whether or not a big win will occur not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since it is possible to obtain opportunities, it is possible to provide many timings at which the player pays attention to the operation device 300 . Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained when the releasing member 346 is pushed up has been described. In addition, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG.

45(a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45(b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45(c) is a side view of the release member 2346. It is a side view.

46(a) and 46(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, showing interlocking between the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. FIG. .

FIG. 46(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated with respect to the release member 2346 to the terminal position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. A small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is shown. The state in which the releasing member 2346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the protruding pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the long guide hole 347b). state) (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a releasing member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a rotating plate member 2347 as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47). and a slide claw member 2348 disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 interposed therebetween and configured to be slidable along an arc track centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). , is mainly provided. In the releasing member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, the same reference numerals are assigned to the structures having the same functions as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the slide claw member 2348 includes a curved portion 2348a formed in a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and an upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b protruding in a hook-like shape (to the left in FIG. 45) and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are stacked in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 47A). Mainly, a reinforcing portion 2348c formed in a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a and a projecting pin 2348d projecting cylindrically toward the releasing member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Prepare.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portions 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is slidably movable with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 in a state in which it is fitted in the rail portion 2347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is provided on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that attracts a bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface of the rotary plate member 2347 opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is wider than the curved portion 2348a. , which reinforce the slide claw member 2348 .

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted through the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted through and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. When the releasing member 2346 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, the projecting pin 2348d is pushed against the side surface of the functional long hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides.

The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, a pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f for guiding the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide. and a support long hole 2347g through which the projecting pin 2348d of the pawl member 2348 is inserted.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347. Side surfaces of the pair of plate-like portions facing each other are arranged such that the rotating plate member 2347 moves forward (see FIG. 3). 46 counterclockwise), it is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47).

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support long hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid while the projecting pin 2348d is inserted through the long support hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the long support hole 2347g. wobble can be suppressed.

The release member 2346 includes a functional elongated hole 2346e that is elongated in the thickness direction, in addition to the pivot hole 346a, the projecting pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engaging portion 346d. .

The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole having a width slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d of the slide pawl member 2348, and has a curved shape along an arc centered on the pivot hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole portion 2346e1 and a second long hole portion 2346e2 extending from one end of the first long hole portion 2346e in an inclined direction toward the opposite direction of the pivot hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and changes state between a large angle state and a small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 moves along the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. slide to move.

Since the functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d, there is no time delay with respect to the movement of the releasing member 2346, and the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 is the same as the movement of the projecting pin 2348d. reflected in speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide claw member 2348 slides quickly.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the projecting pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

That is, in this embodiment, even if the slide claw member 2347 slides due to the rotation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 slides when the slide claw member 2347 is pulled in the large angle state. No movement. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310 .

FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the attitude of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 47 shows a state in which the second retraction portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is arranged below the engagement portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. 48 clockwise) and the release member 2346 is returned by the biasing force of the second spring SP2.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 2310 exerts a large load on the slide claw member 2348 because the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released due to the change in posture of the tilting device 2310. you will not be

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide pawl member 2348 slides upward in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are magnetically attracted to each other, if the releasing member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by causing the slide claw member 2348 to slide at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). It is possible to move the tilting device 2310 upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the tilting device 2310 is released from the upward movement restriction by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves upward can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disk cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the biasing force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the number of operation modes increases, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means for foreseeing by associating the operation modes with the degree of expectation of the big win. Attention can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is lifted by lifting the slide claw member 2348 as shown in FIG. Since the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the magnetic attraction between the load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player puts his or her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand when the regulation by the slide claw member 2348 is released. Also (even if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, the player's hand will be lifted in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner.

As a result, when the tilting device 2310 is lifted, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the upward direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by putting his hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the degree of expectation of a big win, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of foreseeing. can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. In the first embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. is configured in such a manner that detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed by the player, or pushed by the player. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 includes a right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case main body 3311, and the same position as the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). and a left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the axis and arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction. The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR, and has a shorter extension length than the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

51(a) and 51(b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. 51(a) shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed. 51(a) and 51(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R. None (the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the end of pushing, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, while the right detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

By detecting changes in the states of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing, it is possible to detect the state in the middle of pushing. , or on the way back.

That is, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in a state changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52(a) and 52(b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. Note that FIG. 52(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, and FIG. 52(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the end of pushing to the first state. . 51(a) and 51(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted through the right detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the ON state).

As shown in FIG. 52(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state arranged at the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L while the left detection sensor 324L is inserted. , the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in a state changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to provide an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is applied to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving downward. Collision of the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving up can provide a load for lifting the tilting device 3310 more effectively than colliding.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of the detection sensors 324L and 324R. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when it is not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the upward speed of the tilting device 3310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 3310 from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 3310, the rising motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 is more stable than when the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the repeated hitting operation of the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably performed.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. In the first embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. 3 detects the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 while it is changing from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k projecting in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding projecting portion 311j of the case body 4311. As shown in FIG.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) provided on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This is a portion for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating the depression operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 54(a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54(b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the state shown in FIG. It is shown passing down sensor 4321e. 54(a) and 54(b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown in phantom lines for easy understanding. Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side portion of the bottom plate portion 4321. As shown in FIGS. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler-type sensors, and are arranged in such a manner that the detection groove is oriented in a direction that allows the front detection piece 4311k to pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged on an arc orbit around the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310 at intervals of 20°.

When the state shown in FIG. 54(a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 54(b) by the player pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k detects the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321d. 4321e in order. By detecting the timing interval of the passage, it is possible to determine whether the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 is large or small, and whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 is selected based on the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the length of the push is long (because the acceleration period is long). The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no means of deceleration, the tilting device 4310 must be made strong as a safety measure for when the player pushes with all his might, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. A challenge arises.

It is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that exerts a biasing force on the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is positioned near the push end, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak strength or a player who decides to perform the pressing operation softly, the increased reaction force in the vicinity of the pressing position becomes a burden on the pressing operation, and the player is likely to feel fatigued. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e determine whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 based on the timing interval between switching between the ON state and the OFF state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, when the interval between timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively, is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned on. While it is not driven, if the timing interval described above is shorter than the predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in a manner that it is driven.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily moved even with a weak force. Push operation is possible.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, the reaction force against the tilting device 4310 includes not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of pushing. can be added. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 protrudes below the lower frame member 4320. Then, the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in such a manner that it is pushed out in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310 .

As a result, compared to the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

55(a) and 55(b) are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. FIG. 55(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55(b) shows a state where the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end. .

55(a) and 55(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines. Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 protrudes convexly in the middle of reaching the end of pushing from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the projecting portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 becomes the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is retracted. It is possible to consume the force of the pushing operation to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure that applies a load by friction like a disc brake, but a structure that applies a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55(a), the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, so the state shown in FIG. By gradually increasing the current supplied to the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state, the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, the tilting device 4310 decelerates from the first state to the end of pushing while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other. You can improve the effect.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the tilting device 4310 is placed at the push end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352 .

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the voice coil motor 352 vibrates (moves in the extension direction and in the contraction direction repeatedly). As a result, after the tilting device 4310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310 can be performed.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position to perform a vibration effect.

Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68. FIG.

In the first embodiment, by vibrating the voice coil motor 352, the vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes the tilting device 310, but the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment , a drive motor 5411 for rotating a weight member 5412 arranged at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG.

56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the operation device 5300 has a lower frame member 320 as a lower frame member 5320 and a drive device 5340 as a drive device 5340, unlike the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. Along with this, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350 . The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

A vibrating device 5400 having a drive motor 5411 is arranged on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch is arranged on the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 contains a transmission device 5410 for rotationally driving a fan-shaped weight member 5412, the transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is made of a flexible material. and a flexible member 5420 formed in the shape of a bottomed dish with an open upper surface, which accommodates the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 in a partitioned manner, and is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. 5430 and .

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotationally driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a portion corresponding to the pivot of the fan pivotally supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. and are mainly provided.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of left and right fixed portions 5411a formed from a metallic material in a flange shape on the side surface on which the shaft protrudes.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported with respect to the rotating shaft of the driving motor 5411 . Therefore, when the driving motor 5411 rotates, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 changes, and the driving motor 5411 is configured to vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body portion 5421 in the shape of a cylindrical container in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the side opposite to the side into which the drive motor 5411 is inserted. A pair of rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding in the left and right direction and downward in the radial direction of the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body 5421 are connected to each other. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a pair of projecting leg portions 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421 in the form of columns.

The main body portion 5421 has the same depth as the length of the drive motor 5411 in the axial direction, and has a depth of a container shape. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the body portion 5421, the shaft side end face of the drive motor 5411 and the opening side end face of the body portion 5421 are formed on the same plane. Also, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423 .

The rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are formed on the left and right sides by the amount of the posture maintaining portions 5423 arranged on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance is greater than that of the rib-like leg portion 5422 on the lower side.

Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is projectingly provided in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 can be made finer.

In the assembled state, the housing member 5430 includes a first housing portion 5431 housing the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420, and a second housing portion adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 and housing the weight member 5412. 5432 and a recessed groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface of the connecting surface of the first accommodating portion 5431 and the second accommodating portion 5432 .

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is determined by inserting the flexible member 5420 until the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 touches the bottom and releasing the load applied during insertion (assembly load released state). The depth is such that the projecting leg portion 5424 protrudes.

The depth of the second housing portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 and the flexible member. The depth is such that it interferes with the rotational trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the weight member 5420 is deformed (in an assembly load state).

The recessed groove 5433 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth extending slightly below the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembly load state. be.

59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59(a), and FIG. ) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59(a). In addition, in FIG.59(a), the part corresponding to the vibration apparatus 5400 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. Also, in FIG. 59(a), the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the player pushes three degrees from the first state, The end region S52, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed in the end position of the push, is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), a projecting leg portion 5424 is projected in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the circular arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as a rotation axis. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the maximum amount of deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56).

As shown in FIG. 59( b ), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load-released state in which no load is applied to the projecting leg portion 5424 .

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the projecting legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the extension direction. Therefore, since the projecting leg portion 5424 can be evenly pushed in on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left or right (inclining to the left or right in the plane of FIG. 59(b)) when pushed. The protruding leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a pair of through holes 5321d into which the projecting leg portions 5424 can be inserted. Since the through-hole 5321d has a lateral width slightly larger than the diameter of the projecting leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the bottom surface of the tilting device 310 is projected. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, the lateral deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 can be suppressed. Therefore, deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 can be suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 can be easily moved downward (downward in FIG. 59B) together with the protruding leg portion 5424 .

60(a) and 60(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 along line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59(a). Note that FIG. 60(a) shows the assembly load released state, and FIG. 60(b) shows the protruding leg portion 5424 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the end region S52 (see FIG. 59(a)). The assembled load state after being pushed inwardly of the first receiving portion 5431 is illustrated. Note that the outlines of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), a load is applied to the vibrating device 5400 from the assembly load release state, and when the assembly load state is reached, the projecting legs 5424 and the lower rib-like legs As 5422 deforms, drive motor 5411 and weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. 310 can mitigate the impact when it collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57). Moreover, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the raised end, see FIG. 38) The rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the rising motion of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is effectively used, so that the tilting device 310 is more stable than when the tilting device 310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the tilting device 310 can be smoothly hit repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not contact the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in the assembly load-released state, vibration due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 and are prevented from being transmitted to the housing member 5430 . This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411 .

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the assembly load state, the body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is vertically displaced by deformation of the upper projecting leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422. Constructed in an acceptable manner.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being more vertically compressed, and the rib-like leg portion 5422 hardens slightly. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

In addition, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portions 5422 extend along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and are spaced horizontally from the central axis at uniform intervals. Since the flexible members 5420 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, when the flexible members 5420 move downward, the radially outer ends of the rib-like leg portions 5422 move to the left and right outward (at the connection position between the main body portion 5421 and the rib-like leg portions 5422). (Refer to FIG. 60(b)). In this case, since the projecting direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can act in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, the lateral load that may occur when the weight member 5421 collides with the second housing portion 5432 is reduced by the elastic force of the rib-like leg portion 5422 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421. can be effectively absorbed. As a result, it is possible to suppress displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction.

Figures 61(a) and 61(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of Figure 59(a).

FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) show the assembly load state, FIG. 61(a) shows the state where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and FIG. In b), the state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. 61(a) and 61(b) show the vibrating device 5400 in a state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and occupies the termination region S52.

The operation of transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is positioned upward in the assembly load state, the driving motor 5411 rotates to a position where the distance from the lower base of the second housing portion 5432 is the distance Q1. Axes are placed. In this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412 abuts (rubbes) the second housing portion 5432 . Therefore, the vibration caused by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes compared to the state in which the assembly load is released, and a different kind of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432, a force that moves the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61(b)) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 move toward and away from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward). ) can be easily directed. This repulsive force causes the flexible member 5420 to move upward together with the drive motor 5411 supporting the weight member 5412, causing the flexible member 5420 to move the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (along the movement direction of the tilting device 310). direction) can be reinforced.

In this way, the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is divided into the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. By combining the generated forces, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted.

That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 during the period from when the tilting device 310 starts contacting the projecting leg portion 5424 until it moves toward the termination region S52 (see FIG. 59(a)). , and after the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As shown in FIG. As a result, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the end region S52, so that the tilting device 310 can be easily operated and the impact during the pushing operation can be reduced. This adjustment can be performed while the drive motor 5411 is kept rotating. Therefore, complicated control can be made unnecessary.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57). ) is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km/h), and the placement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is greater than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 provides the tilting device 310 with a It is desired to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is moved in advance so as to assume a downward posture (see FIG. 61(b)).

As a result, the lowering end of the driving motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotary shaft is raised by the radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 . As a result, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61(a)) (when it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61(a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, the compression dimension of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the driving motor 5411 can be increased when the projecting leg 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although not described in the present embodiment, by keeping the driving motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61(a)), the force pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the force due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, contact between the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320 , not between the tilting device 310 . Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and to widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, the portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing can be moved. Vibration can be transmitted to the player through the device. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the weight member 5412 is activated only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembly load state. and the housing member 5430 abut to generate vibration.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed. Vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where vibration is generated from the body.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the hand is released immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (pulse pushing state), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. In this case, there is a possibility that vibration cannot be generated (vibration is not started in time) before the player releases his/her hand, and the player may not be able to experience the effects of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 rotates before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and preparations for vibration generation are completed. As a result, the player can experience the effect of the vibration.

In addition, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431 . Therefore, even if the driving motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

Therefore, by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed, a state in which vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized.

Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The driving device 5340 differs from the driving device 340 in the first embodiment in the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 . Others are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive 5340. FIG. As shown in FIG. 62, an elongated concave portion C1 is formed in the central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344, which are composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Since the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 5344L are configured in symmetrical shapes, only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of clamping arm portions A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R has, at its center position, a support cylinder portion P1 that extends from the disk portion toward the side where the circular rib 344b is arranged, and a support cylinder portion P1 that extends in the axial direction of the support cylinder portion P1. , the long hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion in an axially symmetric long hole shape, and the axis of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1 to a position about half the extension distance. It mainly includes a pair of holding arm portions A1 extending from the end portion of the direction toward the disk portion side along the axial direction.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343 . The support cylinder portion P1 includes a deformed portion P1a that is not recessed in the long hole recess C1 and remains in the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1.

The deformed portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged to sandwich the long hole recessed portion C1, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). configured as a part to

The long hole recess C1 is formed with a width dimension slightly longer than the width dimension of the clamping arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the recessed cross section of the long hole recess C1.

In addition, the opposing surface of the long hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed as a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed as an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, the cylindrical member 5343a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disk cam 5344. As shown in FIG.

The holding arm portion A1 includes an engagement convex portion A1a that protrudes from the surface of the pair of arm portions facing the opposing arm in a direction approaching the opposing arm. . The engagement projection A1a engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when coupled with the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disc cam 5344. As shown in FIG.

The shape of the tip of the engaging projection A1a is configured to match the circular arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, the radial overlap length (Fig. 65 (b) length in the left-right direction) can be ensured to be long.

The engaging projection A1a has a recessed surface portion C2 (a long hole recessed portion) recessed along the shaft near the shaft, and the side surface on the side closer to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disc cam 5344R. It is arranged at a position that is the plane position with the side surface on the opening side of C1.

As a result, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement projection A1a can be completed on the support cylinder P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) than the recessed surface portion C2 (FIG. 65(b)). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63(b)), compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted in the cylindrical member 5343a, the length by which the cylindrical member 5343a protrudes from the recessed surface portion C2 is determined by the e-ring. can be shortened by the thickness of (see FIG. 65(b)).

In addition, there is no need to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for sliding the e-ring in contact with the surface) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the width of the recess (the width in the radial direction) of the recessed surface portion C2. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. FIG. A difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

The columnar member 5343a is formed at both ends of the fixing portion 5343a1, which has a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 5344, and the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in the front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the cross-sectional shape, a fitting groove 5343a3 which is a groove into which the e-ring is fitted and which positions the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction by the e-ring, and its fitting groove. An engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove in which the engaging convex portion A1a of the holding arm portion A1 engages when the disk cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in the 5343a3, is mainly used. Prepare. The fitting grooves 5343a3 are arranged laterally outside the pair of plates in which the pivot holes 341b are formed in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted through the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides under the biasing force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

By fitting the e-ring into the fitting groove 5343a3 from behind, a portion of the cylindrical member 5343a whose diameter is partially increased is formed by the e-ring. The diameter of member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter uniform, the columnar member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62) by a predetermined amount, and then the e-ring is fitted, thereby adjusting the axial direction of the columnar member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b with the e-ring. In addition, the e-ring can prevent the disk cam 5344 from axially dislocating.

Due to the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 described above, the disk cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is positioned on the side of the end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 on which the engagement protrusion A1a is arranged. It is inserted from the opposite end to the position where the engaging projection A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engagement protrusions A1a are inserted into the engagement grooves 5343a4 to a position where the engagement protrusions A1a are fitted, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engagement protrusions A1a The clamping arms A1 are elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between them is increased. After that, when the tip of the columnar member 5343a passes through the engagement protrusion A1a, the engagement protrusion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted into the engagement groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only for one-touch assembly, but also as a destruction prevention structure in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG.

FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. FIG. 65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66(b) is a right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). 5344R is a cross-sectional view.

Note that FIG. 66 illustrates the right disc cam 5344R after being deformed when the player gives an overload to the unloaded right disc cam 5344R illustrated in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the columnar member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position spaced apart from the disc portion of the right disc cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, only the engaging protrusion A1a engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when the columnar member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, the columnar member 5343a can be tilted about the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), since the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of clamping arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a to axial tilt displacement is reduced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(c), the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disc cam 5344R extend along the axial direction of the right disc cam 5344R in the direction in which the supporting cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected. , the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a against axial tilting displacement is increased.

Therefore, when the player forcibly holds down (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). is applied), the deformation direction of the right disk cam 5344R with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R deforms in the direction of less resistance, so as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, The disk portion is axially tilted and deformed about a support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R compared to the position shown in FIG. 65(a).

67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 67(b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 67(b), illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345 and the releasing member 346 are illustrated. Further, in FIG. 67(a), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R in a state in which it is perpendicularly inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is illustrated by a solid line. The outline of the folded state is illustrated by imaginary lines.

FIG. 67(a) shows the second state of the tilting device 310, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310, and an enlarged state of the vicinity of the connecting pin 344d. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the player restricts the displacement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the axial tilting deformation described above, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after its axial tilt deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to axial tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating and the outer circumference of the right disc cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd, the arm member 345 is supported by the arm member 345 by the dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are displaced from each other, and the right disc cam 5344R is deformed to be axially tilted in order to absorb this displacement.

Since the connecting pin 344d falls in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. The position is shifted along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This positional deviation can partially absorb the positional deviation between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the right disc cam 5344R by the dimension Rd. 342 (see FIG. 62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 while holding the tilting device 310 fixedly. In this case, the load applied to arm member 345 connecting disk cam 5344 and tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates backward (in the direction of the arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on disc cam 5344 via release member 346 . In this case, the rotation claw member 347 is blocked by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates forward (the direction of the arrow CCW, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 acts against it. acts on the disc cam 5344 via the releasing member 346 and the rotating pawl member 347 . In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the releasing member 346 and the disk cam 5344 are in contact with each other and the releasing member 346 moves along the direction of movement of the disk cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 or Among the elastic forces of any of the second springs SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the disk cam 5344 can be increased. As a result, the load applied to the disk cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. can be reduced regardless of the direction of rotation.

In this embodiment, the right disk cam 5344R is formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). ), regardless of the rotation direction of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the positional deviation direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345), the right disc cam 5344R can be deformed in the same manner. It can be axially deformed by resistance.

FIG. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 68(b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. In addition, in FIG.68(b), illustration of the protective cover apparatus 350 is abbreviate|omitted. In addition, in FIG. 68(a), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R, which is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343, is shown in solid lines. The outline of the folded state is illustrated by imaginary lines.

FIG. 68(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and is tilted downward by an angle D2. A player's hand is shown holding a

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the player grips the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is in motion, the right disk cam 5344R is held regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not. , the tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The items described for the right disc cam 5344R also apply to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67(b) and 68(b), according to this embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, causing an overload. Then, the right disc cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to quickly notice the occurrence of overload. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period in which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right detection sensor 353R. However, when the player holds the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated. An overload is detected because the input to 353R does not change.

In this case, since it takes a period of time to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle in a state in which no overload occurs until the occurrence of overload is detected, there is a problem that the detection of overload is delayed. there were.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the overload occurs. Occurrences can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a method of detection, for example, a method using an informing device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c is exemplified (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66(a)). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input portion, and is arranged in pairs at positions where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arm portions A1 and the engagement rib 344c intersect. and the input portion protrudes toward the support cylinder portion P1. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65(b)), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are formed in a contact relationship (see FIG. 65(b)). 66(b)). Accordingly, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to quickly determine whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, an operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 344c and 344c are composed of separate members and configured to be relatively rotatable with each other. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG.

69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disc member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2 and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disc cam 6344L. is. Although the configuration of the right disc cam 6344R is also different from that of the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R is configured in a mirror image of the left disc cam 6344L. , and the description of the right disc cam 6344R is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L is provided with a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL as in the first embodiment, and is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a. It includes a disk member 6344L1 that is coaxially supported and rotates relative to the ring member 6344L2.

The disk member 6344L1 has the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment arranged at the center of the disk portion, and is spaced radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided protruding along.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring-shaped body 6344g having the same outer diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. and receiving gear teeth 6344i formed on and disposed radially outwardly at the thickened portion thereof.

Since the inner diameter of the ring main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b, in the assembled state, the ring main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, thereby forming the central shaft portion 344a. A ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around .

The axial end surface of the annular main body 6344g on the disk member 6344L1 side contacts the annular rib 6344f. As a result, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced compared to the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the surface is in contact with the disk member 6344L1. Therefore, relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i meshes with the speed reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348 . Therefore, the rotation of the second transmission device 6348 causes the ring member 6344L2 to rotate. In the present embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1 (the disk member 6344L1 rotates once while the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times). , the number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c and the receiving gear teeth 6344i are set).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and includes an auxiliary column member 6348a that is arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a, and the auxiliary column member 6348a. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a reduction transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. 6348c and .

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the tilting device 310 is lifted in a plurality of ways after the tilting device 310 is unlocked from the rotating claw member 347 in the first state.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 6300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 has made one rotation in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. , after rotating more than one rotation, the state in which the disk member 6344R1 rotates backward by the amount exceeded), and the state in which the disk member 6344R1 rotates ⅓ in the backward rotation direction (direction of arrow CW). is illustrated. FIG. 73 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 moves upward.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 immediately (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) moves up, the reaching position is the second state. It was limited to the position to be arranged (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the disc member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other. can be changed, and the types of reachable positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

72, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and is tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). In this manner, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) is released from the state shown in FIG. 344 rotation) can be varied.

As a result, for example, when the tilting device 310 is configured to change the degree of expectation for the performance depending on the difference in the height to which the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 can be increased. can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the degree of expectation is increased when the tilting device 310 rises higher or when the tilting device 310 reaches a lower elevation position.

However, by keeping the ascending reaching position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the degree of expectation reaches its maximum, the degree of expectation It is possible to associate the magnitude of the amount of displacement with which the player pushes and operates the tilting device 310, thereby making it easy for the player to understand the difference in expectations due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.例文帳に追加

In this case, it is possible to motivate the player to check to what position the tilting device 310 rises, so that the player does not have to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. can be directed to Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, a game method in which the tilting device 310 is operated chaotically can be suppressed.

Next, an operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and these separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the features of a disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

74(a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 75(a) is a front view of FIG. 75(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 75(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). Since the right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror copy of the right disk cam 7344R, a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disc cam 7344R includes a disc member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a through which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state, and a disc member 7344R1. and an engaging portion 7630 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. and an engaging member 7344R3 having a

The disk member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center, and has a detection hole 344eR in a portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup in a flange shape, and an engagement rib. 344c is a member configured with a shape that is partially omitted (a portion between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in the assembled state, and has a first circular recessed portion 7410 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a. Between the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion smaller in diameter than the first circular recessed portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and between the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracted portion 344c2, a radial An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 is bored, and a fixing projecting radially outward from the side surface of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (the outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430 A projection 7440 is mainly provided.

The insertion hole 7430 is a first rectangular long hole portion elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a position displaced from an intermediate position between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. A long hole 7431 and a second long hole 7432 which is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disc member 7344R1 from the end of the first long hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disc member 7344R1. and a return portion 7433 configured to protrude toward the second long hole 7432 with the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 serving as a fulcrum.

The dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (transverse direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 (lower end portion in FIG. 75(b)) as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outwardly of the second elongated hole 7432 .

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a protrusion height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, referring to FIG. 76, the ring member 7344R2 will be described. 76(a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(c) is a view in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 7344R2 is a side view of the ring member 7344R2. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c), the ring member 7344R2 includes a ring-shaped plate portion 7510 in which the connecting pin 344d is protruded, and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. and a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recess depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410 , and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410 . be. As a result, in the assembled state, the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 can be aligned with each other while preventing excessive resistance to relative rotation.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 to a length that reaches (does not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75(a)). is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recess 7420 . As a result, in the assembled state, the engagement member 7344R3 can be moved in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75(a)) while preventing the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 includes a deformed through-hole 7521 drilled along the axial direction, and recesses radially outward in the deformed through-hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (five equal intervals in this embodiment). It mainly includes an equally divided concave portion 7522 provided.

The deformed through-hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when the later-described engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward of the disk member 7344R1. Configured.

77(a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77(b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a).

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the engaging member 7344R3, in the assembled state (see FIG. 74(b)), is radially outward of the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the rear-side end of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 (the right end in FIG. 77B) of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610; An engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 77(b)) from the extended distal end of the portion 7620 and an arc-shaped plate portion 7610 disposed on the side facing the engaging portion 7630 and a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 has a spring fixing projection 7611, which is a projection into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the distal end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted through the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when pushed radially inward against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip is It is configured with an extension length that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction that is slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends to a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75(a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the release member 346 and is displaced, and a function that positions the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. 78(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(b) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78(a). 78(c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, FIG. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c), and FIG. 78(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e).

78(a), 78(b), 78(c) and 78(d) show a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disc member 7344R1, and FIG. ) and FIG. 78(f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1. In order to facilitate understanding, the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are omitted in FIGS. 78(b), 78(d) and 78(f).

As a method for assembling the right disc cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second long hole 7432 is made shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, thereby preventing the engaging portion 7630 from being erroneously inserted into the second long hole 7432. can be prevented. Therefore, erroneous assembly can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second long hole 7432, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the depth direction of FIG. Moving.

At this position after the movement, the fixing projection 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 suppresses positional deviation of the disk member 7344R1 in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 78(d)) and engages. The member 7344R3 can be held immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

In addition, the engaging member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433 . This will be explained. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is forced to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 in the vertical direction is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved to the second position by elastic recovery force. It enters inside the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(d)).

When the tip of the return portion 7433 is in contact with the extension portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in the state of entering the second long hole 7432, the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large). direction) (see FIG. 78(d)), movement of the extended portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction, thereby preventing the engaging member 7344R3 from being displaced during operation.

After the engagement member 7344R3 is held by the disc member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1 while the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward of the disc member 7344R1. do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 causes the engaging portion 7630 to move along the radially outward direction D7. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disk member 7344R1.

Through the steps described above, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. The right disc cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates backward will be described. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 7300 taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b), and 81, the releasing member 7346, the rotating pawl member 7347 and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and the other Illustration of unnecessary parts is omitted.

The rotary pawl member 7347 in this embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment in the length of the guide elongated hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the protruding pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes through.

The releasing member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the upper rear portion of the main body portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80(a)) is obliquely shaved in order to minimize interference with the engaging rib 344c.

79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 show how the disk cam 7344 rotates backward (clockwise direction in Fig. 79(a)). are shown in chronological order.

FIG. 79(a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts against the releasing member 7346 and the releasing member 7346 begins to rotate. ), and FIG. 80(a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 has been pushed into the disc member 7344R1 to the end, and M6-2. 80(b) shows a state in which the disk member 7344R1 has further rotated backward from the state shown in FIG. 80(a), and FIG. 81 shows the state shown in FIG. The state after the 7344R rotates backward and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is illustrated. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a) and 80(b), the state ( small angle state) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), immediately after the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 start contacting each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set larger than that of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and is maintained in an outwardly projecting state.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 abuts against the outermost diameter side surface of the engaging member 7344R3, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in a small angle state. be done.

In this embodiment, the release member 7346 rotates forward, and the rotation pawl member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form a small angle state. The disc cam 7344 is moved in such a positional relationship that the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the releasing member 346 while the inner peripheral surface is in contact with the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c. are placed (see FIG. 80(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344, and when the release member 7346 becomes unable to rotate further (small angle state), the release member A load is applied from 7346 to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 radially inward of the disc cam 7344 .

As shown in FIG. 79(b), in a state where the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, the backward rotation cannot be continued. , the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through-hole 7521 .

Therefore, since the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. Also, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its posture.

Due to this shift in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from the originally arranged one equally divided recessed portion 7522 to the different equally divided recessed portion 7522, so that the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 , and rotates relative to each other by one concave portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R rotates further, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward. , and the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, the equally divided concave portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted by one.

79(a) to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged in the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into recessed portions 7522. can be relatively displaced by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portions.

The operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 82(a), 82(b), 83(a) and 83(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 7300 taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 82, the releasing member 7346, the rotary pawl member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and the illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b) show how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)) in chronological order. FIG. 82(a) shows the state immediately before the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R abut against each other, and FIG. 82(b) shows that the engaging member 7344R3 FIG. 83(a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 82(b), and FIG. (b) shows the state after the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R are separated from each other.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary pawl member 7347 rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise rotation in FIG. 82(a)). direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation pawl member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation pawl member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction due to the elastic force of the first spring SP1. will only be available.

Therefore, a load that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 radially inward does not occur, and the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially outward from the contact of the engaging member 7344R3 to the releasing member 7346 until it is separated from the releasing member 7346. maintain the protruding state. Therefore, when rotating the disk cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

By switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the direction of rotation in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilt width, as in the first embodiment. Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81) that causes relative rotation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the direction of rotation of the disc member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disc member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is the direction opposite to the direction of releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 7347 (the direction in which the fixation is not released). Since they match, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be rotated relative to each other while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

As a result, a state in which the player does not pay attention (a state in which the tilting device 310 stops) is used as a state for changing the relative posture between the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place invisible to the player. be able to.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of modes for raising the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of manipulation device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 can be immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 85 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a displaceable phase relationship, and in FIG. 84 and 85, the state in which the equally divided concave portion 7522 is rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by one portion is illustrated, and in both FIGS. A contact state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2) by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state. You can change the range of movement.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. Moves until it is sunk below the 2nd state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the position to which the tilting device 310 reaches immediately (without rotation of the disk cam 7344) can be changed from the first state by the upward movement. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of presentations by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operation device 7300 as a presentation device.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment has a covering cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the front side of the paper surface is the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. Also, the definition of this direction is the same in the description referring to the drawings before FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11, FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployment) in which the back pack 92 is opened from the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened from the outer frame 11, and FIG. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed). FIG. 90 shows the pachinko machine 8010 with the front frame 14 removed. It is a front view of. Note that, in FIG. 90, the reference numerals for the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for the sake of convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed in the shape of a frame whose upper and lower sides are made of wooden plates and whose left and right sides are made of aluminum plates and whose four sides are fixed. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 etc.) and the locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is good also as a structure with which the member which has is equipped with the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12. In a front view, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side. (opening/closing front end side) is rotatable forward.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, with the left side as the base end of rotation (opening/closing base end) and the right side as viewed from the front. It is rotatable rearward as the moving tip side (opening/closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. , the front frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 12 so that the front frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010 as shown in FIG. By doing so, they are canceled respectively.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 . As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14. The front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a columnar portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft) are provided as shown in FIG. The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the metal plate having a hole with the inner frame 12 .

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a pivot plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) provided with a fitting size. In addition, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape projecting upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which columns with different diameters are connected vertically, the diameter of the upper column It is axially supported by being externally fitted on a support pin 19a having a shape with a small diameter.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12 . The front frame 14 includes a body frame 14a formed of a metal plate in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (electrical decoration parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front and rear sides of the body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 86). Since the window portion 14c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12. - 特許庁Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than the window portion 14c and having transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) that integrates the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. and have. The fixed frame is made of synthetic resin and formed into an annular shape that is one size larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame, whereby the glass unit 16 is integrated with double glazing. It is

Although the glass unit 16 is made of transparent glass 16a and 16b and is transparent and colorless, it is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin and transparent and colorless. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed in a colored transparent form instead of a colorless transparent form.

Around the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of decorative portions 8029 to 8033 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided. These illumination parts 8029 to 8033 light up or flash in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, the illumination section 8030 on the upper side of the window section 14c incorporates a light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of balls to be paid out and a light emitting means that lights up during prize ball payout are built in.

Further, speaker covers 27 (thin plate members made of punching metal) are provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover the speaker assemblies 450 that output sound effects according to the game state. . Below the window 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, an upper tray 17 and a lower tray 50 are arranged so as to protrude forward and are vertically arranged side by side.

The upper tray 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball shooting unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 50 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17 . A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower tray 50 is formed in the rear side surface of the lower tray 50 .

It should be noted that there is no need to separate the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 and provide a plurality of portions for storing game balls, and the lower tray 50 is eliminated and only the upper tray 17 is provided, and only one storage section is provided. Also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper tray 17 (game ball storage area). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided at a different location such as the periphery of the lower tray 50 other than the upper tray 17, or may be provided at a plurality of locations. Alternatively, a configuration in which information can be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor may be used.

A passage forming unit 140 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14 as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 140 is molded of synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper tray passage portion 141 leading to the upper tray 17, a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 leading to the lower tray 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( See FIG. 92).

A put-out ball receptacle 143 that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14). A passage entrance of the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 are formed by partitioning the passage 143 to the left and right by a partition wall 144 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a into the lower tray 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 that opens upward. A foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 is discharged to the lower tray 50 after flowing down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92). It should be noted that the foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50 so that the foul ball is discharged to the upper plate 17 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 merges with a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which an unfired ball flowing down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. is formed as

On the rear side of the front frame 14, multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper portion, are attached to protrude toward the rear side. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring connector for conducting electricity to the electrical decoration part 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, an internal substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14, and one end An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is connected is arranged, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 .

In the portion covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 of the front frame 14, there are a wiring groove 14h communicating toward the left and right electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032, and an electric decoration part 8031, 8031, and 8031 through the wiring groove 14h. An electronic board 14i is formed (see FIG. 103) to which the wiring drawn out from the 8032 is connected, and the terminal of each wiring is pulled out rearward through the wiring through groove 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the rear side. be

Therefore, when the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 89). A connector of conductive wiring and a connector of which one end is connected to the inner substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted into and removed from the electronic substrate 14i.

A pair of multifunctional cover members 171 attached to the front end of the front frame 14 are arranged on the upper and lower sides of the inner frame 12, and a board support device 600 ( FIG. 126) is opposed to the upper device in the front and rear direction, and can abut against each other depending on the situation, the details of which will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member made of a resin material and having an open front side is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates the wiring is attached from the rear side. The long cover member 173 is configured such that its cross-sectional area decreases as it moves from the rotation distal end side of the front frame 14 to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a that forms the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring is An upper wall portion 173b that is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, is arranged above the lower wall portion 173a so as to face the lower wall portion 173a, and constitutes the upper side of the space that accommodates the wiring. Consists of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged to contact the front frame 14 in the same manner as the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upwardly extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion of the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b protrudes in a semicircular shape toward the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14. , a space that can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction is secured from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. Protruded proximally. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the positional change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there are an upwardly extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (the portion closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14a that is the front frame. An inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178 that is formed of a resin material and that opens downward is provided between the vertically elongated plate portion on the rotation base end side of 14 .

The reverse cup part 178 is, for example, a part that countermeasures against fraudulent acts such as illegally spreading the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, and entering the game area. is. That is, even if the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the movement of the piano wire can be hindered, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are made of a resin material, it is possible to take measures against cheating by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is inserted and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the heat melts the reverse cup portion 178 and allows the long cover member to pass through the reverse cup portion 178. 173 can also be melted. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring housed in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out. , can make fraud easier to detect.

In particular, in this embodiment, the wall portion 178a of the reverse cup portion 178 on the side of the long cover 173 has a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173 and abuts (approaches) to each other. In addition, since the normal line of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the long cover 173 can also be melted with a high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts.

The wall portion 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the horizontal direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forced into the rotation base end of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire reaches the wall portion. 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a. It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire travels in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 (progresses in the left-right direction). can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who cheats via the piano wire from increasing. By arranging a detection device for detecting the entrance of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity before the fraudulent person escapes, making it easier to secure the fraudulent person. .

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits fraud cannot distinguish it, so he/she will believe that the piano wire is on its way to the game area. . Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the window part 14c), the action of inserting the piano wire further deeply is naturally given to the person who cheats (the piano wire (without raising suspicion that the plug-in is not working). Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for a person who commits a fraudulent act to realize that the fraudulent act has been discovered and to plan an escape.

The detection device may be a photocoupler device, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK or may be arranged on the rear side portion of the operation handle 51 . In the case where it is arranged on the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally arranged on the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine whether the piano wire has entered.

The ball shooting unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 90, this ball shooting unit 112a has an electromagnetic shooting solenoid 701 provided as a shooting device, and a game ball shot by the shooting solenoid 701 is disposed between an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A shooting rail 730 for guiding a game ball so as to be shot toward an area in between and a ball feeding device 720 are provided.

The ball feeding device 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) onto the launch rail 730 one by one. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as the hitting portion in the shooting solenoid 701 . By inputting an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the firing rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball shooting unit 112a is not limited to the shooting solenoid 701, and a shooting motor or the like may be used. A detailed configuration of the ball shooting unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. is set. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through-hole extending in the front-rear direction through the portion where the disc passage forming member 160 is provided. Fixed.

The plate passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and a main body side lower plate passage portion 162, as shown in FIG. One end of the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is opened toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with a through hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage is formed in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction) so that the end of the tube is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end, and is discharged from the other end. be.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the dispensed ball receptacle 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided on the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the disc passage forming member 160 . A front door side upper tray passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 , and a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 .

As shown in FIG. 90, a shutter 163 is provided on the lower side of the plate passage forming member 160 to restrict the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162. . The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position for narrowing the exit portions of both passages to block outflow of the game balls and a permitting position for permitting the outflow of the game balls.

A biasing member (such as a coil spring) is attached to the inner frame 12 to bias the shutter 163 toward the blocking position. It is configured such that the shutter 163 stays at the blocking position by force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state in which game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 or the main body side lower tray passage portion 162, the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out is avoided. there is

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is pressed against the biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the put-out ball socket portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 and the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicate with each other, so that the game balls flow down. Permissible.

The substrate 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is formed by separate substrates for the portions where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the portion where the connector CN3 is arranged. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main controller 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp controller 113, and the objects of transmission are different. By doing so, it is intended to prevent malfunction in advance.

The portion below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are shown exploded, and FIG. 92 is a window portion of the front frame 14. 14c is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are shown exploded. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the body frame 14c, is the front side of the upper tray 17 and obliquely above the lower tray 50 to the right. An operation device 300 is provided at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and a covering cover 370 is provided on the front side of the operation device 300 .

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and has a lateral width that is approximately the same as the lateral width of the front frame 14 . That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the electrical decoration portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right ends thereof, and has a body curved portion 371 configured in a curved shape in which the left and right central portions protrude toward the front side. Extending downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left-right central portion and the left-right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side adjacent to each other in the width direction, they merge at the extending lower end and are viewed from front V. A hanging portion 372 configured in a letter shape and a plate-like member that closes an opening surrounded by the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372, and is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is made of a main body curved portion 371 or the hanging portion 372. a left plane support portion 374 formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371; and a flat surface formed on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371. and a support groove 376 which is recessed from the back side of the right side planar support portion 375 and whose recessed width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back side. Prepare for.

The main body curved portion 371 has a rounded front edge, and a rear edge that matches the front edge of the upper plate 17. When the upper plate is assembled (see FIG. 86), the main body curved portion 371 has a curved shape. 17 in the front-rear direction, and the front-side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300 connected to the rear left edge 371a. A back middle edge portion 371b abuts against the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and the back middle edge portion 371b is connected to the back left edge portion 371a on the opposite side of the back left edge portion 371a. It mainly includes a rear right edge portion 371c that abuts on the ball rental operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The drooping portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the curved portion 371 of the main body, and is located between the right corner cover 380 which is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported and which is arranged at the right corner of the front frame 14 . It is a portion that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by forming a shape that does not create a gap (a shape that matches the contact position with the right corner cover 380). The drooping portion 372 is positioned on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later, by screwing a screw that is inserted from below into the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed. It is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate to be formed.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion that allows the light emitted from the operation device 300 to pass through to the front side, and is a portion that can perform an effect with the light, and is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. It is arranged close to the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED devices is an arbitrary matter, and in this embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, there are six LEDs that emit light upward (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e), and two LEDs that emit light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e). , respectively.

The light emitted from the LED device 341f that emits light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. FIG. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 before being transmitted. Pass through part 373 .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the translucent portion 373 is compared to when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Thus, it is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while making it unnecessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), the tilting device 310 can be adjusted according to the state change of the tilting device 310 . An effect of changing the amount of light visible through the translucent portion 373 can be performed.

As another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward in accordance with a change in the state of the tilting device 310 . For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is strongly changed (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 changes to the first state (see FIG. 22). The amount of light is controlled to be weaker (stepwise) in accordance with the change from the state 1 to the second state, so that the light visible through the translucent portion 373 accompanying the change in the state of the tilting device 310 is reduced. It is possible to reduce the degree of change in the amount of light in (can be eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8031 and the electrical decoration portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support portion 374 toward the electrical decoration portion 8031. . As a result, it is possible to suppress downward positional displacement of the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The right plane support portion 375 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8032 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side plane support portion 375 toward the electrical decoration portion 8032. . As a result, it is possible to suppress downward positional displacement of the electrical decoration part 8032 .

Although the details will be described later, the electrical decoration portions 8031 and 8032 are in contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the electrical decoration portions 8031 and 8032 are separated from each other. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400 . Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide area by the electrical decoration part 8031, the electrical decoration part 8032, and the covering cover 370 fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a. The force required to prop up the unit 400 can be widely distributed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end portion of the electrical decoration portion 8032 entering from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electrical decoration part 8032 is in a state of being inserted to the deepest part of the support groove 376. In this state, the front lower corner end of the electrical decoration part 8032 and the front side end of the right plane support part 375 are aligned. matches the position of

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 by the engaging relationship described later, the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 can be respectively fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a to form an assembled state. A separate fixing part for fastening the covering cover 370 and the electrical decoration part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is attached to the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17 The passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a on the back side of the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member that constitutes the upper plate 17), and the metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 covers the passage forming unit 140 from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or another member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (a member constituting the upper plate 17, etc.) sandwiches the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated through the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire or piano wire whose tip is heated is pressed and melted), the front frame is It functions as an entry prevention member that prevents entry from the front side of 14 to the inner frame 12 side. That is, even if a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 made of metal, it will not penetrate, and the wire can be prevented from entering the rear side of the front frame 14 . .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side in the front view, and the opened front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 to be fitted to 140 and a flat plate-like plate portion 152 covering the back surface of the lower side portions of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball extraction passage 147 .

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the upper, lower, right and left sides, the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion The illustrated wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140 not only when the passage forming unit 140 penetrates the lower end of the wire 145 in the front-back direction, but also when it penetrates in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. can be prevented.

Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the rear surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when a wire exemplified by the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 to form a through hole, Even so, it is possible to prevent an illegal member from entering the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 . In a case where such a situation occurs, for example, the operation device 300 is removed, and the exemplified wire is pressed against a portion (a portion obliquely upward to the rear of the recessed portion 15a) where the front and rear thickness is reduced accordingly. A case is exemplified in which a through-hole is opened by being pressed, and the exemplified wire enters.

Further, the front frame 14 is provided with an operating portion back member 155 fastened from the back side to the left end of the passage forming unit 140, and the operating portion back member 155 is arranged with the cylinder lock 20 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position where it is located.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation section back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly from the outer edge of a plate member elongated in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction. A through hole 156 is drilled in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can pass therethrough, and screws are drilled above and below the through hole 156 to fasten and fix the operation unit back member 155 to the body frame 14a. a pair of insertion holes 157 for connection, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 vertically aligned in a portion (left end) overlapping the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation proximal end from the through hole 156. and an opening/closing regulating portion 159 protruding toward the rear side on the side.

The connection insertion hole 158 is arranged so as to match the connection portion 148 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 has a columnar shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting through-hole 158 at a position that coincides with the upper connecting through-hole 158 in the front-to-rear direction. and a threaded portion 148b drilled as a hole into which a screw inserted through the connecting insertion hole 158 can be screwed at a position matching the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Prepare the Lord.

With this configuration, when the operating portion back member 155 is placed on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operating portion back surface are connected by passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158 on the upper side. After aligning with the member 155, the operation portion back surface member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140 by screwing the screw through the lower connection insertion hole 158 into the screw portion 148b. be able to.

An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155, in which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed, and the lower edge at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the rear side so as to partition the area. 148c is formed in an L-shape capable of coming into face contact with wall portion 158a in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

Therefore, when assembling the operation section back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, the projection 148a is passed through the connection insertion hole 158, and the wall 158a is positioned vertically with respect to the extension wall 148c. The position and posture of the operation section back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be adjusted quickly and easily by the lateral contact.

The opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that faces front and rear of the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and will be described later in detail. This has the effect of regulating the closing of the front frame 14 by coming into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13 under predetermined conditions.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion extending toward the back side of the operation portion back member 155 and made of synthetic resin. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and compared to the case where it is extended in a block shape that fills the U-shaped opening, the required amount of material is required while ensuring rigidity. can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of the other portions of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength can be relied on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion is formed as thin as possible). The strength of the open/close restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving moldability by forming the opening/closing restricting portion 159 with a plate thickness).

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not limited to the U-shape as long as it is a shape that ensures rigidity and maintains the shape. For example, instead of a flat cross section, a curved (wavy) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wave cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used.

Further, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear surface member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the rear side, or is attached to the rear side from a separate member fixed to the rear side of the main body frame 14a. You may comprise from a metal part extended to. However, in the case where the open/close restricting portion 159 is made of synthetic resin as in the present embodiment, the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90), which is formed of a metal member, may Chipping or denting can be prevented. As a result, a worker who changes the state of the board surface supporting device 600 to attach and detach the game board 13 can be less likely to be injured by touching the cracks or dents formed in the board surface supporting device 600.例文帳に追加

Here, since the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is arranged closer to the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock arranged further toward the rotation distal end side is arranged. A long interval can be secured between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, in a state in which the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is in contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged at the leading end of the rotation are locked by mistake. can.

As a route through which a foreign object such as a wire enters, for example, a route passing through a gap in the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely separable from the main body frame 14a toward the front side. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the rear surface of the main body frame 14a even if the operation device 300 is traced through the gap.

A harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying power to the operation device 300 is inserted through a wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) drilled in the front-rear direction of the body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like can reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 having a substantially case shape. Therefore, foreign matter such as wires can be easily prevented from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

It should be noted that the foreign matter entering the operation device 300 may be liquid. For example, a player who feels bad about the result of a game may pour drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10 . At that time, the operation device 300 in a convenient position is likely to fall prey to being splashed with drinking water. There is a risk of

Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic substrate or the like. Since the operation device 300 is separably independent, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water poured on the operation device 300 from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

A concave portion 15a is formed in a T-shape when viewed from above on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300). The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep recessed portion. It does not have a perfect case shape, and gaps are formed here and there (for example, see FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the gaps). The concave portion 15a serves to temporarily store the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, so the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)) and is connected to wiring. 17(b) and 18), the drive motor 342 is exposed to liquid such as drinking water. It is possible to prevent it from being directly applied and broken down.

Also, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, it may be exposed to liquid such as drinking water. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows down the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from breaking down.

With the above-described configuration, even if a liquid such as drinking water is splashed on the player on his way home, the next player can continue playing normally by simply wiping off the touched portion of the upper surface of the operation device 300. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from putting pressure on the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. 93 to 96 illustrate a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14, as in FIG.

93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member 180 are shown side by side. be. In FIG. 93(b), the movable binding member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the movable binding member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 extended leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

In the present embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are connected to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the binding movable member 180 respectively.

On the other hand, the harnesses connected to the electrical decorations 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) are once connected to the relay board arranged in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. , a bundle of extension harnesses HN3 is directed from the relay board to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported, and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arm portions 183 extending from the opposite side surface) and the other side surface in the rotation direction of the movable arm portion 182 (the side opposite to the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a) At a position (intermediate position) between a pair of locking portions 184, which are U-shaped portions in top view and can lock the binding arm portions 183, and the pair of binding arm portions 183 A temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and having an opening is mainly provided.

In the binding movable member 180 , the binding arm portion 183 is formed with high flexibility, while the other portions are formed at least with lower flexibility (higher rigidity) than the binding arm portion 183 .

The body portion 181 includes a fixed portion 181a having a substantially horseshoe-shaped cross section and a central through-hole through which a screw is inserted, and projecting from the left and right lower corners of the fixed portion 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of detent protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate stop portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front side end portion of the fixed portion 181a, and the extending tip thereof curving close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d (see FIG. 96(a)) extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a, and a portion disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d. and a cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed of a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, which is composed of through holes arranged in the same arrangement as the fixed portion 181a and the pair of anti-rotation portions 181b.

When the screws passing through the fixed portion 181a are fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening holes of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. As a result, the binding movable member 180 can be prevented from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a during fastening, and the posture of the binding movable member 180 with respect to the plate member 14d can be determined.

The intermediate stopper 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between them and the plate member 14d. In the present embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extension end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented from slipping downward, and the center of the harnesses can be positioned on the plate member 14d side. The curved shape along the arranged circle secures a large cross-sectional area for the area (the area sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 181c) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

The support plate portion 181d forms a flat surface that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e fits inside the portion on the base end side of the movable arm portion 182 to hold the movable arm portion 182 in place. Pivot (see Figure 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a proximal end that is smoothly connected to a plane OS1 that is offset from the axial support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with a portion that is externally and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a proximal end. 182a and an elongated thin plate portion 182b provided continuously on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the pivotal support position.

The base end portion 182a includes the left and right ends (the portion where the straight line connecting to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end (the portion closest to the plane OS1) of the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion that is fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Extending from each of the adjacent portions are rotational sidewalls. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of curvature radii are arranged on the same side. equal to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on the situation. .

Since a pair of binding arm portions 183 are configured to have the same shape, one will be described and the description of the other will be omitted. The binding arm portion 183 has a small width portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion with a width equivalent to the width of the root, and a large width portion 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a alternately at regular intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183 by forming the thickened portion on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)).

The engaging portion 184 is formed in a large opening 184a formed on the side of the movable arm portion 182 and on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 across the large opening 184a, and has an opening width larger than that of the large opening 184a. and a small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized to allow the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. , and the large-width portion 183b are of such a size that they cannot be passed through (locked).

According to this embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is to be moved relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the side of the large opening 184a (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). When the binding arm portion 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging it on the side of the small opening 184b. can be adjusted.

The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm portion 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

A movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94(b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94(a). FIG. 95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95(b) is the front frame along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG.

94(a) and 94(b) show a state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95(a) and 95 ( In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with the vertically elongated metal portion constituting the left portion of the body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees about an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis pointing in the vertical direction). Considering the situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are installed in the amusement arcade (a situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are arranged side by side and are rotated by 90 degrees or more, there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010), this angle is normally used. It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 cannot be elastically deformed and cannot be rotated relative to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no movable arm portion 182, it is possible to reduce the risk of the movable arm portion 182 deteriorating and breaking due to elastic deformation.

Next, the manner in which the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, it is possible to prevent, for example, accidental pinching between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and disconnection.

FIG. 96(a) is a schematic rear view of the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a). FIG. 96(c) is a schematic rear view of the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c).

96(a) and 96(b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96(c) and 96(d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is located at a position moved from the opening opened leftward in the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. be. That is, since the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened toward the left at the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c are on the same horizontal line, the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is extended from the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm portion 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c. . . . HN3 can be shaped along the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the binding movable member 180 . As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96(b) and 96(d), the bending portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are curved, and extreme bending deformation can be prevented.

Further, by arranging the engaging portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, especially when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. As a result, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

97(a) and 97(b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, which schematically illustrate the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. be. 97(a) shows one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIG. 97(b) shows the other limit state of the movable binding member 180. As shown in FIG.

97(a) and 97(b) show the rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86), and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are shown schematically. The imaginary lines schematically show the members fixed to the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported at the rotation center point P57, respectively. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14. Similarly to the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates about the rotation center point P57 with respect to the inner frame 12. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97(b), the proximal end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates around the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, thereby moving the internal Since it corresponds to the opening and closing of the frame 12 and the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (Fig. 96 ( b), see also FIG. 96(d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are connected to the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of whether the front frame 14 is opened or closed with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed along a route that passes near the vertically elongated metal portion (the portion with which the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 abuts in FIG. 96(d)) that constitutes the left portion of the frame 14a. That is, by forcibly detouring the harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the front end of the front frame .

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work performed by the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 fit ( 96(b) and 97(a)).

In this embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). The harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178. For example, the tip of a wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup portion 178. , it is possible to take countermeasures against a fraudulent act of inserting a wire between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12. - 特許庁

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted, penetrates the wire, and advances toward the game area, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature rises. The tips of the heated wires are pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate fixing portion 181c. As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out and rendered non-conductive.

By controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, fraud can be quickly discovered. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from gaining fraudulent profits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN1 is burned out, the ball can be shot even if the operating handle 51 is rotated. Gone. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period until the fraudulent act is discovered after the fraudulent act is committed (the fraudulent act can be detected early).

In this case, after inserting a wire into the game area and tampering with the game area (for example, after bending a nail to make it easier to illegally win a prize), the ball is inserted into the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. Since it is possible to make it impossible to shoot balls to a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent an illegal profit from being given. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Also, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burned out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) and the return button 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Therefore, a person who commits fraud may not be able to collect the bills or balls for the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his/her own fraud. Therefore, it can act as a deterrent against fraud.

Furthermore, in order to eliminate the risk of being unable to collect bills and balls for the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending unit) Unit) is 0 yen, but the player commits the fraudulent act without leaving the seat, so the gaming machine store can easily notice the fraudulent act.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is cut off, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is output, and the disconnection error (CR error) is confirmed at the game machine shop. Thus, the possibility of fraud can be easily grasped.

98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. FIG. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98 , the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145 . In this embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 in the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145 is partitioned by a partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining area on the right side of the ball guide opening 53 (an area about 1/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53).

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the ball can flow down toward the lower tray 50. , S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 whose extension directions are directed (switched) to the left and right sides at least once each are provided.

Due to the S-shaped path SL1, it is possible to increase the flow path length of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the liquid stays inside the front door side lower tray passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower tray 50 while securing a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86). The large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the lower tray 50 (and its upstream side) reduces the stress of ball replenishment given to the player (when the balls for 50 minutes of the lower tray run out, the balls are removed from the senryo box). It is possible to configure the pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing the stress caused by being requested to replenish.

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are respectively provided with bend regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions in which the extension direction is bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common. Features That is, the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEa1 formed upstream of the first bending region NEa1 and having a characteristic portion thereof reversed left and right. and an area NEa2.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending region NEb2 arranged on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 by reversing the right and left of the characteristic portion. , provided. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and descriptions of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, the side wall Na and the side wall Na disposed on the side opposite to the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. , a ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner that intersects the extending direction of the side wall Na; Each of the walls Na, Nb, and Nc extends from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by curving a surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a spherical guide surface. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as a wire or piano wire). It functions as a surface to support the surface, and the details will be described later. The adjacent wall Nc is set such that the gap Nin between the lower end of the extension and the side wall Na is larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the improperly inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an entry route for the illegally inserted wire HM, there is a possible route that advances upstream of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 from the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance. A person who commits fraud pushes the wire HM against the side wall of the front-door-side lower tray passage portion 142 while proceeding.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a person who commits fraud, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances rightward due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, so that it is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 with their left and right reversed, the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without exception.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the advancing route of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is indicated by a black circle, and the advancing direction of the wire HM at that time is indicated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM entering the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (caught) at this point, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from advancing any further, to prevent the wire HM from being held, and to quickly discover the fraudulent act. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not caught and continues to advance, if the wire HM protrudes from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM protrudes downward. Even so, the tip of the wire HM travels downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 or the game area arranged on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146 .

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) to cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an illegal payout ball, or causing the wire HM to reach the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). It is possible to prevent a person who commits a fraudulent act from gaining a fraudulent profit by forcibly opening a movable device such as a player and making it easier to fraudulently win a prize.

Returning to FIG. 98, description will be made. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE where the ball extraction passage 147 merges is about twice the diameter of the ball (twice or more in this embodiment). As a result, when the balls flowing down the ball removal passage 147 are arranged in the confluence area CE, the balls flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enter the confluence passage CE (the balls enter the confluence area CE at the same time). , even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility of the balls being caught between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other can be extremely reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being hindered from flowing down in the portion downstream from the confluence area CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a that is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage forming unit 140 protrudes toward the front side as the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 goes downward.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of is positioned flush with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set such that the front-to-rear width of the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a is larger than that of the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In this embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 downstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly larger than the diameter of the ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-to-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 upstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when balls stay in the foul ball passage portion 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged with their positions shifted forward and backward in the upstream of the passage portion 145, so that the number of balls that can stay can be increased. Since the centers of the balls are prevented from lining up in the front-rear direction (they are slightly shifted in the left, right, up and down directions), it is possible to prevent two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, it is possible to restrict the balls from entering the passage portion 145a one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, the foul balls can be prevented from reaching the confluence area CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other.

The foul ball receptacle 146 extends from the bottom plate on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 toward the front side, and the left end is connected to the left side wall, and the flow-down surface of the ball faces rightward. from the inclined plate portion 146a that is inclined downward as far as the inclination plate portion 146a, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c that extends in a plate shape toward the back side and curves in such a manner that the direction in which the guide plate extends toward the back side is directed upward.

While the ball is guided toward the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the blocking portion 146b moves the foul ball socket portion 146 to the front side. The passing position of the ball passing through can be shifted to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146 . That is, the ball that rolls down the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow rightward, and the block portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball socket portion 146. can be done.

As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be finished before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage part in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the sphere can flow down smoothly.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball) in the range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a). A tool can be prevented from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145 .

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 100 and 101 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 that constitute the electrical decoration portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit elongated in the left and right direction, and the left and right ends of the upper panel unit 400 are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032 . In this support structure, at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side. (see FIG. 118) are formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right hooks forming the supported groove 417. As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 can be connected and fixed to each other by fastening and fixing to the body frame 14a, respectively, without the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. FIG. The shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400 defines the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are fitted with left and right hooks forming the supported groove 417. Due to the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, it is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being left and right separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are connected to the main body frame. 14a is shown disassembled.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between itself and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101). A cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

The fastening portion 14e1 has a through-hole through which a screw is inserted from the rear side thereof, and the screw passing through the through-hole is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, whereby the upper frame is This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. Note that FIG. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a by screws inserted from the rear side into insertion holes drilled in the body frame 14a, is disassembled from the body frame 14a. The illustration of the upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 is omitted, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As for the actual assembly procedure, the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Also, the right panel unit 500 has a right side wall forming the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510, and FIG. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left stacking unit 500L and a right stacking unit 500R that are stacked in the left-right direction. 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws inserted through the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side. It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted toward the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed to have an L-shaped cross section by extending a plate-like extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side, and is assembled. In (see FIG. 86), a fixed plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extension portion 511a abuts against the outer surface of the body frame 14a, and a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511. a plurality of cover-side through holes 513 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512; a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512; and a pin support hole 515 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens-side through hole 514 .

The fixing plate 511 has a base portion 511b that overlaps the substrate member 512 when viewed from the front, and the portion on the side of the substrate member 512 protrudes toward the front side in a pedestal shape. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 .

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the platform 511b can abut against the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction (see FIG. 115(b)). collapse can be suppressed. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixing plate 511, the extending portion 511a is displaced to the right by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 relative to the base portion 511b. While the outer cover member 560 abuts against the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, the left side surface of the fixing plate 511 is formed up to the rear side end as a surface that is substantially at the same plane as the side surface of the base portion 511b. The back-side end of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the back-side end of the support plate portion 510, and in the assembled state (see FIG. abuts on the left side surface 511c of the .

The substrate member 512 is an electronic substrate (printed substrate) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a row curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in this embodiment) between adjacent LEDs 512a. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other. Illuminate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the side of the LED 512a is longer than the width of the LED 512a (the lateral width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a passes through the light guide member without leakage. The light enters 540 and exits from one of the surfaces of the light guide member 540. The entry and exit of light and its path will be described later.

The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and through which the screw fastened to the back fastening portion 527 is inserted from the back side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening screws to the back fastening portion 527 .

The lens-side through-hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 556 provided on the outer lens member 550 and through which the screw fastened to the back fastening portion 556 is inserted from the back side. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening screws to the back fastening portion 556 .

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the projecting portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The pin support hole 515 has a horizontal width slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566 and a vertical width approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566 . Therefore, while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined, the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed can be improved.

That is, in a fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut against the support plate portion 510 from the front side, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (projecting portion 566 ), the projecting portion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 . Accordingly, by inserting the protruding portion 566 into the pin support hole 515 and then moving the heavy plate units 500L and 500R up and down with respect to the support plate portion 510 by the amount corresponding to the positional displacement, the positional displacement is eliminated and fastening is facilitated. Fixation can be performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left stacking unit 500L includes an inner cover member 520 that constitutes the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86) and is made of a non-transmissive resin material. and an inner lens member 530 fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and made of a transparent colorless resin material.

The right stacking unit 500R faces the light guide member 540 arranged to face the left stacking unit 500L in the left-right direction, and the front side end is arranged to face the light guide member 540 in the front-rear direction. An outer lens member 550 made of a transparent white resin material, and a light guide member 540 and the outer lens member 550 arranged on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and made of a resin material that does not transmit light. and an outer cover member 560 that is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. FIG. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side. is shown exploded.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 522 disposed on the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560 . , a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560; a plurality of openings 524 opened in the body plate portion 521; A plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions that are attached and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed; A plurality of long fastening portions 526, which are cylindrical portions inserted through and into which screws for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and a plurality of long fastening portions 526 that protrude from the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and are viewed from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear fastening portions 527 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

The main body plate portion 521 has a wave-shaped front end portion 521a, and a connection plate portion 521c that connects the front end portion 521a and the back-side base portion 521b at the short width portion of the wave shape (portion closer to the back side). Prepare.

The back-side base portion 521b has an inner side surface 521b1 that comes into face contact (matches in shape) with the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion that is arranged in an attitude that inclines leftward toward the rear side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at even intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged such that the intervals increase in order from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 can be made different, and the presentation effect of light can be made different for each opening 524 .

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed. and a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a, which is a cylindrical portion into which screws for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 are screwed, and a fitting groove 523b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by two screws inserted at the upper end and one screw at the lower end.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged in parallel at four upper and lower positions and function as windows for viewing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape portion of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape projecting rightward with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is recessed rightward from the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back-side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the portion where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 protrudes leftward in the design of this embodiment (see FIG. 111). The surface of the back-side base portion 521b is recessed and curved to the right as designed between the boundary portions described above. That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back side of the portion projecting to the design surface side. When the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, the back surface of the design-like protruding portion is, conversely, formed with a recess that tends to become a dead space. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back side of the inner cover member 520 (on the side of the inner lens member 530) can be effectively utilized. Efficiency can be improved.

The front and rear end portions of the inner lens member 530 are formed to follow the shape of the front and rear end portions of the inner cover member 520 . That is, the inner lens member 530 has a front end portion 531a of a main body plate portion 531 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape and has a corrugated shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520. be done.

The front-side end portion 531a forms a curved surface that extends rightward from the front-side edge of the main body plate portion 531, and is perforated in the front-rear direction at the position where the curve forming the wave shape changes to the front-rear direction. and support holes 531b and 531c through which the projecting portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

The support hole 531b is formed in the corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the rear side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened behind the support hole 531b, even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the wave-shaped rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where the light guide member 540 can come into contact is arranged on the rear side thereof. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is reinforced by the inclined rib portion 532, even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531c, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced. be able to.

The main body plate portion 531 has a through hole 531d which is sized to allow the long fastening portion 526 to pass through and is drilled in the horizontal direction at a position between the support holes 531b and 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is formed by a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c. , and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b vertically connecting the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a extend so as to fill the gap between them and the light guide member 540. As shown in FIG. That is, since the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes leftward toward the back side like the inner cover member 520, the left and right widths become longer toward the back side (front side end portion in top view). is a triangular shape with a tip).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 that overhangs leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening portion 524 . The protruding portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the protruding side, which protrudes in a wavy shape and has a wavy curved surface with a shape that scatters light.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has a halftone dot pattern on both left and right sides in which recessed portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right directions are arranged in a grid pattern. A so-called light guide plate is formed. That is, at least part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is redirected in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. be. In addition, the light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is changed from the end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for changing light from a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a) into uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512 a so that the incident light is emitted from the surfaces of the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 .

In this embodiment, as an example, the recessed portion is formed by a thermoplastic mold plate having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of about 1 mm are arranged in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light reaching the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resins used in the present invention are not particularly limited, but those having transparency are preferable, and acrylic resins (methacrylic resins), polycarbonate resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, amorphous polyester resins, amorphous olefin resins, etc. Examples include resins, polystyrene resins, and AS resins (acrylonitrile-styrene copolymer compounds). Among these resins, by using an acrylic resin in particular, it is possible to obtain the light guide member 540 having a high average brightness and a small decrease in brightness distribution.

In this embodiment, the light guide member 540 has a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness between 3 mm and 8 mm, it is possible to efficiently guide the light from the LED 512a, improve shape retention after thermal bending, and obtain practical strength.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 has a corrugated front end portion that is slightly displaced from the front end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 toward the rear side, and has a wavy shape. are also formed from undulating corrugations.

The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. The degree of corrugation is not particularly limited, but the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion is preferably 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of imparting a three-dimensional degree of freedom while maintaining good practical mechanical properties with little distortion after heat bending. .

Although details of the wavy shape undulating to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114), it is positioned leftward at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c. The wavy shape is located rightward (located away from the inner cover member 520) at a position between .

The wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material having the recessed portions, as described above. As the method of thermal bending of the present invention, a metal having a concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (male mold) that are curved while being heated to a heating temperature of 10 to 40°C above the deflection temperature under load of the thermoplastic resin used as the base material. It is made by pressing the substrate into a mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower.

At this time, the heating temperature of the base material is lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40°C or lower and the melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light from the light source is emitted before and after the heat bending process. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and an uneven luminance distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such heating temperature conditions, it is possible to suppress distortion of the light guide plate.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 that constitutes a light guide plate, and screws extending vertically from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted. and a fastening portion 542 that is provided.

The light guide member 540 does not have a portion that penetrates in the left-right direction at positions other than the fastening portion 542 and the concave portion 541 a for retreating from the long fastening portion 526 . That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate without a hole at least inside the projection plane on which the opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, the rendering effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear-side end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear-side end of the inner lens member 530 .

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 which is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 and internally supported. An inner fitting portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and an area surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 protrude to the right so that the outer cover A protruding portion 554 visible through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a main body plate portion 551 protruding from the rear side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the outer lens member 550 follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540 . That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end portion 551a that extends leftward from the front edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forms a curved surface that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a corrugated shape and is arranged slightly shifted to the front side with respect to the front side end of the light guide member 540 . In this embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be spaced equally apart in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. be.

The front-side end portion 551a projects toward the front side at the position where the curve forming the wave shape is switched to the front-rear direction, and is fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). A setting portion 551b is provided.

On the surface of the front end portion 551a opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540, a bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a)) that bulges toward the front side in a semicircular shape in a side view is formed vertically. are formed countless times. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end face of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front side end surface can be made into a band-shaped light emission mode that is continuous in the vertical direction.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a recessed deep portion that is recessed inwardly (inwardly of the surface of the main body plate portion 551 ) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554 . Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560 .

In the right stacking unit 500R, a rear fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing with the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550 and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. FIG. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (it can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or screw arrangement). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be enlarged.

The main body plate portion 551 has a surface facing the light guide member 540 that is curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 and main body plate portion 551 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 114(b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which it faces the main body plate portion 551 . In addition, since the body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 , the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the body plate portion 551 .

Therefore, it is possible to prevent misalignment between the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540, and the light from the LED 512a enters the light guide member 540 with high accuracy. can be made

The outer cover member 560 has a body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end portion of the body plate portion 561. It has a long hole formed in an oval shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and a plurality of screws are inserted from the opposite side. A receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561, and the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a A lower fastened portion 563 formed in an elongated hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the vertical width and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and having a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side, and a main body plate portion 561 at the front side end of the inner cover member 520, a receiving surface capable of receiving the long fastening portion 526, the vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526, and the vertical width A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 are formed in an elongated hole shape with a long width and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the projecting portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is formed. It mainly includes an opening 565 and a plurality of projecting portions 566 projecting from the body plate portion 561 toward the back side.

The upper to-be-fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the lateral width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522 . The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower part to be fastened 563 has a fitting groove 563b recessed in the horizontal width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening part 523 . The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Since the right panel unit 500 contacts the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 vertically (see FIG. 86), the cover 370 protrudes the right panel unit 500 toward the front. The upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the right panel unit 500 that is stably supported. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape into which the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (formed with an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554). Therefore, the access path to the lateral gap between the opening 565 and the projecting portion 554 can be narrowed, so that the illegal act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

A method of assembling the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. FIG. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 113a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a).

112(a) and 112(b) illustrate a state in which the projecting portion 551b is arranged on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. A state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

To assemble the right panel unit 500, the main body plate portion 531 of the left stacking unit 500L and the left end of the front end portion 551a of the right stacking unit 500R are brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112(b)). ), the left stacking unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right stacking unit 500R, and the protrusions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, a configuration is adopted in which the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the projections 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b at the front end of the right panel unit 500. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in this embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are arranged at the front end of the right panel unit (front side of the light guide member 540). can reduce the number of screws that fasten and fix the , thereby reducing the area where light is blocked by the screws. It can be made easy to visually recognize in a strip|belt shape.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, by reducing the number of screws (fastening points) that fasten and fix the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to prevent misleading during fastening. It is possible to reduce the range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged by applying a load to the light member 540 . Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being discontinued and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500 .

When the left plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right plate unit 500R and the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left plate unit 500L and , and the light guide member 540 of the right stacking unit 500R form surfaces that are parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and are in a positional relationship in which the surfaces can contact each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving the left stacking unit 500L in the front-rear direction with respect to the right stacking unit 500R. Assembly of the panel unit 500 can be easily performed.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left layered plate unit 500L and the right layered plate unit 500R are assembled to the support plate portion 510 by fastening and fixing. .

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left plate unit 500L and the right plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing them to the support plate section 510. The second procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the right plate unit 500R. is fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 alone, then the left plate unit 500L is brought closer to the right plate unit 500R, the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left plate unit 500L is placed on the right side. In this method, the plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510 are respectively fastened and fixed. These two procedures can be similarly adopted when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

As described above, since assembly and disassembly can be performed in two ways, the operator who performs maintenance or the like can disassemble or assemble the right panel unit 500 according to which part of the parts needs to be replaced. can be selected, and the working time can be shortened.

It should be noted that, regardless of which procedure is used for disassembly, the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R must be slid in the plane direction to disassemble the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the engagement between the projecting portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b. When the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are to be slid relative to each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate section 510 .

In this way, the configuration in which the projecting portions 551b and 551c are fitted into the support hole 531b is such that the right panel unit 500 is pried open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and the right panel unit is assembled. 500 and is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by tightening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and cheating can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws that are inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are attached to the front surface. By making it difficult to disassemble the left panel unit 500L and the right panel unit 500R unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the right panel unit 500 can be removed from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. can be difficult to disassemble. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500 .

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of light guide member 540 of right panel unit 500 and its effect in presentation will be described. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . 114(a) to 114(c), illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the rear side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is directed to the left and right by the action of the light guide member 540. be redirected. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the light guide member 540 .

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(b)), light is condensed on the concave side, and light is diffused on the convex side. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a curvature radius R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) thereof has a convex shape, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 faces the outer lens member 550. It can be used for production by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode of light production (whether the light is condensed or diffused) performed on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It can be provided, and the production effect can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, but various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the notched concave portion of the light guide member 540 according to regions, or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to regions, it is possible to change the mode of light production on both the left and right sides. .

The light guide member 540 is always concave on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524 , and the radius of curvature of the concave surface changes according to the size of the opening 524 . That is, the curvature radius of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the same as that of the second opening from the top, corresponding to the increase in the vertical width of the openings 524 at the top three locations. The curvature radius R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the curvature radius R1 (R1>R2), and similarly the curvature radius R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is , is shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2>R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of the LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light differs for each opening 524. The amount of light emitted can be varied for each opening 524 . That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light compared to the lower opening 524 .

In addition, the curvature radius R4 at the position corresponding to the lowest opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top is formed to be the same as the curvature radius R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line coming out from the shape is a shape that points slightly upward. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be increased, and the light production can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the openings 524 at the bottom can be directed to the eyes of the player. Can be directed upwards.

As shown in FIG. 114(c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as lengths connecting the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R2 is the vertical width W2, and the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R3. The width of the openings 524 facing each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 facing the portion with the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, among the openings 524, the lower openings 524 are formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portion of the curvature radii R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship of the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitude relationship of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased at locations where the degree of light condensing is weak (for example, a portion with a radius of curvature R1) so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light is condensed. In a portion where the intensity of light is strong (for example, a portion with a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid too much light entering the opening 524 . Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode of each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center point of each radius of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114(b) is a point corresponding to the focal point of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and each vertical width W1 to W4 is arranged at approximately the middle position of

The light guide member 540 is convex leftward in the region KE of the boundary of the opening 524 . Here, the region KE is a strip-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with adjacent openings 524 . That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above it, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the opening 524 adjacent below it. matches the top edge of the . Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 512a to the area KE in the front-rear direction travels while being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114(c)).

In the area KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that even if the light gathering effect is reduced, the light is visible to the player. The difference in the amount of light is small.

On the other hand, by making the area KE convex to the left instead of the flat surface, the light guide member 540 can be formed in a curved shape with no corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. durability can be improved.

In addition, by forming a convex shape on the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side. can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the presentation of light visually recognized through the opening 565 .

That is, depending on whether or not light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a, it is possible to change the light seen through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light seen through the opening 524. .

For example, by turning off the LEDs 512a that make light incident on the area KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a, it is possible to irradiate the insides of the openings 524 and 565 with light without gaps. At this time, the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the area KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from above and below the area KE intersects on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being seen darkly in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and the edge is visually recognized by the player. You can increase the amount of light. Therefore, it is possible to sharpen the light emission mode of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 106).

It should be noted that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524 . In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the region KE, the corresponding portion (the region corresponding to the region KE) of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a strip shape. can be made

The region KE has a shorter front-to-rear width of the right panel unit 500 (a shorter distance from the LED 512a) than the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the area KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The light that reaches the front end portion may be used to produce an effect.

That is, a light effect is prepared that is not visible through the connecting plate portion 521c, but is visible through the front end portion 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500). By setting the degree of expectation for the big hit of the effect to be high, the position of the player's eyes can be moved away from the game board 13 rather than the front end of the right panel unit 500.例文帳に追加As a result, the degree of eyestrain of the player can be reduced, and the player can play games for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is viewed by the player through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106) from the right side. Therefore, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, but the clerk who views the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the cheating player is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the cheating player is prevented from trying to escape. can be prevented.

By reversing the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the area KE may be made visible only to the player and not visible to the store clerk.

115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115(b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 along line CXVb-CXVb of FIG. 115(a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end face (about 5 mm in thickness) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end of the front side of the light guide member 540 (the portion farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the horizontal width dimension is the same gradient over the entire area in the vertical direction. to shrink.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed with the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end surface is increased, the tapered portion is excessively tapered and the width dimension (thickness) is reduced. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched vertically between the portions near the support hole 531b and is arranged in a recessed position toward the rear side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the portion near the support hole 531b Due to the shadow created by , the portion near the support hole 531c is darker than the portion near the support hole 531b and is easily visible.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face of the light guide member 540 at the portion facing the support hole 531c is larger than the end face of the light guide member 540 at the portion facing the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed large, it is possible to ensure a large area of the surface that receives light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visible near the support hole 531c is increased by increasing the amount of light visible near the support hole 531b. It is possible to reduce the degree of darkness due to differences in front-to-rear distance and shadows. As a result, with the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 as the forefront, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform over the vertical direction (the difference in intensity is reduced). )can do.

116 is a partial rear view of right panel unit 500. FIG. 116, illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. In addition, in FIG. 116, an example of the path (advancing direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed due to the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and passes through the inner lens member 530 to be slightly It is diffused and progresses outward.

Conversely, light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as a result of the curving of the light guide member 540 . Therefore, while the arrangement of the LEDs 512a that generate light incident on the light guide member 540 is constant, the light emission modes (sparse and dense, bright and dark) can be made different on both surfaces of the light guide member 540 . In other words, the player can be made to visually recognize the light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

In addition, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is directed toward the player side instead of directly laterally by bending the inner lens member 530 as shown in FIG. 115(b). (See the phantom line arrow in FIG. 115(b). The phantom line arrow in FIG. 115(b) indicates an example of the traveling direction of the light passing through the light guide member 540.). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the lighting effect.

Returning to FIGS. 100 and 101, description will be made. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and has fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. ) and is supported from below, and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14 .

117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 includes an upper frame member 410 fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and a front surface of the upper frame member 410. The electrical decoration unit 401 is arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly 450 is arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. , is mainly provided. 117 and 118, illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side surface is decorated with a model name, etc., and includes a board on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. Light production is performed by emitting light from the enclosed LED.

The illumination unit 401 includes a box-shaped main body 402 made of a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall 403 formed on the rear outer wall of the main body 402, and the wavy wall 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending from the lower edge to the back side in a horizontally long plate shape, and a portion above the plate-like portion 404 that protrudes from the corrugated wall portion 403 to the back side in a cylindrical shape and is inside the cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 405 having a shape penetrating the waved wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted through the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , is mainly provided.

The main body part 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap each other with their open sides, and a space is formed inside. It should be noted that the enclosed LED is arranged on an electronic substrate, and the electronic substrate is fixed to the main body portion 402 .

The wavy wall portion 403 engages with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the mounting position in the left-right direction, thereby facilitating the work of assembling the illumination unit 401 to the upper frame member 410. It is the part that improves the performance.

The plate-like portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the corrugated wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410 , and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 . The front side wall of the upper frame member 410 is recessed with a horizontally long groove that sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 from above and below.

The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through-hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LEDs contained in the body portion 402 are arranged is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to a plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410 . Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 14e and access to the inside is made possible. formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the body frame 14a after the electrical decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

119 is an exploded front perspective view of upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of upper frame member 410. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 fastened and fixed from the rear side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the rear side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. , a left corner support member 430L fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and a left corner support member 430L that is fitted to the main body member 411 from the back side to a position that protrudes from the opening 414 to the front side. and a lens member 440 which is inserted and pressed from the back side by the right corner support member 430R so as to be restrained from coming off to the back side and which constitutes the illumination portion 8033.

The main body member 411 is a member elongated in the left and right direction, in which openings are formed on both left and right sides thereof for passing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and the speaker covers 27 are arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, a wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the tubular portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 is larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. It mainly includes a support through hole 413 penetrating with a slightly larger inner shape, and an opening 414 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electrical decoration unit 401 . This makes it possible to easily perform alignment in the horizontal direction when fitting the illumination unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 .

The tubular portion 405 is inserted through the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). As a result, the wiring projecting through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through-hole 413 to the rear side of the main body member 411 . Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. Thereby, the support through-holes 413 can be used for positioning the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 .

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be visually recognized when viewed from the front. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) is provided with an LED 14e2 at a position that coincides with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.

The main body member 411 has, on its back side, a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the right corner, and a recessed portion from the back side at the lower end surface of the left corner. a supported groove 418 formed at a position close to the upper end, a fastening portion 419 formed at a symmetrical position near the upper end and formed so that a screw can be screwed therein; A fastening portion 419b is mainly provided.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). This makes it possible to easily position the lower edge plate member 420 in the horizontal direction when fastening and fixing it to the main body member 411 .

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claw portions can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500. ), a load (such as weight) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface where the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the electrical decoration part 8031. In the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 through the surface in which the supported groove 418 is formed. It is configured to be able to apply a load (such as weight) given from to the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. and an enlarged rib 419a.

As will be described later, screws inserted through through holes 463a and 483a are fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419 so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e are attached to the main body frame 14a. (see FIG. 125(a)), the details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are three same-shaped ribs arranged at 120° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of screws to the fastening portion 419 .

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is connected to the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411. , and is formed at a position corresponding to recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of speaker assembly 450 at an upper position of main body member 411, details of which will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view at the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the waved wall portion 422 toward the front side, the L-shaped extending portion 423 extends upward from the extended end portion thereof and is formed to have an L-shaped cross section, and the main body plate portion 421 . It mainly includes an opening 424 which is arranged at a position equidistant left and right from the left and right center position (the upper end position of the curved shape) and which is configured by a plurality of small-diameter through holes penetrating in the vertical direction.

In a state in which the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and back contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 abuts the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the portion where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut on the upper and lower sides, thereby improving the strength.

The opening 424 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123) is an opening through which the vibration wave (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 passes (is emitted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L are provided with circular openings 430R1 and 430L1, which are circular openings through which vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450 pass.

The right corner support member 430R has a laterally long rectangular through hole 430R2 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. The player can visually recognize the light emitted to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430 R 2 through the opening 414 .

121 is an exploded front perspective view of speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of speaker assembly 450. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) by screws inserted through connecting holes 469. The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Since the speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having substantially symmetrical shapes, the speaker assembly 450R will be described and the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-shaped speaker) 451, which is an acoustic device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave, and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 inserted through a through hole 466. The front side assembly 460 is fastened and fixed from the front side, and the front side assembly 460 is formed with an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front side assembly 460 in a front view, and a space is formed between the front side assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). a side assembly 480;

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to block the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and emits an effect sound related to the game. A speaker connection wire 453 (for example, an electric wire made up of a copper wire and a coating that covers the copper wire) passes through a through hole drilled in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and the end of the speaker connection wire 453 By connecting the connector to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

A front portion of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451 . The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front portion aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) through the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 cannot be heard. You can play back and output with high sound quality without any loss. In addition, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front portion of the speaker 451 without degrading the sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a main body 461 that is elongated in the left and right direction and formed in a cup shape with an open back side, and a plurality of semicircular tip ends that are recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461 toward the center of the vertical width. and a recessed portion 462 and an extended plate 463 extending from the rear side edge of the recessed portion 463 b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 toward the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the upper and lower width outside. , a wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end of the body portion 461 toward the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner of the body portion 461 in the front-rear direction, and the body portion 461. A circular through hole 466 through which the speaker 451 is inserted on the right side, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and a rear A plurality of fastening portions 468 in which screws inserted through the side assembly 480 are fastened and fixed, and connecting holes 469 in which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted. and a front recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back side toward the front side at the lower end portion of the tip side main body portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 is divided in the left-right direction into a base end-side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a left-right center side of the base end-side main body portion 461B (see FIG. 121). left), and a distal end side main body 461T connected to the center in the left-right direction of the intermediate main body 461M (left side in FIG. 121). A space is continuously formed between the proximal body portion 461B, the intermediate body portion 461M, and the distal body portion 461T and the rear assembly 480 .

The main body portion 461 includes a rear side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in front view. The rear side wall portion 461H has an edge portion without barbs on the inside (an edge portion on the inside where no flange or the like is formed).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. be done.

The extension plate 463 has through holes 463a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. The screws inserted through the through-holes 463a are inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a through the common-fastening holes 14a2 and the common-fastening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and are inserted through the through-holes 483a and 483a of the rear assembly 480 and It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411. As shown in FIG.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted through the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the rear side of the main body frame 14a. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480 . Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the body member 411, thereby being firmly fixed to each other.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material interposed therebetween). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wire passage recess 464 forms part of an opening through which a speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The recess width of the wire passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 . As a result, pressure is applied to the covered portion of the speaker connection line 453 passing through the wire passage recess 464 , thereby preventing a gap from occurring between the wire passage recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. 121 and 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for the sake of convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is illustrated so as to be visible.

Here, in this embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. The speaker connection line 453 that is connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464 . As a result, the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passing through-hole 465 is a through-hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes.

The passage-forming rib 467 abuts on the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap in the front and rear, and bends multiple times into the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). is the rib that forms the This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass. A front side end portion of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to a front side plate of the main body portion 461 . This prevents the formation of a gap on the front side of the passage forming rib 467 .

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (protruding slightly outward from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 includes a body portion 481 formed in a cup shape that is elongated in the left and right direction and has an open front side, and a semicircular tip end recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width. A plurality of recessed portions 482 and an extended plate extending from the rear side edges of the recessed portions 482 and the recessed portions 483b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the upper and lower width outer sides. 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting toward the front side of the body portion 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed through the upper right corner of the body portion 481 in the front-rear direction, and a cup-shaped portion of the body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side and fastening portions 468 of the front assembly 460 are formed as through holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding in the front-rear direction. and a rear recessed portion 491 recessed from the front side toward the back side at a position corresponding to the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction.

The body portion 481 extends in a plate shape toward the front side in such a manner as to surround the outer periphery of the body portion 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the body portion 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. A front side wall portion 481H is formed in a shape that fits inside the inner side surface of the rear side wall portion 461H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R has a double wall portion that is fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire outer periphery, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary protrusions projecting toward the front side beyond the wire pressing protrusions 484 at positions sandwiching the wire pressing protrusions 484 on the left and right with a gap that allows the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. 481 Ha.

The auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily fixed in the wire passage recess 464 from being shifted when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460 . That is, the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are tapered so that they widen to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124(c)), so that the speaker connection line 453 can pass through the wiring passage recess 464. Even if it comes off and shifts to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary projections 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 in the assembly process, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection wire 453 is formed from the wire passage recess 464 and the wire pressing projection 484. can be easily accommodated in an opening in the

The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the recessed portion 462 in a front view, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a concave portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 has through holes 483a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. The screws inserted through the through-holes 483a are inserted from the back side of the body frame 14a through the common-fastening holes 14a2 and the common-fastening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and pass through the through-holes 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the back side of the body frame 14a to the extent that the screw is tightened by screwing a screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460 . Accordingly, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e and the body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing protrusion 484 is protruded along the upper edge of the rear side plate of the main body 481 and formed with a width that fits inside the wiring passage recess 464. The protruding length is slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 .

That is, by passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passage recess 464, the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and the wire press protrusion 484 and the wire passage recess 464 are compressed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the opening formed by being surrounded by 464 and the speaker connection line 453 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 is passed.

The light-passing through-hole 485 is a through-hole through which the light emitted toward the lens member 440 from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) passes. The light passing through-hole 485 is formed of a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passage through-hole 465 has a larger cross-sectional shape than the light-passing through hole 485, and is tapered so that the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side. ), the light passage through-holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage-forming ribs 487 are formed at the same position as the passage-forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear. It is a rib that forms a curved path (see FIG. 123). This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and formed at front and rear end portions and surface positions of the front side wall portion 481H. That is, the back side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the back side plate of the main body portion 481 . This prevents the formation of a gap on the rear side of the passage forming rib 487 .

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed to have dimensions such that the front side end abuts the passage forming rib 467 and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, the passage-forming rib 467 applies a compression force directed toward the back side to the passage-forming rib 487, and the passage-forming ribs 467, 487 elastically deform in the front-rear direction due to the compressive force to close the gap therebetween. (See FIG. 124(b)).

At this time, if the passage-forming rib 487 has a low rigidity in the left-right direction and bends in the left-right direction, the compressive force may not work well and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the passage-forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the overlapped rear surface is reduced). strength to be reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity in the lateral direction of the passage forming rib 487 can be strengthened, and the lateral bending of the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 467 can be closed well. can be done.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed to have a shape inverted from the front recessed portion 471 and forms an opening together with the front recessed portion 471 . The opening is sized to surround the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (protrudes slightly outside the outer shape). It is placed in a position surrounding the outer shape.

123(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460 and FIG. 123(b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. FIG. In FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are arranged to face each other, are shown on surfaces facing each other. is deployed toward the front side of the paper. 123(a) and 123(b) are folded along a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the left-right center of the paper surface, so that the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are adjusted. can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

When the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are assembled (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the speaker assembly 450 has an acoustic chamber on the rear side of the base end main body 461B of the front assembly 460. formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 extends toward the tip side main body portion 461T. This acoustic path is configured as a curved path by path forming ribs 467 and 487 .

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed laterally inward (to the left) of the wire passage recesses 464 through which the wires pass, and alternately vertically toward the left. and rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment).

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are formed at the time of assembly. , and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480 can be prevented from being caught.

Since the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body 461 and the rear side wall 461H, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e enhance the rigidity of the main body 461. can be done.

Each of the rib portions 467 a , 467 b , 467 c , 467 d , 467 e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 form a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, in the case where there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 travels in a straight line. going to proceed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 123(a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws travels to the left side (arrow L side) and the nearest rib portion (for example, rib portion 467b) in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (directions of arrows L and U).

On the other hand, after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is arranged on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is closest in the left-right direction. , rib portion 467c) are arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are arranged alternately in the vertical direction as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path that is bent vertically, Compared to the lateral width of the space, it is possible to secure a longer traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws.

As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the travel path length of the vibration wave Ws until it passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471 and 491, thereby suppressing the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 462 and 463b can also produce the same effect as the passage forming rib 467 does. That is, the vibration wave Ws is caused to move in the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). (Arrows L, U directions).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), the passage-forming ribs 487 are formed inward in the left-right direction (left side) from the wiring pressing protrusion 484 that presses the wiring, and are arranged at a plurality of locations (main ribs) alternately vertically toward the left side. In the embodiment, rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are arranged at five locations).

Since the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are connected to the main body 481 and the front side wall 481H, the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e strengthen the rigidity of the main body 481. can be done.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed to have a shape that matches the shape of each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. ), they are arranged facing each other in the front-rear direction.

The actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 482 and 483b can also produce the same function as the passage forming rib 487. As shown in FIG. That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Accordingly, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is narrowed in vertical width as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and is narrowed once at the position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are vertically aligned. Further, at a position away from the speaker 451 , the vertical width is expanded at once, and then communicates with the opening formed by the concave portions 471 and 491 . Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side body portion 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, so output from the rear side of the speaker 451 The generated vibration wave Ws (sound) seeks an exit and advances toward the distal end side body portion 461T, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the tip-side body portion 461T passes through the opening formed by the front-side recessed portion 471 and the rear-side recessed portion 491, and the opening portion 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420 in this order. As a result, the sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass-reflex type speaker box, and the rear portion of the speaker 451 includes an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, an opening formed by the concave portions 471 and 491, and an opening 424 ( 120), the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010, so the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 can be reproduced and output with high sound quality without being muffled. can be done.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 and the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 are in phase with each other. Sound can be emitted from the opening formed by That is, the bass-reflex type speaker assembly 450 can emphasize the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 by superimposing the sound output from the front side and the sound output from the front side by superimposing them in the same phase without canceling each other due to the opposite phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify heavy bass. As a result, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment is capable of performing realistic effects, and can heighten the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In this embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the low frequency sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is transmitted through the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and is released to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (released downward to the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86)). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player playing the game on the front side of the front frame 14 with the effect of the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 toward the front side.

The sound of the vibration wave Ws (sound) can be tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the vibration wave Ws has a path avoiding the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of the front assembly 460 and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480. is defined. Therefore, by individually setting the arrangement of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d and 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d and 487e and the vertical extension length, the vibration wave Ws (voice ) can be tuned.

In this embodiment, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of the front assembly 460 and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480 serve the following purposes in addition to the above purposes: It is arranged at a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and reinforces the speaker assembly 450 .

For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the fastening portion 468 and the vicinity of the through hole 488 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are screwed.

Further, the extension plates 463, 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125(a)). 467 d and 487 d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 which are closest thereto. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing screws into the fastening portions 468, the fastening portions 419 are inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a of the extension plates 463 and 483. are screwed into the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a. Deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by the ribs 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d.

Also, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, respectively. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is positioned on the upper side plate member. 14e, recessed portions 462 and 482 of speaker assembly 450 ride on fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied from fastening portion 14 e 1 to the upper ends of recessed portions 462 and 482 as reaction force generated when fastening portion 14 e 1 supports the weight of speaker assembly 450 .

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482 and improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 .

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, fraudulent acts such as illegally entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 with a wire, piano wire, or the like are prevented. It can be made easier to control.

In addition, in such fraudulent acts, wires, piano wires, etc. are illegally entered into the game area and nails are deformed. and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, and the opening formed by the wire passing concave portion 464 and the wire pressing convex portion 484. A gap in the opening formed by the wire pressing projection 484 is closed by the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like enters the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly 450 may be displaced through an opening other than the place where the wire or the piano wire entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connection wires 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speakers 451, so that wires and piano wires are not required. It is possible to lengthen the distance between the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 , which is the location where the sound and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 .

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, and it is possible to easily prevent fraudulent profit from being generated.

124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(c). 124(a) is a top view of speaker assembly 450R viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(d) is a partial bottom view of speaker assembly 450R viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a). be. 124(a) and 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, while the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated in the partially enlarged view of FIG. is omitted.

As shown enlarged in FIG. 124(b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that slopes inward toward the rear side. An outer side surface 481Ho (upper surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the rear side, and is fitted with the inner side surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said that As a result, the work efficiency of inserting the front sidewall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear sidewall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is illustrated by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is illustrated by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. A compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c due to the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the rib portions in contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 124(c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed shorter in front-rear dimension than the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the passage through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (squeezed) in the intermediate main body portion 461M compared to the distal end side main body portion 461T. Thereby, the improvement of an acoustic effect can be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 124(d), the internal space of the tip side body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 is the interior of the intermediate body portion 461M. A large space is ensured in a form that bulges in the front-rear direction compared to the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end side main body portion 461T and released at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, for example, it is possible to make it easier to hear deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e along line CXXVa-CXXVa of FIG. 124(a). b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. 124(a).

As shown in FIG. 125(a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419 by screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a. This is a portion that sandwiches the upper side plate member 14e with the body frame 14a. That is, by arranging the enlarged rib 419a on the surface of the extension plate 463 on the front side, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is attached at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450 .

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (passing through the recessed portions 462 and 482 in the fastening direction without coming into contact with each other). It is configured as a portion that fastens and fixes the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14 e without the side assembly 480 .

The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is arranged inside the concave portions 462, 482 (the portion extending toward the rear side is arranged inside). At a lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is arranged inside the concave portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending toward the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, since the separate left and right speakers 451 are arranged in the independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, the reproduction output from the speakers 451 arranged in the speaker assemblies 450R and 450L on the other side is reproduced. In addition to avoiding conflict with the sound to be played, it is possible to reproduce transparent sound with high quality without muddying the reproduced sound.

In this embodiment, the extended plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are in contact with each other at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125(a)). In the lower part, the rear surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e protrudes toward the front side in a portion arranged to face the lower end of the rear assembly 480, The projecting portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut on each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) with the upper side plate member 14e over the entire surface, but is in a line-contact manner particularly at the lower end.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper side plate member 14e (made of synthetic resin), but is limited to this. There is nothing to be done.

For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member made of ebony, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when arranging a metal member, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to employ cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, and the like. By using these metals, it is possible to add depth to the sound.

Moreover, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. Examples include cast iron, steel, glass, and ceramics. By using these members, the rise performance of sound can be improved.

As for the shape, they may protrude in the shape of an elongated plate, may protrude in the shape of spikes, or may protrude in a form with rounded ends. Also, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

The arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is not limited to the rear surface of the lower end portion of speaker assembly 450 . For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the right and left ends of the speaker assembly 450, the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.

For example, when arranged on the rear surface of the upper end portion, a member functioning as an insulator is cylindrical, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. Positioning may be done by In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate locking member for positioning the member that functions as an insulator, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the degree of tightening of the screw inserted through the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the sound effect by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (the load applied to each other).

At this time, even if the screws inserted through the through-holes 483a are loosened, the speaker assembly 450 remains in the same position as the screws inserted through the connecting holes 469 (see FIG. 123(a)) and the connecting holes 469. The upper side is fixed by a screw inserted through a through hole provided on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction in terms of shape, or through a through-hole provided at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through hole is arranged. Since it is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e.

Regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper side frame member 410 is inserted into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e from the rear side in addition to the screws inserted through the through holes 483a. The screw is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125(b)) to fasten and fix. As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, no load is applied to the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely tightening the screws inserted through the through holes 483a (adjusting the degree of tightening).

The relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e is similar to the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the body frame 14a connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can be made to function as an insulator, and the material and contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . 127(b) shows the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be explained. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, a left end front support portion 12a and a left end rear support portion 12b are spaced forward and backward for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. are placed.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines backward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed leftward from the left end. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 are in surface contact.

The rear left end support portion 12b has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting toward the front side as it goes to the left in the state of its natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 forms a tapered shape that expands to the side (rightward) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction together with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left front support portion 12a. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 . Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG.

128(a) and 128(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b), and FIGS. 3 is a side view of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the game board 13. FIG. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128(b) and 129(a) show the game board 13 just before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and FIG. 129(b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. illustrated. 128 and Z39, the configuration of a part of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted for easy understanding.

When the worker assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160, and after the upper and lower positions of the game board 13 are aligned to some extent, the left end of the game board 13 is placed. is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture rotated about an axis facing the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is provided. Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the front left end support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the front left end support portion 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the game board 13 is moved around the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the rear edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front surface of the game board 13). It is rotated so as to approach the inner frame 12. - 特許庁In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied toward the game board 13 from the elastic support portions 12b1. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12 .

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom portion 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in a position and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and supports the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1, which are supported from below and whose front upper end portions are cut as inclined surfaces, are provided in the left-right direction.

By configuring in this way, in the process of changing the state from FIG. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be progressed smoothly by causing the game board 13 to ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side. . Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to approximately 15°, which is larger than the backward inclination (approximately 10°) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement arcade. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from reversing in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation, so that the game can be played regardless of the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. Workability when the board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 is not limited to this, and may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the backward inclination at the time of installation of the amusement arcade. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be made horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128(b), as shown in FIG. 129(a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in a released state to be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It abuts on the front surface of the rear claw member 640 .

Here, in the released state, the board support device 600 allows the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the pre-regulation pawl member 630 (parts arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) to enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to be retracted from the path, the workability of assembling the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation pawl member 640 through the game board 13, and the board surface support device 600 is displaced as described later. , and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12.例文帳に追加That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the state of the upper and lower board support devices 600 changes substantially at the same time.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is regulated. As shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 129(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached as the board support device 600 is changed between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 is pushed to the rear side, the game board 13 rotates around the vicinity of the left end. The long width dimension of the game board 13 weakens the force required when applying a load to the inner frame 12, so that even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b at two upper and lower positions (see FIG. 126). 13 is insufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed to the inner frame 12, Also, the extent to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board surface support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is pushed in to close against the inner frame 12, and the game board 13 moves. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the recoil when the front frame 14 is pushed to close against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is fixed by the support parts 12a and 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is vertically positioned on the support bottom 12c. is regulated.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)), it is arranged at the lower end of the back side of the game board 13 and connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a which is connected to the wiring of the game board 13 and is supported on the game board 13 so as to be able to change its position in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a control board which is disposed on the inner frame 12 near the board surface support device 600 on the lower side. The receiving side connector 12d to which the wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back side is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13. FIG.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface supporting device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower members are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12 . Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, one of the board support devices 600 will be explained, and the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

130(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600, FIG. 130(b) is a back perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600. 131(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. 130(a) and 130(b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b) show A release state in which the fixation of the game board 13 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the board support device 600 displaces the open side of the U-shape formed by the front rotating claw member 620 and the rear rotating claw member 640 in the front-rear direction.

132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board support device 600 has a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610 so as to be rotatable. A pivotally supported pre-rotation pawl member 620, and a pre-regulation pawl member rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 disposed on the front side of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation pawl member 620. 630 and a post-rotation pawl member 640 rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 arranged on the rear side of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and fixed through the pre-rotation pawl member 620 .

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at its corners, and a pair of parts of the main body plate portion 611 that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arcuate hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc around the support hole 612 above the support hole 612 on the front side. , an arc recess 614 recessed from below in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612, and is inserted and fixed to the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A rod-shaped regulating rod 615 and a pair of flange-like extensions extending left and right from the plate portion 611a and fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by screws inserted through the through holes 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127(b)). and a fixing plate 616 of .

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member with an enlarged diameter end on the insertion base end side. , are fixed in the support holes 612 . Since the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63 are the same as this fixing method and the shape of the shaft member, the description thereof will be omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted through the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted through the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 includes a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed through the plate portions 621a that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right and are axially supported by the first shaft member P61, and through the plate portions 621a on a straight line at the upper corners on the front side. A pair of support holes 623 formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of support holes 623 formed through the rear side portion of the plate portion 621a on a straight line and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. and a hole 624 .

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted through the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted through the supported hole 632 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 at the same time, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. , the third shaft member P63 is also inserted through the supported hole 642 of the post-rotation pawl member 640 at the same time.

The body plate portion 621 is composed of a long portion 621a1 that is arranged to face the left and right sides and is elongated in the front-rear direction, and an extension portion 621a2 that extends vertically from the front end of the long portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape when viewed from the side, a connecting plate portion 621b connecting and fixing the upper edges of the plate portions 621a, and the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b from the rear side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b. and a rear side extension plate 621c that extends downwardly by about 45 degrees with respect to the plate portion 621a, and the extension portion 621a2 extends perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a toward the opposite side plate portion 621a from the rear side end portion of the extension portion 621a2. A hanging back plate portion 621d provided, and a front side extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d. and are mainly provided.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b are perpendicular to each other, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the hanging rear plate portion 621d are formed to be perpendicular to each other.

The rear-side extended plate 621c is arranged so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, in the released state, the torsion spring NBb abuts and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)). By retracting upward of NBb, the torsion spring NBb starts contacting the body plate portion 611 .

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while preventing the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb from being generated on the operator side. Immediately before finishing, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, it is possible to suppress the force of rotation of the game board 13 by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while reducing the force required at the start of pushing.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that contacts the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. The front-side extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in a direction to bring the front regulating claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction to move the lower end of the post-rotation claw member 640 away from the rear side wall of the body plate portion 611 .

The pre-restricting claw member 630 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 631, which is formed in a shape in which the sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at the corners, and a part of the main body plate portion 631 in the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 penetrating the plate portion 631a on a straight line and supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a to the lower end of the front connecting plate 631b are inclined to the front side. It is mainly provided with an inclined extension plate 633 extending in the same direction and a curved surface 634 curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The oblique extension plate 633 is a plate portion arranged to face the front frame 14, and is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that abuts against the regulating rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), thereby regulating the free posture change of the front regulating claw member 630 .

The post-rotation claw member 640 includes a main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at corners, and a part of the main body plate portion 641, which is arranged opposite to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 642 formed through the plate portion 641a on a straight line and supported by the third shaft member P63, and a front connecting plate 641b connecting the pair of plate portions 641a to the rear side from the lower end portion thereof. and an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back side of the game board 13 and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and is inclined at an angle of contact with the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129(a)). It is formed.

134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b) show the process of changing the board support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state in chronological order. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), the multi-function cover member 171 arranged close to the board support device 600 and fixed to the board support device 600 The arrangement of the game board 13 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

That is, FIG. 134(a) shows the released state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 135(b) shows the fixed state of the board support device 600. As shown in FIG. In addition, in the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged right behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation pawl member 640 rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61. Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is applied with a biasing force in the direction of approaching the hanging rear plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the front regulating claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, the contact between the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 restricts the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 .

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), as the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotation front claw member 620 While the front side on which the extended portion 621a2 is arranged tilts, the front regulating claw member 630 rises in a manner to separate from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, the regulating rod 615 is in the front side portion of the curved surface 634 and is in contact with the resistance portion 634a that intersects the circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (FIGS. 134A to 134A). 135(a)), the front side end of the regulation front claw member 630 rises as the rotation front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation pawl member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 .

On the other hand, a non-resisting portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resisting portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulating rod 615, When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 are no longer in contact with each other in the circular direction about the second shaft member P62, the rising motion of the front regulating pawl member 630 is released, and the front regulating pawl member 630 faces the inclined extension plate 633. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (see FIGS. 135(a) to 135(b)).

In the angle range (range between FIGS. 134(a) and 135(a)) in which the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is raised, the front side end portion of the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is positioned relative to the pre-regulation pawl member 630. Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting the robot, is applied, the change in the posture of the regulating front pawl member 630 when it operates due to the downward load causes a change in posture in the direction facing the downward load (in the rising direction). As a result, the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive, and the change in the posture of the regulated front claw member 630 against the downward load is regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 abuts against the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

As a result, the rotation of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 due to the downward load applied to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the front regulating claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting motion of the front claw member 620 can be suppressed. In this embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 is released, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is positioned so as to abut on the inclined extension plate 633 of the front claw member 630 . , the shape of the front connection plate 631b, and the length and inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 134(b), the game board 13 abuts on the back surface of the back side extending plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extending plate Rubbing friction occurs between 621c and the game board 13 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) toward the front in the state of FIG. 134(b). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side due to the reaction. can be suppressed.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the release state of the board surface support device 600, in the case of a structure in which the front rotation claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, it is arranged on the front frame 14. Depending on the manner of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 may reach the fixed state, and the board surface support device 600 may not reach the fixed state and may be stabilized at an incomplete angle. may occur.

Assuming that the board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and that the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, the space between the rear surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 The distance between the two becomes shorter, which may interfere with the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multi-function When the cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630 abut against each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from being closed. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 aware that the board support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

Upon noticing this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state. You can stabilize the distance from the front.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135(a), the multifunctional cover member 171 provided on the front frame 14 and the restricting front claw member 171 are in a state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 is fixed. Depending on the manner of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 will reach the fixed state, or that the board surface support device 600 will not reach the fixed state and will be stabilized at an incomplete angle. The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 is projected to a position where it can contact the front regulation claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not regulated by the regulation bar 615 .

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the contact between the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13. None.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 in a state immediately before the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is fixed, the tilting operation of the front side end portion of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is allowed. there is

As a result, when the game board 13 is placed at a position immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the clerk's force to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, 90% of the time the game board is stable). In this case, when a load is applied to the board surface support device 600 from the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 Then, the board support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

Therefore, the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact (Fig. 134(a) )), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the rear side. That is, the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board support device 600 is changed to the fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front side end portion of the pre-regulating pawl member 630, the state of the board support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board support device 600 facing the game board 13 come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in this state, it moves (tilts) while pushing the hanging back plate portion 621d away. The biasing force of the torsion spring NBb given to is given as resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side due to the reaction. can be suppressed.

Between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the front regulating pawl member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resisting portion 634b is disposed facing the regulating rod 615. (See FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is the center. In the direction along the circular arc, the non-resisting portion 634b abuts against the regulation bar 615, and the resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 to the front side increases accordingly.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the possibility of the game board 13 moving (tilting) toward the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side due to the reaction. can be suppressed.

The non-resisting portion 634b of the curved surface 634 extends from the portion that abuts the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(a) to the portion that abuts the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(b). A curved surface is formed with a gradually increasing radius around the biaxial member P62.

135(a), the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed rearward by the multifunctional cover member 171, and when the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates and the second shaft member P62 is displaced, The non-resisting portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are momentarily separated from each other. Therefore, the resistance applied to the front regulating pawl member 630 from the regulating rod 615 is reduced for a moment, and the front regulating pawl member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging rear plate portion 621d by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135(a), the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position just before the board surface support device 600 is fixed, so that the multifunctional cover member 171 can be replaced by the front regulating claw member 630 or the inclined extension plate 633. , and then the board support device 600 can be brought into a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600. That is, in a state in which the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 and the multifunctional cover member 171 134(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when replacing the board surface), it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14. , can improve the work efficiency of workers.

When the board support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled upward in the front direction to rotate the pre-regulation pawl member 630 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, since the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 615 are not in contact with each other in the direction of rotation), the front regulating pawl member 630 can be rotated with a light force, and the rotation continues. By doing so, the board support device 600 can be placed in the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed forward by the displaced post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 134(a), the upper end surface of the game board 13 abuts the lower surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. This eliminates the risk of the game board 13 falling forward when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

Note that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be switched between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes, as in the present embodiment, if the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 will not match up and down. , the load applied to the game board 13 may become excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are operated when the board support device 600 is brought into the released state. does not match In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member 620 supporting the game board 13 are compared with the displacement amount of the pre-regulation pawl member 630. The amount by which 640 is displaced is smaller.

Therefore, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the return is regulated by the regulation rod 615), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are displaced. Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 . Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620 . That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135(b)) to the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the post-rotation pawl member 640 is pushed against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb and the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 can be displaced in the direction of widening the angle between them.

Therefore, compared with the displacement amount of the pre-rotation pawl member 620, since the displacement amount of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation pawl member 640 can be suppressed, 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. Thereby, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

136 shows the released state of the board support device 600, FIG. 137 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 139 shows the rotated state, the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed, and the thickness of the game board 13 supported by the board support device 600 is shown in phantom lines. be done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the board support device 600 and the opening/closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. 138 and 139, the open/close restricting portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed in FIGS. 136 and 137 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the open/close regulating portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operating portion back member 155 above the opening/closing restricting portion 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed when the game board 13 is removed, but the front frame 14 cannot be closed when the game board 13 is placed. is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), the interference between the opening/closing regulation part 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, by arranging the game board 13 on the back side compared to the arrangement when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13 interferes with the operation part back member 155 above the opening/closing regulation part 159. is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is permitted to be closed regardless of whether the game board 13 is present or not.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is rotated from the released state to the fixed state side by a predetermined angle, if the front frame 14 is placed at the closed position (see FIG. 138), The opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board support device 600 interfere with each other.

In this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 prevents the pre-rotation claw member 620 from rotating in the direction of rotation. (Clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the direction of rotation of the front regulating pawl member 630 (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) are opposite to each other, so that the reaction force becomes excessive. It is as described above (see FIG. 134(b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13, closing the front frame 14 is restricted. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, there is a possibility that the lower end of the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extension plate 621c may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is strengthened.

As shown in FIG. 139, in a state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the open/close restricting portion 159 and , and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, when an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 causes the pre-rotation claw member 620 to rotate. The direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotational direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) of the front regulating pawl member 630 are never opposite to each other, and the normal load can be easily pushed in as described above. (See FIG. 135(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the front regulation pawl member 630 can be pushed in via the open/close regulation portion 159, and the board support device 600 can be brought into a fixed state. Therefore, closing the front frame 14 is permitted.

140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12. FIG. 140 and 141 illustrate a state in which the cover member that closes the rear surface of the ball shooting unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will now be described with reference to FIGS. 142-148. FIG. 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit 112a, and FIG. 142(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit 112a. Figures 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. In addition, FIG. 143(a) shows a disassembled state after the cover member 721 is opened, and FIG. 143(b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then turned back and forth. . That is, in FIG. 143(b), the rear side of only the ball receiving member 731 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball shooting unit 112a includes a base member 710 made of metal or die-cast, and a base member 711 made of resin attached to the base member 710. 142(a) partially covering the front surface of the base member 710 and an open state (see FIG. 23(a)) opening the front surface of the base member 710. and a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721 that

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721. The base member 711 is engaged with the base member 710 by a hook or the like that is elastically deformable, is disposed on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of synthetic resin or the like. , a firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, a firing rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 shot by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and a ball receiving member 731 to regulate the posture. a fastening portion 716 which is cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a which bulges in a straight line toward the front side from the base member 710 and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed; mounting holes 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719 .

The base member 711 has a pair of receiving portions 712 at the right corner through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted, and a locking portion 713 drilled on the opposite side of the receiving portions 712 in the left-right direction so that the hook portion 723 can be locked. , and a projecting portion 714 projecting toward the front side close to the right side of the engaging portion 713, and arranged to face the attracting force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142(a)). It mainly includes a defect determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided.

The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142(a)), and extends to the left inner side of the ball passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is closed. An opposing plane 714a formed as a plane facing the side surface 724c and parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a plane opposite to the opposing plane 714a in the left and right direction and inclined rightward toward the rear side. and a surface 714b.

When the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not contact the attraction force generating solenoid 741, while the fastening force generating solenoid 741 is loosened ( It abuts against the cover member 721 when it is floating above the cover member 721 , and is formed with a protrusion height that restricts the rotation of the cover member 721 .

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening of the attractive force generating solenoid 741 is loosened. It is possible to make the user aware that the fastening of the generation solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, it is possible to perform repair (fasten and fix the attracting force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) before a problem occurs in the ball shooting unit 112a.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably and axially supported by a base member 711, a regulated state for regulating the flow of the ball P8 entering the cover member 721, and a control state for the ball P8 (see FIG. 144). and a switching device 740 that is controlled to change state between a permissive state that permits flow down to the launch rail 730 .

The cover member 721 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and formed into a cup shape with the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. a rod-shaped portion 722, a hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left-right opposite side of the rod-shaped portion 722, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144) passes through the position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722 side. a ball passage opening 724 having a possible size and extending in the front-rear direction; and a shaft rod portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740 .

The switching device 740 includes an attraction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member having one end loosely fitted to the shaft portion 726. The attraction force generating solenoid 741 generates magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not the ball guide arm member 742 rotates; A guide sloping portion 744 which is a part of the guide arm member 742 and which is arranged below the ball passage opening 724 and slopes downward as it moves away from the ball passage opening 724, and the ball P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide sloping portion 744. and a regulating projecting portion 745 which is extended by an interval and whose extended end projects toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to the axial rod portion 726 .

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided. A rib portion 724b is arranged above the flow-down plate portion 724a so as to face it and extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib-like manner, and the extended front end surface is inclined downward toward the rear side, and the flow-down plate portion 724a. It mainly includes a left inner side surface 724c that is connected to the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the rear and rightward.

In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)), when the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, since the sphere P8 flows down from the metal member for cutting 725 in a manner separating from the metal member for cutting 725 in the left-right direction, the metal member for cutting 725 is disposed in a manner to protrude inside the sphere passing opening 724, but the sphere P8 and the metal for cutting are separated from each other. Collision with the member 725 can be prevented.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends upward from the middle position of the base member 710 toward the left side. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 is arranged with an interval shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the elongated direction are parallel, and that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a formed as an elongated hole along the direction and for passing a fastening screw, and a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the direction of the elongated hole of the through hole 731a) like the bulging portion 716a. and a restricting groove 731b formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened to the base member 710, the position of the through hole 731a to be fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 716 is selected. The ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be slid along the drawn straight line, thereby adjusting the standby position (separation distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the firing strength when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be maintained unchanged.

The firing rail 730 is formed by bending a metal plate to have a substantially M-shaped cross section, and has a rolling plate portion 730a formed to have a substantially V-shaped cross section and extending obliquely upward to the left, and a rolling plate portion 730a. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c that hang down from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a. Attached to member 710 .

A rail guard 733 made of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c to prevent noise and vibration caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball. suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface with a substantially V-shaped cross-section, and contacts the two front and rear portions of the peripheral surface of the ball P8 (see FIG. 146(b)) to push the ball P8 upward. configured to guide.

FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device 720. FIG. 144(a) to 144(c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

144(a), the switching device 740 of the ball feeding device 720 is in the regulated state (the power supply to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). , the regulating projecting portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, contacts the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the allowable state (state in which power is supplied to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protruding portion 745 retreats above the sphere, and the restriction on the flow of the sphere P8 is released, so that the sphere P8 flows above the guide inclined portion 744. As shown in FIG. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts against the front side wall of the base member 711 to prevent it from further flowing down, and stays on the upper surface of the guide slope 744 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state, so that the ball P8 riding on the guide slope portion 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744 and is guided to the launch rail 730. As shown in FIG.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144(c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144(a), even in the state shown in FIG. flow is regulated. Thus, balls can be fed to launch rail 730 one ball at a time. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 86) and stored in the upper tray 17. be.

145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. FIG. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A cut with an acute angle is formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and the same plate as the plate on the proximal side of the lower blade portion 725b. and an upper blade portion 725c extending from.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back side more than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side projects upward from the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower edge of the upper blade portion 725c slopes downward toward the proximal side (left side), and the upper edge of the lower blade portion 725b slopes upward toward the proximal side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a string member such as a kite string fixed to the ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the ball P8 and entered will be described.

FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the sphere-launching unit 112a, FIG. 146(b) is a partial top view of the sphere-launching unit 112a as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a), and FIG. ) is a front view of the ball shooting unit 112a, and FIG. 147(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725, showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147(a). 148 is a partial front view of ball launching unit 112a, inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 after launching ball P8. In addition, in FIGS. 146 and 147, illustration of some constituent members of the ball shooting unit 112a is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146(a) and 146(b), the ball P8 guided to the launch rail 730 stays in contact with the left lower edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146(a)). ), a current is applied to the firing solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 protrudes vigorously, thereby applying a firing force to the ball P8 and launching the ball P8 along the firing rail 730 (Fig. 147(a)). )reference).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the string Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the string Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. , loosening, etc., is known to cause the ball P8 to be repeatedly detected by the winning opening.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut using the momentum of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in such a manner that it is drawn to the right as it goes toward the rear side. (See FIG. 146(b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the yarn Y8 is moved by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the launch rail 730 passing under the flow-down plate portion 724a. Since it moves along the upper surface, the yarn Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c that overhangs the flow-down plate portion 724a, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c. .

While the player is gripping the front end (the other end) of the string Y8, a load is applied to one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8 as the ball P8 is launched, causing the string Y8 to is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize winning opening.

If the launch strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the string Y8 will not be cut due to insufficient tensile force applied to the string Y8. The ball flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the prize-winning opening, so that the fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize-winning opening can be eliminated.

Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. FIG. The game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 is different from the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 in that the petal motion device 800 is visible from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. are substantially the same.

A performance operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and a forward/backward motion unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance/retreat operation unit 900 vertically moves the petal operation device 800 by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance/retreat operation, i.e., movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, movement including at least one of the movement of retracting toward the outside of the display area of the pattern display device 81), and the petal movement device 800 is connected to one end, and the other is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100 and the driving force of the driving motor 921 is transmitted through the arm gear 924 to rotate the driving side arm member 910, and the driving side arm member 910 is driven. A driving motor 921 that generates a driving force, a transmission means 920 that is composed of a plurality of gears that transmit the driving force of the driving motor 921 to the driving side arm member 910 , and the driving side arm member 910 rotates in conjunction with the driving side arm member 910 . A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930 that slides in the left-right direction with a second slide plate 930, a second thin plate-shaped effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding motion of the slide plate 930, and the drive side arm member 910 on the left and right opposite side, It mainly includes a long plate-like driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal motion device 800 .

Next, the structure of the petal motion device 800 will be described. 153 is a front view of petal motion device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of petal motion device 800 taken along line CLIV--CLIV of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 154, the supporting base material 801 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

The petal motion device 800 is configured such that members such as petals 802 are supported by a supporting base material 801 . As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the drawing, it is formed of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It comprises a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position near the upper right portion of the central body portion of the supporting base material 801 , and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 extends forward through a narrow gap formed in the supporting base material 801 . A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the projection.

An opening 801P is formed in the central main body of the supporting base 801 at a position slightly below and to the left of the central motor 804, and is arranged to the right of the opening 801P. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, a doughnut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) is recessed from the front side to the rear side in a donut shape through which an arc plate 880d for detection of a loose fitting device 880, which will be described later, can pass. It is formed.

An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the central motor 804 to the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the supporting base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening the vertically long, roughly oval area in the central portion. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion forming an upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion forming a region below the upper end portion.

In this embodiment, the support base 801 has a shape that extends slightly vertically as a whole. The operation space can be reduced by forming the 801 into a shape that is long in the vertical direction rather than in the shape that is long in the horizontal direction.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are interlocked (linked) to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G which are concentrically arranged so as to overlap the position of the opening 801P as will be described later. It can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other. It is placed on the right (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal motion device 800 that is supported in a slightly tilted posture toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from sagging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base 801 and the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base 801. driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base 801 by

155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 155 and 156, illustration of the supporting base material 801 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin molded to imitate the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes a hibiscus flower in an open state as a whole. , and has a plate-like flat plate member 803 on the back side.

157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820. FIG.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape that extends radially in the arranged state, and has a shape that gently bulges forward from the center to the outer periphery (see FIG. 154). ).

The surface of the petal 802 is formed with irregular unevenness including a large number of wrinkles, and the periphery also has an irregularly uneven shape when viewed from the front. Strictly speaking, the five petals 802 do not have the same shape, and although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like, they are formed in roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red), but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge is darkened in the specific color (red) without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. Coloring is done.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802S extending cylindrically rearward and having a screw hole inside, at two locations near the outer circumference of the rear side surface of each petal 802 and at the center portion in the radial direction. there is

The petal 802 is arranged from the rear side portion 802a to the round tip side (counterclockwise side when viewed from the front, right side of FIG. The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharp tip shape side (the clockwise side when viewed from the front, the left side of the paper surface of FIG. 157(a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side 802b is positioned closer to the rear cover 886 of the loose fit device 880 than the rear side 802a.

The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side 802a of one adjacent petal 802, and the rear side 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side 802b of the other adjacent petal 802, thus five petals. petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are directed toward the same center and gathered.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced in the front-rear direction. Since the positional relationship can be adjusted, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the petals 802 as a whole between the gathered position and the fully opened position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made remarkable.

The five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) posterior side surface with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, the flat plate members 803 are long plate-shaped resin members separated from each other and fixed to the five petals 802 respectively.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer peripheral edge extends forward.

In the vicinity of the opening S1 (in the vicinity of the inner periphery) of the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of screw-in portions 803S extending cylindrically to the rear and having screw holes therein are arranged in the circumferential direction (flat plate). It is integrally formed at a position separated in the lateral direction of the member 803 .

The screw-in portions 803S are formed on both side walls in the circumferential direction (transverse direction) of each flat plate member 803 so as to be substantially flush with each other. A slide rib 803a which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extends rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S. , formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803 has two screw insertion holes therein corresponding to the screw-in portions 802S of the petals 802. A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

The screw-in portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 is brought into contact with the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 from the front, and a screw is screwed in from the rear. fixed respectively.

158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. FIG. 155 and 156 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 158 and 159 as appropriate. A slit member 810 is arranged behind the flat plate member 803 as shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a plate-shaped member made of resin having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is bored in the center. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front side peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear side peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the periphery of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

Returning to FIG. 156, description will be made. On the rear side peripheral wall portion 813, two adjacent two out of five equally spaced places in the circumferential direction and one place in the middle of the three places excluding the two are cylindrically shaped in the front and rear direction. A screw-in portion 813S having a screw hole is formed integrally therewith, and a positioning boss 813a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the screw-in portion 813S is not formed among the above five locations. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to protrude in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, the details of which will be described later.

The slit member 810 has a central slit 814 and side slits 815 as shown in FIG. Each of the central slits 814 is formed to linearly extend further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811 . However, with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the center slit 814 is rotated by an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in this pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. It extends along the inclined direction D12.

Both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight gap.

In this manner, a set of three slits, that is, the central slit 814 and the two-side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five points in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72° intervals). Note that each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) when viewed from the front, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the two-side slit 815 located on the outermost side in the set of these three slits, that is, among the four corners of the three slits, the two corners on the smaller diameter side are the two-side slits. It has a substantially rectangular shape extending in the direction of extension of 815 (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extension (cut) is for inserting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803. As shown in FIG.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side ends of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815. is provided with an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811 .

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed in the circumferential direction and the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the set of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. , five sets of central slits 814 and two side slits 815 are arranged more densely in such a way that they are arranged inwardly, which also makes the slit member 810 compact in appearance.

In other words, compared to the case where the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 were arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. , the five pairs of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 can be laid out more densely when arranged and formed to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above. The peripheral shape can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , slide members 820 are arranged in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 from behind the slit member 810 . As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a member made of resin having a long plate-like front shape. A molded extending portion, a central portion that is thicker than the effecting portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extending portion, and the center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 that protrudes from the front side and is inserted through the central slit 814 in the assembled state, a slide pin 823 that is fixed in such a manner as to protrude from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side and penetrate back and forth, Prepare.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the sliding member 820 is positioned so that the extending direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 in the slit member 820 crosses the longitudinal direction at right angles. and the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted from the front side into the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810 . In the fully inserted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810 very slightly. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted through the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and are screwed into the screw portions 803S of the plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with little clearance, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost aligned along the corresponding outer edges of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. inserted without gaps.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810. At this time, the flat plate member 803 does not turn around the guide pin 822 and faces a certain outward direction. is regulated by the slide rib 803a.

160 is a front perspective view of slide member 820 and central motor 804, and FIGS. 161(a) and 161(b) are rear perspective views of slide member 820 and central motor 804. FIG. Note that the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted in FIG. 161(a). 155 and 156 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 160 and 161 as appropriate.

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

A peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall extends along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to form an elongated loop when viewed from the front. It is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830 .

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall of the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 . The width of the inner side of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight clearance of play. The edge corner portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to be rounded.

The guide rail 832 extends clockwise in a front view along a direction substantially midway between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 from a position in contact with the outer side of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. , and extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while curving in an arc further toward the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 175(a)).

The end of the guide rail 832 on the pivot opening 831 side, that is, the peripheral wall of the portion that contacts the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall on the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end portion thereof protrudes forward from the front end portion of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 .

Around the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831, four more guide rails 832 are formed in the same manner as described above. It extends so as to expand in a spiral shape from the surroundings to the outside.

As shown in FIG. 161, on the rear side of the rotating plate 830, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the form of a peripheral wall and having teeth on its outer periphery is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804. As shown in FIG.

The rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 154 . At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 projecting rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174(c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is linearly rather than surface-wise. As a result, the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted over the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly rotatably supported.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter than the second gear 830G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is concentrically arranged and fixed on the rear side of the second gear 830G. , are arranged to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 .

A circular pivot opening 810a is formed in the center of the third gear 810G. A screw insertion hole 810b is drilled at a position corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S, and a positioning hole 810c is drilled at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to be superimposed on the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. The positioning boss 810G 813a (see FIG. 156) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 810c, and fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw-in portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

As a result, the slit member 810 is linked to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805. is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to come off.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , a central shaft rotating device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810 . The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and loose fitting device 880. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the cylindrical peripheral wall is cut along the axial direction, and a shaft portion 852 of the shaft portion 852. A disk-shaped flange 855 is provided at the front end to increase the diameter, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a bore portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction. Around the bore portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, a front side threaded portion 857 having a screw hole inside and a threaded portion 857 on the side of the bore portion 856 from the front side threaded portion 857 are provided on the left and right sides of the bore portion 856. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a deviated position and is drilled toward the rear side, and two columnar support projections 859 that slightly extend slightly forward are integrally formed. . The front end of the front threaded portion 857 and the base of the support projection 859 have the same extension height.

On the inner peripheral surface of the inner cavity portion 856, there are cylindrically extending along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing locations, extend further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and extend inside. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, rear positioning bosses 854 are integrally formed at positions equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 on the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163 , an LED board 861 is arranged on the front side of the central shaft member 851 . The LED board 861 is a substantially disc-shaped board having a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED board 861 at positions corresponding to the front screw portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

By inserting the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 and positioning it, and inserting the screw through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861 into the front screw part 857 of the central shaft member 851 , the LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

In addition, an insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and has a size that allows the threaded portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be fitted therein.

As shown in FIG. 162, on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, there are a central point and a number of points arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles extending in multiple (double) directions around this one point. The LEDs 865 are arranged and fixed so as to emit light forward.

Sideways LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of positions arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction near the outer periphery on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 and the forward LEDs 865 are alternately arranged concentrically. A connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed to the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861 so as to face rearward.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861 . The central decorative member 868 has a specific color (yellow), but is made of a resin material that is almost transparent. It has a pair of threaded portions 869 in which screw holes are formed.

The threaded portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 . A screw portion 869 passing through an insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861 abuts against the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the LED substrate 861 sandwiched therebetween, and a screw is screwed into the screw portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855. Thereby, the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855 . Thereby, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861 .

The loose fitting device 880 includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed in a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an outer peripheral surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter It mainly includes a body cylindrical member 883 which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and rotatably and loosely fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 .

The main body cylindrical member 883 is provided with screw-in portions 883S, which extend cylindrically in the front-rear direction and have screw holes therein, integrally at two of the four locations equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the threaded portion 883S is not formed among the above-mentioned four portions.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, on the main body cylindrical member 883, rib-like projections are projected in the outer diameter direction at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with a projection length similar to that of the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. A sliding rib 883b is formed extending across.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 149), the decorative member 884 covering the LED board 861 from the front side and the decorative member 884 are arranged on the outside. A back cover 886 which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, forms a cup shape with an empty bottom rising toward the front from the outer peripheral side of the fastening portion, abuts on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the rear side, and is fastened and fixed. , are provided.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010) on the front and back surfaces, so that the side surfaces are mirror-finished. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light of the lateral LEDs 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery, it is possible to perform light emission effects.

The decorative member 884 is a member that emits light by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861. The decorative member 884 is shaped like a hibiscus flower and transmits light in a specific color (red). a front side plate portion made of a resin material having properties, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the rear side plate portion forming a disc shape in which the peripheral wall rises to the rear side on the rear side thereof. An opening 885 having a size that allows the central decorative member 868 to be inserted is formed in the central portion.

The body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851 . The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G arranged behind the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a fourth gear 880G having a slightly smaller diameter than the third gear 810G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is concentrically arranged and fixed. It is meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the supporting base material 801 and mesh with each other.

One gear of the intermediate gear 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear that meshes with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates through the intermediate gear 808 in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

A circular pivot opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and around the pivot opening 880a, screw insertion holes are provided at positions corresponding to the two screw portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are drilled at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a.

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to be superimposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted on the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850. 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 880c, and fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw-in portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from slipping off, and the slit The member 810 is held by the body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to come off.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d extending rearward in an arc around the rotation shaft on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. The detection arc plates 880d are arranged at five locations with equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) in the assembled state (see FIG. 154), and is arranged to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. It is detected by a coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotation angle (minimum angle 72° detection can be performed and rotations greater than 72° can be ensured by detection).

Assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their rear ends slightly protrude rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning. Further, the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base 801 by inserting the rear side threaded portion 853 protruding rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion portion 801S in the support base 801 and screwing.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the bore portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the mounting structure described above, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward from the support base member 801, and as shown in FIG. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 is fitted onto the large diameter cylindrical member 882 so that the front side peripheral wall portion 812 is fitted onto the large diameter cylindrical member 882 .

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is locally bulged at eight places along the circumferential direction by the screw-in portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted to the main cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is thereby brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the slit member 813 in a linear manner rather than in a planar manner. Smoothly rotatably pivoted.

164 is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800, the driving side arm member 910 and the driven side arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. FIG. The petal motion device 800 vertically moves (advances and retreats) by applying a load in the vertical direction from the drive-side arm member 910 . 150 to 152 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG. 164 and subsequent figures.

The back plate 1100 is a laterally elongated rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest part inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the game board 13. A support column 1110 that protrudes in the front side in a columnar shape, a gear housing portion 1120 that is recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a vertical alignment at the center position of the left and right. a rail fixing part 1130 arranged in the , and a support long hole 1140 drilled as a long hole inclined downward as it approaches the rail fixing part 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing part 1130 interposed therebetween, Mainly provide

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910. The support column 1110 has a pair of left and right holes in the vicinity of the outer circumference of the front end portion thereof, into which screws can be screwed. A screw-in portion 1111 is formed, and a pair of upper and lower positioning bosses 1112 extending to the front side on the same plane as the tip end edge of the screw-in portion 1111 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driving side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a V-shape when viewed from the rear, and one end thereof is perforated in a circular shape in the front-rear direction and has a support column. 1110, a rotary shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by 1110; A transmission long hole 913 is drilled in a linear long hole shape from the bending point of the long main body member toward the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the other end of the long main body member supports the petal motion device 800. A support portion 914 is mainly provided.

The drive-side arm member 910 includes an inner fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted in the transmission long hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that protrudes radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162 . In conjunction with it, it rotates about the support column 1110 as an axis.

The gear housing portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is housed. A first accommodation portion 1121, a second accommodation portion 1122 connected to the first accommodation portion 1121, and a drive-side arm member arranged opposite to the first accommodation portion 1121 with the second accommodation portion 1122 interposed therebetween. It mainly includes a third accommodation portion 1123 in which an arm gear 924 fitted with 910 is accommodated.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, illustration is omitted in FIG. 165) that is supported so as to be vertically slidable by stacking a plurality of metal plates in the front-rear direction. It has an insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits into the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. placed on a line. The rigidity of the motion rail 1000R keeps the attitude of the petal motion device 800 constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole for slidably supporting the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined at an angle of about 50° in a front view so as to descend toward the left. An extension wall 1141 extending to the front side is provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven-side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 slidably supported in the support slot 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a support portion 952 that supports the petal motion device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951 , and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951 a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state in which the collar is fitted in the long support hole 1140 . Thus, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100 . That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported projection 951 and the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the width of the support slot 1140 .

166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is slidably supported in the lateral base 1000S by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported elongated holes 931 drilled in the front-rear direction in the form of elongated holes extending in the left-right direction. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 through a base-end-side elongated hole 932 that is drilled in the front-back direction in the shape of a vertically-extending elongated hole provided on the left-end side, and is provided on the right-end-side. It is connected with the second effect member 940 through a tip side insertion hole 933 drilled in the front-rear direction.

The base-side elongated hole 932 has a stop portion 932a formed at its upper end along the trajectory of the connecting projection 912 rotating around the support column 1110, and extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stop portion 932a. Mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base member 1000S is a columnar portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in a front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 in a front view, and has a threaded portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed. a plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the support column portion 1150 that has a fastening plate portion 1001S that is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted; The support projections 1002S are provided in a columnar shape to the rear side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931, and the support projections 1002S are provided circularly in the front-view right corner in the front-rear direction. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940 together with the shaft support hole 1003S, and an arc recess 1004S that is recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and similarly the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. and a protruding streak portion 1005S protruding toward the front side along an arc shape having the same center.

The support projection 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar extends from the tip of the supported projection 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931. It is arranged in the gap between them, and in this state, it is configured as a part that supports the slide plate 930 so as to be slidable by screwing a retaining screw from the tip of the support projection 1002S.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recessed portion 1004S and the protruding portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second effect member 940. It is the part that In addition, the protrusion 1005S does not contact when the second effect member 940 is in the regular position, but is formed with a protrusion height that allows contact when it is displaced from the regular position or bent. be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body part whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed in a circle centered on the shaft support 941. A shaft support pillar 941 which is provided in a columnar shape and is pivotally supported with a collar interposed in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary projection which is arranged close to the shaft support pillar 941 and is provided in a columnar shape to the rear side. A part 942 is mainly provided.

The shaft support 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S. It has an inlet 941a (see FIG. 152). A disc-shaped cover member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is arranged at the tip of the shaft support portion 941 inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S with the collar interposed therebetween, and the threaded portion 941a is screwed. The lid member 945 plays a role of retaining by screwing a screw into the . Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted through the distal end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and is prevented from coming off the slide plate 930 by fastening and fixing a circular resin collar to the distal end thereof. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip end side insertion hole 933 .

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is a protrusion that displaces near the center of the width of the arc recess 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc recess 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary projections 942 come into contact with the arc recesses 1004S to generate resistance, thereby suppressing bending deformation.

Description will be made with reference to FIG. The back plate 1100 has three screw-in portions 1161 into which screws can be screwed when fastening a plate-like support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921, and a radial outward direction from the arm gear 924 within a predetermined angle range. A detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 projecting to the top, a shaft support 1163 that rotatably supports a collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates an urging force in the direction of lifting the petal motion device 800, and a long support hole. a cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to be able to support the board cover 1000C at the lower right side of 1140; A threaded portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed is mainly provided.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the direction of movement of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even if the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use and the portion that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 in front view is missing, the screw-in portion 1006S can 2 Displacement of the production member 940 can be regulated.

In this way, the board cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are arranged in a back-and-forth layered manner and fastened to each other. 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easy to suppress vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base member 1000S even when the petal motion device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive-side arm member 910. can be done.

Next, referring to FIGS. 168 to 173, the vertical motion of the petal motion device 800 by the forward/backward motion unit 900 will be described. 1100, and FIGS. 169, 171 and 173 are rear views of the petal motion device 800 and the forward/backward motion unit 900. FIG.

168 and 169 illustrate a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and FIGS. ) is arranged at the connecting position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the proximal side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, when the driving side arm member 910 is located at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the driving side arm member 910 is aligned with the inner fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 173). 151) as a base point and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924 . Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced, and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (an idle rotation range), thereby reducing the resistance when the drive motor 921 is started. can do.

In FIGS. 170 and 171, the petal motion device 800 is slightly lowered compared to the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are kept in the same position. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal motion device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 .

From FIGS. 170 and 171 to FIGS. 172 and 173, it is visually recognized that the petal operating device 800 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked due to the interlocking of the driving side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930. can be made

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 to the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, the second effect member 940 acts as if following the petal motion device 800. It can be visually recognized as if

Next, the collection and rotation operation of the petal motion device 800 will be described. FIG. 174(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 174(b) is a front view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 174(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

175(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175(b) is a rear view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 175(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. 175(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 176(b) is a front view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 176(c) is a central shaft rotation device 850. 176(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

177(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 177(b) is a rear view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 177(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. 177(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 178(b) is a front view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 178(c) is a central shaft rotation device 850. 178(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

179(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 179(b) is a rear view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 179(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. 179(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal motion device 800 is lowered by the up-and-down motion and is at the lowest position, it changes from the initial position (collected position) shown in FIGS. 178 and 179 to the fully open position, and then perform a rotating operation (second operation) at the fully open position. operation) and return to the initial position (collecting position).

At the initial position (concentrated position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is aligned with the inner end of the central slit 814 in the slit member 810 (the end on the side of the circular opening 811). 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are at the central decorative member 868 in the center, and the flowered hibiscus as a whole. It is in a state of gathering to form a flower.

When the petals 802 are at the initial position (concentrated position) as described above, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G counterclockwise as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. As the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175(d)) is interlocked with the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175(d)), the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate clockwise as indicated by an arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotary plate 830 is fitted on the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance. can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted on the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above. Since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a torque small enough to cause the above-described rotary plate 830 to start.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially only the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, and the slit member 810 is held stationary (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

When the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, as shown in FIG. Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction while being guided by the guide rail 832 .

At this time, the movement of the slide pin 823 is restricted by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. move under the guidance of

At this time, since the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, some torque is also applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held stationary, the slide pin 823 linearly moves outward along the central slit 814 as the rotary plate 830 rotates.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start expanding radially outward from the concentrated position. In this expanding operation, as described above, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is tilted counterclockwise by an angle θ11 with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward. faster to

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction in front view, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large, but the slide pin is moved by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotary plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, so that the petals 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the case described above, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and furthermore, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed increases. Both declines become more pronounced.

Also, at this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the front view along the middle direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 from the center side end as shown in FIG. After that, it extends outward from the direction D15 while curving in an arc toward the clockwise side in the front view, and the five guide rails 832 extend outward in a spiral shape as a whole. .

As the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in this manner, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed decreases. Furthermore, the more the guide rail 832 curves in an arc toward the clockwise side in front view than the direction D15, the more remarkable the decrease in the load on the slide pin 823 and the decrease in the moving speed.

That is, in the case of the central slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by inclining the slide pin 823 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in a front view and curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830 is formed in a groove shape, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 to reduce it.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates therethrough, there is little fear of deviation. is configured to

In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, troubles such as deviation are prevented and power transmission is ensured. , and has a structure in which roles are divided.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178(d)), the five pairs of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It spreads radially to reach a fully open state, and the spreading operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially and discretely to a position continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 in a front view. A petal 802 is arranged in the . As a result, the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 can be seen together like a slightly larger hibiscus flower compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visible (see FIG. 174(b)). 178(b)).

In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end of the central slit 814, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and cannot move outward any more, the slide pin 823 is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814 thereafter. Therefore, a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805 prevents the rotary plate 830 from rotating further in the same direction as before. Therefore, by stopping the operation of the central motor 804, it is possible to maintain the fully open state after the expansion operation is finished.

After completion of the opening operation, the center motor 804 transmits rotational power in the same direction to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction as indicated by arrow A12 in FIG. 178(d) together with the rotary plate 830. In this way, after the opening operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a fully opened state as indicated by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178(b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expanding operation and the rotary plate 830 is continuously applied with rotational power, the expanding operation and the rotating operation can be performed immediately without any interval. can be transferred.

When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in front view in the fully open state as indicated by arrow A13, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise in front view) as indicated by arrow A14 in FIG. 178(b). rotate to Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the single petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 becomes larger. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

When the above rotation operation is finished, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G in the clockwise direction as indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. While being braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, first only the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction as indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b). are assembled in the opposite direction.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement, to the inner end, which is the inner limit of movement in the central slit 814, and along with this, the five pairs of petals 802 move from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 at the center. 174 and 175, and returns to the gathering state to complete the gathering operation.

Thereafter, the central motor 804 may be stopped to terminate the operation of the petal motion device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. 179(b), the first gear 804G is rotated clockwise as indicated by arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b). Rotate clockwise when viewed from the front.

When the petals 802 rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front as indicated by arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) as indicated by arrow A17 in FIG. 174(b). rotate to Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the single petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 becomes larger. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

By controlling the central motor 804 as described above, the gathering operation can be stopped and then shifted after an interval, or can be changed immediately so as to be continuous without an interval. can also be

Here, in this embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. , the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal motion device 800 is rotating by determining the output of the detection sensor 801c.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed by walls on all sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 9140 is configured in such a manner that a notch 9145b is formed in the wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and the sheet metal member 9150 protrudes along the notch 9145b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 has an internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and a lower end portion and a front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the rear side in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending upward from the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the end of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recess direction, and the depth of the recess is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 is in contact with the lower surface of a top stop projection (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) toward the back side, and the upward force generated from the interior of the foul ball passage portion 9145. configured to withstand the load.

This thin plate blade part 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage part 9145, and by pulling or loosening the thread Y8, illegally manipulates the ball inside the game area to take countermeasures against fraudulent profits. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Possible frauds are now discussed.

Returning to FIG. 148, description will be made. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with the cutting metal member 725 for cutting the string Y8 fixed to the ball. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball by utilizing the momentum of the ball being shot, but if the momentum of the ball is weak, the yarn Y8 will be cut. The ball was sometimes launched without

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146 , passes through the foul ball passage portion 145 , and is discharged to the lower tray 50 . Therefore, there is no risk that the ball will enter the game area directly.

On the other hand, for example, if the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the thread Y8 is weakly struck, and in a state where the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, the other end of the thread Y9 is hit. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the thread Y8 is placed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701). Y8 is not cut by the metal member 725 for cutting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is hit vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without being cut by the string Y8. The previously shot ball P8 passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the player's front side, and is stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who commits fraud can pull or loosen the string Y8 by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower tray 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2), etc., and gain illicit benefits.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the thread Y8 to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends thereof is used to commit a fraudulent act as described above, the thin plate blade is attached to the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when a person who commits fraud pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed on the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the thread Y8 is pulled, the thread Y8 can be arranged inside the notch 9145b, and the thin plate blade portion 9153 can rub the thread Y8.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 contacts the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145, thereby increasing the resistance force against the upward load. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 toward the outside of the foul ball passage portion 9145 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the thread Y8 to the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the thread Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153 . As a result, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be prevented from being cracked or chipped due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140 , the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is positioned lower than the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 . More specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. This makes it easier for the yarn Y8 to be damaged by the payout ball. That is, since the person who commits the fraudulent act is afraid that the fraudulent act will be discovered, after holding the ball P8, in order to prevent the store clerk from suspicion, the person should keep the ball P8 close to the body (for example, in the pocket of the trousers). ), it is easy to cheat by pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the thread Y8 is maintained in a state of extending toward the player along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (in contact with the upper surface). At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched through a position above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 by about the diameter of the ball (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when a prize ball is paid out, the ball discharged from the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 to the lower tray 50 collides with the lower tray 50 and bounces around. The bottom plate 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down toward the right while stepping on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the 53 and hitting the thread Y8, and the bottom opening arranged behind the ball removing lever 52. flow down through That is, by arranging the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 above the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the upper limit position for jumping around), the front door side lower tray The ball discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 can contact the thread Y8, increasing the possibility of damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 at an early stage.

Thirdly, the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is formed with a right inclined surface 9142a which is inclined downward toward the right. The right sloping surface 9142a makes it easy to impart a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 .

As a result, the ball can be directed toward the yarn Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball delivered to the lower tray 50 declines. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly impart a rightward (foul ball passage portion 9145 side) velocity component to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower tray 50. It is possible to increase the percentage of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, The lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area on the right side of the ball guide opening 53 (an area of about 1/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53), and a boarding restricting stepped portion is provided at the boundary thereof. 9053a is formed.

As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a consists of the right end (right edge) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 and the foul disposed on the right side of the right inclined surface 9142a. It is configured as a flat portion that connects the left end (left end side) of the bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding restriction stepped portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 and the foul ball passage portion. 9145 are communicated. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 can flow rightward along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought closer to the thread Y8.

Note that the vertical width of the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, the ball that rolls in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction stepped portion 9053a can be restricted from riding up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. In other words, the riding restricting stepped portion 9053a allows the passage of the ball in the horizontal direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (direction from right to left). Acts as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on four sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in the wall forming the foul ball passage 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 protrudes along the notch 10145c. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG.

Figures 184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed obliquely from the upper right, FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 seen from the oblique upper left, and FIG. A state seen obliquely from below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, passage forming unit 10140 differs from passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of foul ball passage portion 10145. FIG.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 includes a notch 10145c recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the rear side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. The sheet metal member 10150 is provided with thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending toward the front side in a manner covering the lower portion of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the depth of the recessedness is approximately twice the radius Ra (see FIG. 180) of the sphere (diameter). be. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole drilled in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d in which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the rear side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has an outer shape of the front view shape of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. An auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to protrude from the side surface on the back side of the . 184 and 185, the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and is omitted from the drawing in FIG.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)). It is about the radius Ra of P8. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the foul ball passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are cracked or chipped by colliding with the ball P8. , and the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

A projecting distal end 14d3 of the auxiliary projecting portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape extending toward the back side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-to-rear width) of the gap on the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 becomes wider as it is closer to the passage portion 145a. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a can be easily introduced into the clearance on the rear side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2, which is the clearance in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is located on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and a part that constitutes a forked blade portion, and extends leftward from the right end of the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153 in a manner that is slightly upwardly inclined. As a result, an acute-angled concave portion 10155 having an acute angle is formed between the first thin-plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin-plate blade portion 10154 .

Note that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, like the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute-angled concave portion 10155 is arranged on the rear side of the projecting tip 14d3 and on the front side of the rear side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, the thread Y8 can be made to enter the acute-angled recess 10155 and be easily damaged.

Since the second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side compared to the first thin plate blade portion 10153, the thread Y8 is pulled obliquely downward on the front side by the person who commits the fraudulent act. can easily enter deep into the acute recess 10155 .

A plate-like portion connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is configured to abut against the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145 d and withstand the upward load generated from inside the foul ball passage portion 10145 .

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged to face opposite left and right sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the left and right opposite directions. be. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the left-right opposite direction.

For example, a person who commits a fraudulent act releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area, thereby avoiding the discovery of the fraudulent act. However, according to this embodiment, a load is applied to the thread Y8 or the ball P8 in the left-right opposite direction at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays there.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 remain inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the length of time during which the thread Y8 is exposed to the game area can be increased, thereby expediting the discovery of fraud.

Note that an adhesive member (glue, trimming, etc.) may be disposed deep in the acute recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute recess 10155 . In this case, even if the string Y8 that is attached to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheater is cut, the string is adhered to the adhesive member provided in the acute recess 10155, and the ball P9 is returned to the game area. Since the yarn Y8 is not ejected from the yarn Y8 and is maintained there, it is possible to hasten the discovery of fraudulent use of the yarn Y8.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) that has a weak launch strength and has not reached the playing area is discharged to the lower tray 50. A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the disc passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of a resin material so as to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. A tip member 2062a is formed and arranged close to the ball firing unit 112a, and a guide member formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 between which the ball can flow down. 2062b.

A foul ball passage 2062c that communicates with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner of the interior of the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 is formed downstream of the gap V11. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width that one ball can pass through, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above it.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is disposed in the above-described embodiment. formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper tray 17 via the upper tray passage portion 161 on the main body side. When the number of balls on the upper tray 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full-tank switch (not shown) protruding inside the ball flow path on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the balls. It is configured so that the ball payout from 133 is stopped.

That is, in this embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper tray 17. FIG. Therefore, when considering the above-described fraudulent act of sticking balls to both ends of the thread Y8 and passing one of the balls through the foul ball path 2062c to make the thread Y8 enter the game area along the foul ball path 2062c. In addition, the action of damaging the yarn Y8 by striking the yarn Y8 with the payout ball can be produced regardless of the state of the balls accumulated on the upper plate 17. - 特許庁This makes it easier to cut the yarn Y8 at an early stage.

189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of outer rail 2062. FIG. In FIG. 189, a spare of the return-ball prevention member 68 disposed above the foul-ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. In addition, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 with a long metal screw B11 in such a manner that the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollowed on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68. As shown in FIG. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed which protrudes from the rear side surface of the guide member 2062b toward the front side in a cylindrical shape and has an inner wall formed with a threaded groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side abuts against the front end of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2. A long screw B11 is inserted through a through-hole drilled as a mounting hole and a through-hole 2062b5 drilled in the blocking plate 2062b4 so as to align with the through-hole. By inserting, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The upper surface and the left surface of the closing plate 2062b4, which are the sides that contact the guide member 2062b, are formed so as to match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface with the same gradient as the increased gradient portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

The slope increasing portion 2062d is sloped downward toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface forming the outer frame of the play area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is below the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) forming the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, , about ⅓ of the diameter of the sphere) intersects the tip member 2062a.

With this configuration, when the ball is shot toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower tip of the gradient increasing portion 2062d collides with the ball. can be avoided. On the other hand, when the ball that did not reach the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so the ball moves left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through and returning to the ball shooting unit 112a side beyond the tip member 2062a.

A side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d can form a cut 2062b1 with a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and allowing the thread to enter (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment) between the closing plate 2062b4 and the closing plate 2062b4. It is recessed to the back side up to the position. The cut 2062b1 is formed at a point where the path of the ball hit into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is provided with a semicircular notch 2062b3 on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 to be screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the notch 2062b1 is formed. When the thread Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends thereof is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8 can rub against the long screw B11 in the event of a fraudulent act.

That is, due to the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged deep in the notch 2062b1 when subjected to a load that pulls both ends (see FIG. 190(a)). In this state, the thread Y8 is slid in the longitudinal direction, so that the thread Y8 is rubbed against the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be quickly cut.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged closer to the front than the position through which the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being arranged at a position (vertical lower part of the center of the ball) where the ball to be shot contacts the outer rail 2062, so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the ball to be shot. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Also, a person who commits cheating through the thread Y8, to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends, through the foul ball passage 2062c, will not be able to handle the end of the thread Y8 that protrudes toward the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). 182) is pulled forward to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the yarn Y8 to enter the cut 2062c compared to when the cut 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

A button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion projecting downward is disposed in a cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed under a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the button type switch SW11 will interfere with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and is arranged so as to be able to switch between ON and OFF when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes.

Figures 190(a) and 190(b) are partial front enlarged views of foul ball passage 2062c. FIG. 190(a) shows a state in which the weight portion 68a2 of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c by the weight of the weight portion 68a2. A state in which the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the opening/closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 190(a), the route of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is shown for reference, and the button type switch SW11 is shown to be ON, and FIG. 190(b) shows the button type switch. It is illustrated that SW11 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), the return-ball preventing member 68 only gives a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul-ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away under its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening/closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state shown in 190(a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190(a) is restored by the next timing when the ball is guided to the foul ball passage 2062c (0.6 seconds at the shortest). because it can

On the other hand, the ball-return preventing member 68 provides great resistance to an object that does not flow away like a ball, for example, an object that advances while filling the passage, such as an endoscope. This is a structure as an anti-fraud measure.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, reaches the inside of the game area, and attempts to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, Bending a nail (not shown) planted in the game board 13, grasping a ball and putting it into the winning slot, using the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning slot, and emitting a laser from the tip (e.g. cutting nails).

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of foul ball passageway 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 191, the outline of a device such as an endoscope that is illegally intruded is illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the present embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is displaced while advancing. Become. Here, when the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is displaced by the distal end portion of the endoscope) shifts to the state shown in FIG. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2 and maintains the weight portion 68a2 in a state of being pushed up. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to disengage the opening/closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is impossible to prevent fraud. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, an alarm may be sounded when the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined period of time. , fraud can be detected early.

Also, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button type switch SW11 is turned on immediately. (see FIG. 190(a)), the period during which the ball is not put out from the payout device 133 can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, the state in which the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 is stopped can be maintained.

It should be noted that the member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c need not be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in this embodiment, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side of the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, can be exchanged for As a result, compared to the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, it has the effect of being able to play a role in preventing fraudulent acts before replacement, and the trouble of forgetting and searching for a storage place can be saved. It is possible to achieve the effect of Further, it is not necessary to include the entire structure of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported by a fixed shaft (the support member 68b may not be provided).

Also, if the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and is replaced, whether or not the above-described fraudulent action prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of damage to the return ball prevention member 68. From the point of view of the person committing fraud, it is difficult to maintain a deterrent to fraudulent activity by not knowing whether or not the replacement has been made, and even if it has been replaced, the degree of damage cannot be known. can.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal motion device 800 rotates only at the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal motion device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even at the expanded position. configured in a manner. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end and a and a restricting portion 2888 projecting from the extended tip of the flange portion 2887 toward the rear side. The loose fitting device 2880 of this embodiment differs from the loose fitting device 880 of the eighth embodiment only in the rear cover 2886, and other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880. .

The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 . That is, the restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position where it can contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a single flange portion 2887 and a single restricting portion 2888 are arranged, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886 . Next, actions of the flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194. FIG.

193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal motion device 2800, and FIGS. 194(a) and 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. . 193 and 194 show an operation example of the petal operating device 2800 in chronological order. is illustrated.

194(a) and 194(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section. Also, in FIG. 193, the petal 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 is shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), a pair of threaded portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are provided with opposite threaded portions centered on the screw insertion portion 803H. It has a sloped surface 2803T that slopes away from 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is formed to be inclined by about 30° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The action of the restricting portion 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( Rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in a front view), restricting portion 2888 and front side portion 802b of petal 802 come into contact, and petal 802 receives a load from restricting portion 2888.

When the petals 802 are further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front) while the petals 802 are receiving the load from the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802 receive the load. To do so, change your posture.

At this time, the sliding member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the posture can be changed to an inclined posture with respect to the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides. Petals 802 undergo posture changes as much as possible.

As the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 change their postures in this manner, the load from the restricting portion 2888 is shed, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), only the narrow slide ribs 803a of the slide member 2820 are in contact with the slits 815 on both sides. can move smoothly in the longitudinal direction.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the sliding member 2820 contacts the slits 815 on both sides with the slide rib 803a against the outer inner wall, and with the inclined surface 2803T against the inner inner wall. (pressed), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance is remarkable. Since the inclined surfaces 2803T are in contact with the inner walls of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the short direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. .

Therefore, in the tilted posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 against the movement of the slits 814 and 815 in the longitudinal direction increases, so that the slide member 2820 reaches the ends of the slits 814 and 815. without waiting, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the slide member 2820 in the normal posture and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the inclined position).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193(b), the rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is started. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petals 802 move away from the restricting portion 2888, the load applied to the petals 802 from the restricting portion 2888 can be released.

195 is a front view of petal motion device 2800. FIG. Note that FIG. 195 shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193(b).

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal actuator 2800 can be rotated in the expanded position. At this time, the rear cover 2886 rotates in a direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) opposite to the rotating direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is greater than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so the position during expansion is maintained. In this state, the petals 802 can be rotated forward and backward.

196(a), 196(b) and 197 are front views of the petal motion device 2800. FIG. 196(a), 196(b), and 197 show how the petals 802 move from the expanded position to the collected position in time series.

In FIG. 196(a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. When the rotating plate 830 rotates further in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. returned.

Furthermore, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830. The rotational motion of 802 subsides and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petals 802 can be automatically rotated at the spreading position and then returned to the gathered position.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where it abuts against the restricting portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, ), contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided, so it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate it at the fully open position.

The restricting portion 2888 may be placed at a position where it does not come into contact with the petals 802 at the gathered position or at the fully opened position, or at a position where the petals 802 slightly change their posture even if they come into contact with the petals 802 rotating at the fully opened position. By locating the position where the restricting portion 2888 can be slipped through and the load can be received, the restricting portion 2888 can be prevented from hindering the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

Further, as shown in this embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it can be used as a mark as to whether it passes through a position near or far from the star-shaped pattern. Depending on the distance, the petal 802 can be expanded to the maximum and rotated, or can be expanded halfway and rotated.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win varies depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. It is possible to make the pattern of the mold function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation part 2888 can be used as part of the effect device.

Note that the restricting portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, there is no need to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 in terms of design, so the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 abutting against the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing its posture may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win). In this case, depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating, or are rotating while abutting the restricting portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture (flutteringly), it is possible to change the meaning and content conveyed to the player. .

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts against the restricting portion 2888 is the leading end position. The degree of spreading varies. Therefore, even with the configuration in which the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the rear cover 2886, it is possible to change the extent of expansion of the petals 802 when the attitude thereof changes.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. FIG. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates along with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanded position has been described. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be switchable between the case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently depending on the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 show, in chronological order, an operation example of the petal motion device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 198(a) when viewed from the front. 198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rails 832 of the rotating plate 830 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 rotate together, exceeding the resistance applied, the description is omitted here.

198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view, the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 , so that the slide member 2820 that receives the load from the guide rail 832 Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (see FIG. 198(b)). In this embodiment, additional concave portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815b are formed on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that displaces in this way.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that, of the walls extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814, the wall portion on the clockwise side in front view is recessed so as to widen the width of the central slit 814. Among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a provided and the both side slits 815 arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front, the two side slits 815 are formed in the wall portions on the clockwise side when viewed from the front. A clockwise side recessed portion 3815a that is recessed to increase the width in the lateral direction of the center slit 814, and a wall portion that extends along the radial direction of both side slits 815 that are arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. Among them, it mainly includes a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in the wall portion on the clockwise side in a front view so as to widen the width of the slits 815 on both sides in the lateral direction.

The clockwise recessed portion 3815a is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the central recessed portion 3814a extends continuously from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198(a)). formed in

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recess depth greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is positioned facing the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803 toward the rotation center of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198(a)). is continuously formed.

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and has a longer radial length than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The action when the rotating plate 830 of the petal motion device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described. First, when the rotating plate 830 starts to rotate clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(b)).

As a result, the contact between the counterclockwise side walls of the both-side slits 815 and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in front view, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move toward the contact portion between the clockwise concave portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member). 3810, the first contact portion) is used as a fulcrum to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 199(a) and 199(b)).

Note that the center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b are deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a. contact with the central recessed portion 3814a and contact between the screw-in portion 2803S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b.

Further, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are recessed to a depth that does not abut the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A turning side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 falls below the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together.

As shown in FIG. 199(b), the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of threaded portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are perpendicular to each other. When the radial center side slide rib 803a housed in the clockwise side slits 815 abuts against the walls of the both side slits 815, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move around the contact portion as a fulcrum when viewed from the front. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a moves counterclockwise in a front view from the base end of the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move radially (see FIG. 194(a)). The flat plate member 2803 can be moved radially toward the center.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. , the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the attitude of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) can be made to perform movements that could not be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 194(b) )), until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) rotate (rotate together with the slit member 3810). rotational movement) intervenes (see Figures 195, 196(a) and 196(b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (Fig. 198 ( a)), and by rotating the rotary plate 830 clockwise in front view, the attitudes of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be restored (see FIG. 199(b)). That is, until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) are rotated (rotated along with the slit member 3810). can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (Fig. 198(a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise from an arbitrary state (phase or orientation) in front view, the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or orientation) are rotated. From the position of the clamped petals 802, the slide member 2820 and plate member 2803 can begin to move toward the gathered position. As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) rotate (see FIG. 195) in the middle of expanding (see FIG. 198(a)), and then reach the collected position. (See FIG. 197), the arrangement of the petals 802 can be diversified when the petals 802 gather and the movement of the petal movement device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed of a plate with no opening has been described. A plurality of through holes 8326 a to 8326 c are formed through the wall portion 8326 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 200, 201, 202(a) and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202(a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202(b) illustrates the tilting device 310 in the first state. A state in the middle of changing from state 1 to state 2 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, in the operation device 8300 of this embodiment, the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is not explained in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 of the above-described embodiments. There is, and the rest of the configuration is almost already explained in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described below, and other configurations will be limited to a few supplementary descriptions.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is bored in a substantially oval shape at the left-right central position. and the first through hole 8326a formed on the right and left sides of the vibrating device 5400. When viewed in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, the cross-sectional shape of the bottom plate portion 321 has a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape. A pair of second through holes 8326b drilled along the bottom plate portion 321 and connecting the upper surface and the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at surface positions, and a pair of third through holes 8326b drilled at the left and right corners to have a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a through hole 8326c.

Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c has the purpose of facilitating the downward passage of liquid such as drinking water, and the purpose of facilitating removal of coin-shaped foreign objects inserted into gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. and a through hole. For example, a coin-shaped foreign object may cause the tilting device 310 and the upper frame to cause the tilting device 310 and the upper frame to cause a player to stop the tilting device 300 forcibly, or a curious player to cause the tilting device 310 and the upper frame to become meaningless. It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330 and the member 330 .

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310 . By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but on the other hand, the possibility of foreign objects being inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 increases.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around a ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) arranged at the end on the back side, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the tilting position is closer to the rear end, the longer the tilting device 310 is in the front-rear direction, the more likely it is to be misaligned (deformed) to the left or right near the end on the front side. Note that this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (deformation) is included.

Therefore, in normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both left and right sides is designed so as not to be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a one-yen coin). Also, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the left and right sides (for example, to the left), the gap V13 created on the other side (for example, to the right) is formed between the upper frame member 330 and the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. The gap V13 has a size obtained by summing the gaps V13 formed between and, and can be a size that allows a coin-shaped foreign object to be inserted.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is misaligned to the left or right, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted.

Also, the gap V14 between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction is also formed by the tilting device 310 using the backlash near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14(b)) of the tilting device 310. Since the gap V14 can be easily enlarged by applying a load toward the rear side to shift (deform) the gap V14, a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 tilts with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in either the left or right gap V13 or the front-rear direction gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, the coin There is a possibility that a foreign object with a shape may enter the lower frame member 8320 .

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b), when the left and right walls of the tilting device 310 are formed in a shape that narrows left and right inward toward the center of the vertical direction, it is easy to fit the fingers of the player. On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 202(a)), the coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V13 protrudes outward from the constriction of the case main body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, making it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. FIG. In addition, rubbing between the coin-shaped foreign matter and the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate the translucency of the protective lens member 311i, which may interfere with the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, the operation device 8300 cannot perform the intended effect, so the coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. It is desirable to remove it as soon as possible when it is discovered, but if the lower frame member 320 is not formed with a through hole, it is necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, so that coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described below.

203(a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203(b) is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. FIG. 203(d) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 along line CCIIId-CCIIId of FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 8300 along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe; FIG.

The first through-hole 8326a has the same center in the horizontal direction as the center in the horizontal direction of the vibrating device 5400, and is drilled with a lateral width larger than the lateral width of the vibrating device 5400 (the first accommodating portion 5431 of the vibrating device 5400, see FIG. 58). be. Therefore, even if liquid such as drinking water is poured into the vicinity of the left-right central position of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. Liquids can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400 .

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h, the upper surface of the extension portion 311h is inclined (horizontally when viewed vertically in the second state). an inclination D81 downwardly inclined toward the center of the left and right in the first state of the tilting device 310 due to being curved toward the tilting device 310; 201), coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while the coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed, so that the lower frame member 8320 can be designed freely. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily ensured compared to the case where the first through-hole 8326a needs to be widened to the left and right.

In this embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is such that the portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object. It is assumed that the size is equal to or larger than the size of the target object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a horizontal width and a vertical width of approximately 30 [mm].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens member 313, which are continuously arranged on the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313, are mirror-finished in the present embodiment (mirror-finished member is fixed), the light passing through the spherical shell portion 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first through hole 8326a is used to make a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When a coin-shaped foreign object is placed at a position that partially closes the first through hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player is It is weaker than when there is no foreign matter (a coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, since it is possible to make it easy to notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame can be easily detected. The possibility of remaining on the member 8320 can be reduced. This effect is obtained not only when viewed through the first through hole 8326a, but also when viewed through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

The second through-hole 8326b is configured as a through-hole that can discharge a coin-shaped foreign object fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lateral width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is formed with a width of about 2 [mm] in the normal direction.

Since the second through-hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the bottom plate portion 321 in the left-right direction, even after a coin-shaped foreign object slides down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321, it can be easily removed. Coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed immediately.

Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, the liquid such as drinking water that flows along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be utilized for forward outward discharge.

The third through hole 8326c has a central axis along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203(a)), and removes coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310. It is formed as a through-hole that can be removed in its upright state (posture).

That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be set to a size that allows coin-shaped foreign matter to be discharged when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. , the third through-hole 8326c has a length of about 30 mm and a width of about 2 mm when viewed along the surface of the bottom plate 321 .

When removing the coin-shaped foreign matter, the worker can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the covering cover 370 to expose the operation device 8300 in a front view (see FIG. 92). The covering cover 370 has a fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body curved portion 371 fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by a screw inserted in the front-rear direction, and a drooping portion 372 recessed by a screw inserted in the vertical direction. Since it is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the installation portion 15a is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws while the front frame 14 is open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be shortened.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to easily remove coin-shaped foreign objects that have entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 without disassembling the operation device 8300 .

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that opens outward to the right at the lower right corner of the body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)). Including each embodiment described above, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, the operation can be easily performed by removing the screw that fastens the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14 . Therefore, if a replacement for a normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be quickly replaced with a normal operation device 8300 .

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to malfunction, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly restarted.

Next, referring to FIG. 204, a fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the board support device 600 does not receive the load from the front frame 14 when it is in the fixed state has been described. The load from the front frame 14 is received via the front-rear displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be able to abut on the front frame 14 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

204(a) and 204(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 204(a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and in FIG. 204(b), the front frame 14 is shown closed with respect to the Also, in FIG. 204(a), the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified, and in FIG. 204(b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are respectively illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (the plate portion arranged on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 can be vertically displaced; A longitudinally displacing member 2652 arranged to be able to abut on the lower end of the vertically displacing member 2651 and supported so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction; A support portion 2654 fixed to the plate portion 611a, which is a portion that sandwiches the member 2652 from above and below so as to be displaceable at two front and rear portions, and a front side of the front-rear displacement member 2652 that abuts on the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653. and a biasing member 2655, such as a coil spring, that applies a biasing force toward.

The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in which it abuts against the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board support device 600 and a state in which it separates. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204(a), it retreats from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. Deform the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204(a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at a position with a slight gap from the torsion spring NBb at the lower position. is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is placed at a front position (see FIG. 204(a)) where it is pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655, and at a position where it is pushed backward by the front frame 14. 204(b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a is formed at the rear end portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652, the inclined surface 2652a being inclined downward toward the end side. The inclined surface 2652a extends from a vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is arranged at the front position to a vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 with the longitudinal displacement member 2652 arranged at the rear position. , is a continuous inclined plane.

The inclined surface 2652a has an inclination angle and a forming range such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned downward at the front position of the front/rear displacement member 2652, and the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at the upper position at the rear position of the front/rear displacement member 2652. set.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is increased by the thickness in the front-rear direction. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load that the post-rotation pawl member 640 applies to the game board 13 from the back side, and to facilitate maintaining the state in which the game board 13 abuts the hanging back plate portion 621d of the pre-rotation pawl member 620. The distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the rear surface of the front frame 14 (the rear surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore, it is possible to easily define the thickness of the game area, and to stabilize the flow of the ball.

Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, namely that the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, so a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring used in the eighth embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, when the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb can be reduced. Since it is possible to reduce the force that causes this, it is possible to improve the operator's degree of freedom in selection and workability.

Next, referring to FIG. 205, a fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid above the reverse cup portion 178 to prevent the intrusion into the inside of the reverse cup portion 178 by melting the reverse cup portion 178 with a heated piano wire. A case has been described in which burning due to a heated piano wire is detected to detect fraud at an early stage. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205(b) and 205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. FIG. In addition, FIG. 205(b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a contracted shape, and FIG. be done. 205(b) and 205(c), the fraud detection device 2280 is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position in the front and rear of the main body box portion 2281. As shown in FIG.

The fraud detection device 2280 includes a main body box portion 2281 which is configured in a box-like shape with openings on the back side and the bottom side and is superimposed on the reverse cup portion 2178, and a back side so as to cover the back side opening of the main body box portion 2281. and a rear lid member 2282 attached from the main body box portion 2281 and the rear lid member 2282 .

The body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, and includes an extension portion 2283 that extends from the lower right corner and contacts the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of the reverse cup portion 2178, and an opening that narrows upward from the lower corner. A constricted portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, a projecting portion 2285 protruding upward from near the edge of the upper end opening of the constricted portion 2284, and a recessed portion 2285 recessed from the back side of the left side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. A first conductive portion 2286 that is housed in a concave portion of the body box portion 2281, one end of which protrudes outside the body box portion 2281, and the other end of which extends in the left-right direction inside the body box portion 2281, and the right wall portion of the body box portion 2281. It is housed in a recess recessed from the back side, one end protrudes outside the main body box part 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box part 2281 and contacts the upper surface of the first conducting part 2286. A second conduction part 2287 formed with a length that allows contact, a torsion spring SP15 that generates a biasing force that presses the second conduction part 2287 against the first conduction part 2286, and a shape memory spring 2288 supported by the portion 2285 and arranged below the second conducting portion 2287 .

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. The first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are each connected at one end of separate wiring to the portion protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is connected to the main control device. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205 ( c)), the conduction is cut off, and the interruption of the conduction is used as an input and controlled to output an error signal.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the ball dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) stops the dispensing of balls, etc., and continues. It is controlled so that it is impossible to play a game by

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205( a ) to 205 ( c ), the body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178 . Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in this embodiment, the formation location of the wall portion 2178a is displaced to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extended portion 2283 is provided between the long cover member 173 and the elongated cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire still covers the long cover member 173. can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and advances further is guided by the constricted portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 that is arranged in the upper opening of the constricted portion 2284. be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is made of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining its deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to its pre-memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to about the melting point of the reverse cup portion 2178 (approximately 80°), and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205(c)) is stored in advance. .

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is disconnected and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of fraud can be achieved.

An extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a that is vertically elongated and is drilled in the front and back direction in the back cover member 2282, and extends to the front side. overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the low temperature state after being in the tension state, the operator pushes down the extension part 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and contract the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205(b)). ) can be changed back again. That is, even after the fraudulent act is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent act.

Next, referring to FIG. 206, a sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved so that the traveling directions of the light emitted from both sides are different. , the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment has recesses with different shapes for each region. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) is an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206(c) schematically shows the downward recessed portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of a light guide member 2540 schematically shown in FIG. 206(a), and FIG. 206(e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206(e) schematically shows an upward concave portion 2543e provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVIe of FIG. 206(a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. Note that the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically in a straight line according to the shape of the light guide member 2540. FIG.

On both sides of the light guide member 2540, concave portions are formed in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment. can be changed.

That is, with the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, an area CCVIb arranged above and on the side of the inner lens member 530, an area CCVIc arranged above and on the side of the outer lens member 550, and an area CCVIc arranged below and on the side of the inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between the region CCVId arranged on the side and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206(b), in the area CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the upper side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction at the position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543b refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(c), in the area CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is heat-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface is arranged on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. , it is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(d), in the region CCVId, a downward concave portion 2543d is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has flat surfaces on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. , it is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543d refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(e), in the region CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. , it is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543e refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as in the eighth embodiment (an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of approximately 1 mm cone). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is slightly refracted vertically and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, with the configuration described above, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the light is allowed to travel toward the inner lens member 530 in the direction in which the light is collected, and toward the outer lens member 550 in the direction in which the light spreads. can be made That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is possible to give a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides thereof, so that the left-right width of the right panel unit 2500 can be suppressed and the lighting performance can be achieved. You can improve the effect.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed downward has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, so the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the end of the push has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for effects (for example, a "button that cannot be pushed" effect can be performed. can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 has moved to the end of the operation (the end of the extension operation), the voice coil motor 352 cannot move because of the dimensional relationship that causes a slight gap between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320 . and the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact sound due to collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 operates. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is protruding in advance, and it is possible to make the player aware that it is in the state of "a button that cannot be pushed" only when the tilting device 310 is pushed. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are fixed relative to each other has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. As shown in FIG. In this case, for example, it is possible to change the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first projecting portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other. It is possible to change the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises immediately after changing the posture of the rotating claw member 347 . Therefore, it is possible to form more operation states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

In addition, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be sequentially switched) by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the drive motor 342 and perform a complex operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched to a raised position.

In the third embodiment, the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operation speed and the direction of the operation of the tilting device 310. However, this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that drives the weight member 5412 to rotate may be controlled by the operating speed and the operating direction of the tilting device 310 . For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the end of pushing (during the downward movement), the drive motor 5411 is fixed so that the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is positioned above the rotation axis, and the tilting device 310 pushes. The rotation operation of the driving motor 5411 may be started immediately before starting to move upward after reaching the terminal end. In this case, the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced while the tilting device 310 is repeatedly pushed, and the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be increased when the tilting device 310 starts to move upward. .

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the holding member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside thereof. When the housing member 5430 is fixed to the tilting device 310, for example, the projecting leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321, and when the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the pushing end, the projecting leg By setting the portion 5424 to be pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 can be changed, and whether or not the weight member 5412 can contact the housing member 5430 can be switched. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated. By increasing the amount of deformation of the weight member 5412, a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts against the housing member 5430 can be formed. That is, the player can feel the vibration not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the push end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, the third symbol display device 81 displays "Press the button." A great chance.", it is possible to provide an effect for the player to specify how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in the specified way of pressing is set as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to operate and to prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

As for the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in a manner in which they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the slow pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 by force.

In the above-described fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the player can feel the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the housing member 5430 in a state in which the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, the weight member can 5412 may be formed in such a manner as to be arranged so as to be unable to abut on housing member 5430 . In this case, while the tilting device 310 is not operated, the vibration can be transmitted to the player to make the effect lively, while the vibration is stopped when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, which is a method that is difficult for the surroundings to notice. Therefore, it is possible to produce a premium feeling that only the player who is playing the machine can perceive the change in the production mode, excluding the surrounding players. can.

As a variation of the effect, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the accommodation member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot contact each other, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodation member 5430 continue. It is desirable to have both the case where the weight member 5412 can contact with the weight member 5412 , and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412 . For example, two different cases can occur due to the difference in the direction of rotation of the weight member 5412 .

In the above-described fifth embodiment, the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other to generate a frictional force. do not have. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is formed partially protrudes in a direction approaching the disk cam 5344, and is configured to abut when the disk cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed. can be In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a moving part, a greater frictional force is ensured between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 than when the disc cam 5344 and the operable releasing member 346 are in contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut against the front frame 14, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to contact the front frame 14 . For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600, the case in which the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side. It may be configured to be arranged below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear-side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom, the game board 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable to form a path that is long in the front-rear direction directly behind the ball guide opening 53, because the ball can be ejected smoothly. Further, by making the path curved back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, thereby preventing interference between the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145. can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 is concave has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be convex. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Moreover, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straightly extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a vertically curved path, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 contacts the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection wire 453 can be clamped between the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the clamping resistance causes the speaker connection wire 453 to be pulled out of the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, even if a load of 100 psi is applied, it is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from coming off the speaker 451 .

Further, the auxiliary projection 481Ha abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H in the thickness direction within the range of the projection length corresponding to the recess depth of the wiring passage recess 464. In the range of length, a step may be formed in the middle such that the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H are separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the range where the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H form a double wall is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex speaker in which the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chambers, and the intermediate body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by extending the width of the intermediate main body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to the same extent as that of the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal side main body portion 461T, the proximal side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal side main body portion 461T can be A large speaker room may be configured with

Also, although the base end side main body portion 461B has a larger volume than the distal end side main body portion 461T, the size relationship may be reversed, and the capacities may be the same. The placement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be the center in the left and right direction, or a position between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e forming the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions extend in the left-right direction (the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T). The connecting direction, the direction intersecting with the opening direction of the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491) has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portion 467d and rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the horizontal direction. In this case, the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent like a maze. It is possible to suppress cheating by making it difficult to cheat by intruding the tip into the game area and prolonging the time required for the cheating. Here, the suppression of fraudulent activity includes suppression of fraudulent activity itself, suppression of gaining fraudulent profit from fraudulent activity (successful fraudulent activity), and the like.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotating plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked, the loose fitting device 880 rotates not only during the rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 but also during the spreading operation and the gathering operation. can be made As a result, the petals 802 can be slid in the radial direction and the decorative member 884 can be rotated at the same time, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotary plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract as the rotating plate 830 rotates, or may rotate on an axis different from the rotation axis of the rotating plate 830 .

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting a driving force through the slide plate 930 that slides according to the operation of the drive arm member 910, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal motion device 800 and the tip of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 is operated based on the displacement of the petal motion device 800. can be In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the above eighth embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the case where the operation portion back surface member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening/closing regulation portion 159 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface supporting device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to contact each other in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing regulation part 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board surface support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game As the right side of the board 13 tilts toward the front side, the portion of the game board 13 facing the operation section back member 155 is also displaced toward the front side, causing the operation section back member 155 and the game board 13 to interfere with each other. be able to. This prevents the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12 .

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 Whether or not 600 is in a fixed state is determined by the relationship between the operation part back member 155 arranged opposite to the board surface support device 600 on the lower side and the game board 13, and the board surface arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 is determined. When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the closing of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 can be restricted. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 may be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600 . In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 made of synthetic resin can be less likely to be damaged by colliding with the board support device 600 made of metal. can be used for a long time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the above eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 from which the light irradiated to the end face of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86 . In this case, for example, the state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and the case in which the other surface is arranged on the front side can be switched (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate about an axis, it is possible to switch the mode of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 . In addition, by switching the mode of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 and the correspondence with the moving accessory projecting inside the center frame 86, it is possible to diversify the effects.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is placed in a state where one surface is arranged on the front side and the other surface is arranged on the front side. Consider switching between the case of being arranged on the front side and the case of being arranged on the front side. When the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged opposite to the portion corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the portion near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member When the surface on the side of 560 faces the side of the moving object, the moving objects arranged opposite to each other over a wide area of the opening 565 (in a wide range compared to the opening 524 at the top) emit light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, it is possible to switch the light emitting position of the moving accessory.

In this case, for example, by moving the moving accessory in time with the timing of the change in the light-emitting portion, it is possible to improve the presentation effect. For example, at the timing when the surface on the side of the inner cover member 520 faces the moving accessory, the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 is reduced and changed so as to fit in the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524, while the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 faces the moving accessory. At the timing of turning the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) in the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to change the position to emit light in accordance with the action of the moving accessory by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a that controls light emission.

In addition, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (brightness increases, the amount of light increases, and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side becomes clear). Diffused (lower brightness, lower light intensity, faint emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting target (liquid crystal or moving accessory).

Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed so that the front side end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving object or the liquid crystal). , the front side end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to the posture that is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), so that beam-like (narrow) light is emitted to the moving object and the liquid crystal. While irradiating, light can be emitted over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or liquid crystal. As a result, it is possible to light up a wide range of positions away from the moving role and the liquid crystal while only the details of the moving role and the liquid crystal are illuminated.

In the ninth and tenth embodiments described above, the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 cut the thread Y8, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken portion is so fragile that it falls, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position through which the broken portion falls. Also good. In this case, due to the detection of the sheet metal member by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the launch of the ball is forcibly stopped. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss suffered by the gaming machine hall) obtained by a person who commits fraudulent acts.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve frictional force may be added. For example, the frictional force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or by arranging a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810). The movement resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810 .

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can be inserted into the walls of the both side slits 815 arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T. may be formed. In this case, it is possible to improve the motion resistance by inserting the inclined surface 2803T into the recessed portion.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, by changing the shape of the recessed portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the direction in which light travels can be changed to the direction in which the light is collected or the direction in which the light is spread. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is inclined upward in all of the areas CCVIb to CCVIe. Towards, the light can be made easier to travel. As a result, the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, downward concave portions 2543c are formed in the regions CCVIc and CCVIe, which are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530, and upward concave portions 2543b are formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId, which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. may be formed. In this case, the light that travels in the opposite direction to the player playing pachinko 8010, and the light that is emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined upward. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of the person walking on the floor, the light that travels toward the player side and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is in a downwardly inclined direction. Therefore, for example, it is possible to illuminate the ball stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the players playing the game while improving the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010 .

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Points where the player pushes in the direction from the back to the front>
In an operation device having operation means that a player pushes in, the operation device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position in which the operation means protrudes from the first state with respect to the player. and a biasing means for biasing the operating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the pressing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the depth side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is directed to the side.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the performance is performed in a manner that heightens the player's expectation of a big win at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , it was necessary to design the operating means with high strength. In this case, there is a problem that the operation means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operation means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that a straightforward up and down linear motion is performed. By causing the slippage between the player's hand and the operating means, the momentum of pushing can be released.

In addition, considering the game posture of the player, when pushing the operation means around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force in the front direction, so the force applied to the operation means by the player should be naturally weakened. can be done.

In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is rotatable about an axial rod arranged on the far side for the player, tilts up and down about the axial rod, and has the operation means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized by comprising a tilting means, wherein the tilting means is arranged so that the operating means faces the opposite direction of the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured in a manner to rotate, and in the second state, the operation means is arranged in the direction opposite to the player, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from performing an operation of hitting the operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft and tilting the hand around that position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be easily pushed in, so that a new pushing operation method with less acceleration can be provided. , it is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

The new push operation method is, for example, placing the outer side of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft, placing the hand near the operation means with the palm up and down, and then turning the thumb side toward the operation means. A method in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft and the palm is placed facing the operation means, and then a method in which the palm is dropped toward the operation means is exemplified. be done.

A gaming machine A3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is vertical.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operation means in the first state is the vertical direction. It is possible to prevent breakage due to the pushing operation in the state.

In the game machine A3, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can be automatically operated, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force for the automatic operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it acts in the direction of one side and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is directed in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the player. can be prevented from working. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operation.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pushed, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled in the opposite direction by the player when the button is retracted and receiving a high load.

In the game machine A4, a maintenance state that maintains the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and the maintenance means is operated by the driving means. a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, wherein the rotating means is capable of phase change between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while the maintaining means is maintained; In the first phase and the second phase, when the maintenance state is canceled, the range in which the operation means can move is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation A gaming machine A5 configured to be capable of canceling the maintaining state.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintaining means is kept in the maintained state, and in the phase after the change, the movement to release the maintained state is rotated. The movement width of the operation device can be changed by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the biasing means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating means. , a game machine A6 configured such that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so the mode of movement is limited to one way. Since it is possible to add a moving mode of moving following the maintaining means to the operating means, it is possible to increase the types of moving modes of the operating means. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device can be improved.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, light emitting means disposed inside the operation device and emitting light toward the player is provided, and the second state is more favorable than the first state. However, from a player's point of view, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is more illuminated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view than the first state. Since the irradiation range of the emitted light is expanded and the area of the operation means is reduced, the player can be made to pay attention to the light and the performance effect can be improved, and at the same time, it is difficult to press the operation means unless aiming. By adopting this mode, it is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operation means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means is changed by moving the operation means toward and away from the display means. Characterized game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, the operation means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operation means moves toward and away from the display means to emit light from the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from reflecting on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<The point of making the repulsive force at normal times small while making it possible to respond to repeated hits>
A first state and a second state in which the movable range of operation to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state in the operation device having the operation means that allows the player to perform the operation to the terminal position. and includes first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state in accordance with the player's operation.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the force for returning the operation means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the automatic operation of the operation means is performed by the drive motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and if the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to repeat the operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the biasing force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. By pushing back the operation means with the two drive means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with repeated hitting determination means for determining whether or not a repeated hitting operation is being performed based on a sensor detection value of the stroke operation means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is operated based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, whether or not to drive the second drive means is determined based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means, so the player does not perform repeated hitting operations (for example, single pressing operation, long pressing, and so on). It is possible to prevent the second driving means from operating even when the player is performing an operation, etc., and the player feels the load of pushing back the hand.

In the gaming machine B2, terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position shifted by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. position difference detection means for detecting; and movement direction determination means for determining the direction of movement of the operation means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal end detection means and the detection value of the position difference detection means; a game machine B3 characterized in that the second drive means is driven when the direction of movement determined by is the direction from the end of the push-in to return to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction of returning from the end of the push to the first state, that is, when the player's hand moves away from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second driving device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, and placing a high load on the player's hand.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, the second drive means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate the driving force for moving the operating means.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means includes a drive motor for rotating an eccentric weight and elastically supports the drive motor on the support frame. a supporting means, wherein the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state toward the position of the second state increases as the operating means approaches the terminal position. The game machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame in a state in which the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, thereby generating a driving force.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is unnecessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame based on the arrangement of the operation means at the end position. A game machine B6 characterized by.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame. By doing so, the drive motor can be moved away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in the direction away from the support frame (the direction toward the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and vibration effect device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operation means, the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, measuring means for measuring the speed of the operation means from the detection interval of the detection sensors, and the measurement means threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold; The driving force generated by the repulsion means increases when the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the player's light operation is emphasized, the operation resistance will be low, and there is a risk that the operation means will be damaged by the player's operation. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility of damage to the operating means can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases, and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for weak players. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the threshold determination means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold, and if it is equal to or higher than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, it is possible to improve operability and prevent destruction by the repulsion means.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and when the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and driving the voice coil motor in advance before the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operation means is arranged at a position capable of coming into contact with the voice coil motor. Game machine C2 to play.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means can be arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before moving, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the operation means is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor. While suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, the degree of braking the operation means can be gradually improved, and the sense of discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operation means by means of spring elasticity. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by means of spring elasticity. can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the value measured by the threshold value determining means when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value to the case where the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a movable area of an end portion of said repulsion means opposite to a side contacting said operation means is narrowed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means, which is the end opposite to the side that contacts the operation means, is narrowed, thereby making it possible to operate the operation means. A higher velocity can increase the elastic force generated by the repulsive means.

<Damage of the driving means is prevented by interrupting the transmission of the driving force with the clutch>
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, a releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the releasing means releasing the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means through the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the operation means is automatically operated for the effect, if the operation means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the canceling means cancels the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means while the operation means is automatically operating, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the game machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and during driving in the first direction, The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the game machine is being driven in the second direction.

Here, when whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depends on the direction of operation of the driving means, the operating means is operated by the player when the driving means is driven in the direction of operation in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be canceled. Then, there is a possibility that a large load is generated on the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom of performance is reduced when the operating means is operated to effect performance.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the unlocking direction or in the unlocking direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward. Toggles whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, two modes of button operation can be created (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the driving force must be interrupted in both cases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both driving directions regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of action in the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

It should be noted that, as a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch is moved in a direction intersecting with the operating direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes biasing means for biasing the driving means and the transmission means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the release means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmission means. and engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force when they are engaged with each other. A game machine D3, characterized in that the game machine D3 has a shape that tapers away from the contact surface and is inclined with respect to the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the release means applies the driving force in the engaged state on the contact surfaces of the pressing means. On the other hand, since both surfaces facing the direction of movement of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are tapered away from the abutment surfaces, the engagement between the engaging teeth causes the transmission means to move from the driving means. It is possible to separate them, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, a biasing force is constantly applied by the biasing means between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means is separated from the driving means, the biasing force acts in the direction of movement of the driving means via the engagement teeth. load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is cancelled.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means increases, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically reinstated, rather than completely de-resistance away. As a result, when the player releases the button, the button can be started to operate within a short period of time.

That is, when the button is driven "as an effect", if the player is holding the button, one phase of the button operation will pass. In addition, if the player releases the hand in the middle of the game, if the player moves from the end of the first phase, the period during which the button is stopped becomes long, and the feeling that "the player starts to move because the load on the player has been released" is reduced. escape.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operation means can be started within a short period of time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling that the player starts to move because the load on the player is relieved.

A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the engaging surfaces of the transmitting means and the releasing means are formed in a saw-tooth shape that engage with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage. That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means move toward and away from each other, the transmission means and the release means collide with each other at this plane, and the release means is disengaged. It is possible to suppress the movement along the direction of approaching and separating from the means to be stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate early.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs between when the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction and when the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by:

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission can be canceled without being limited to any one operation mode. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is the following for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means when there is a difference between whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D6 is similar in that the operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operation direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the drive means is the same. Since the action after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by combining the difference in the operating mode of the operating means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the degree of expectation for a big win, the player is instructed to operate the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operating mode of the operating means changes. can be supervised.

In addition, since the difference in operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the degree of expectation for the big win without watching the operation of the operation means. can be done. However, the drive means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the direction of action cannot be recognized from the vibration sound. can be made to watch over the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the protrusion of the cam based on the rotation of the cam>
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; biasing means for biasing the operating means in a direction from the first position to the second position; and operating means for moving from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means. terminating means for variably forming the movement terminating end of the first means, wherein the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means; 1 means includes releasing load means for applying a load to the first means for releasing the engagement with the operating means, and releasing the engagement by the releasing load means and terminating the movement of the operating means in the terminating means. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a cam-operated and movable operating means is fixed at a first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, whereby the urging force of the urging means expands and operates. , There is a game machine that can change the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation by the termination means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation of the operation means is changed according to the phase of the cam when the fixation is released, the phase of the cam when the fixation is released varies in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation are driven by separate driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the game machine E1, the releasing load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means by the terminal means and the driving means for moving the release load means can be used together, so the number of driving means can be reduced.

A game machine E2 characterized in that, in the game machine E1, the change in the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the position of the release load means can be changed based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detecting means such as position sensors for detecting the state of the load release means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method for switching the state of the load release means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the load release means is composed of a projection that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotational cycle of the cam and the projection, or , a method of desynchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection in other phases.

In the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load applied from the first means, and the operation of the release load means causes the release load means and the transmission means to operate. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that it is possible to switch whether or not to operate synchronously with.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not to operate synchronously with the transmission means, the synchronous state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotating shaft of the first rotating member, and the release load means includes a rotating second rotating member. A gaming machine E4 comprising members, wherein the rotation periods of the first rotating member and the second rotating member are different.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single drive means, but the rotation cycles are different, so that the second rotating means can be operated at a predetermined speed. A plurality of phases of the first rotary member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of end positions when the operating means is held at the first position and then released and moved toward the second position. , can expand the range of production. For example, an effect of gradually moving the end position away from the first position or an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device has a first position for the operation means and a second position reached by the operation means when the player performs an operation from the first position. A game machine comprising vibrating means having a vibrating portion configured to be movable between and vibrating; and receiving means arranged to be able to contact with the vibrating portion, wherein the operating means is arranged at the first position Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut against the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operating means that can be operated by the player and vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, regardless of whether the operation means is operated or not, when the vibration means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operation means or the frame of the game machine. Alternatively, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the game machine, in the case of performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. . Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the operation means. mode), there is a problem that the vibration may not start in time before releasing the hand, and the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion contacts the receiving means is determined depending on whether the operating means is placed at the first position or is placed at the second position by being operated by the player. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operating means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pressing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand regardless of the mode of operation by the player. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the game machine F1, the vibration means is arranged to protrude in the occupation area occupied when the operation means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operation means moves to the second position. The game machine F2 changes to the abutting state by moving the vibrating means out of the occupied area.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operation means, thereby changing from the separated state to the contact state. The strength of contact between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed, and the strength of transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the player's operation strength can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibrating means without any particular change in the driving mode.

A game machine F3 characterized in that, in the game machines F1 or F2, the vibration means is supported by the receiving means via support means having spring elasticity.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, it is possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means, prevent transmission of vibration, and suppress displacement occurring in the vibrating means during vibration.

A game machine F4 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, in the contact state, the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the extension and contraction of the supporting means can give momentum when the vibrating part moves in the direction of approaching the receiving means.

The game machine F5 in the game machine F3, wherein the support means has a deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means that is lower than a deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means. .

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the direction in which the support means deforms can be finely set when the operation means is operated and interferes with the support means due to the difference in deformation resistance of the support means. can.

Thus, even if the amount of movement of the operating means is slightly different, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. .

As a method for differentiating the deformation resistance, in the case where the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending rubber legs along the movement direction of the operating means, or a method in which the support means surrounds the vibrating means. A method of manufacturing a rubber member by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance for each direction when it is composed of a rubber member; , and a coil spring that biases the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means.

A game machine F6 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, the portion with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operation means, but the vibration is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is separate from the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, thereby suppressing a state in which a load is applied to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, among the frame parts of the game machine, the part near the upper tray to which the game balls are supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc. Examples include a portion that may be touched by hands, a housing portion that partially encloses the operation means, and the like.

<One-touch attachment between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured such that the operation means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means is operated by a player. and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, wherein the transmission means comprises a deformation portion that elastically deforms due to an overload. Gaming machine G1 to play.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means. There is a game machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the player holds and fixes the operation means, if the drive means generates a driving force for driving the operation means, the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operation means and the transmission means There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the motor and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformable portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the drive means and the transmission means It is possible to relax the load applied to the connection part with.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deforming portion constitutes a connection portion of the cam member with the rotating shaft, and the elasticity of the deforming portion causes the cam member to move toward the rotating shaft. A game machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of is generated.

According to the game machine G2, the deforming part has a role of a part responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means and a role of a part generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the transmission member by sharing the functions. For example, separate securing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member has a projecting portion projecting parallel to the rotation shaft, the projecting portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion causes the cam member to On the other hand, a gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the projecting portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to construct the cam member and the projecting portion as one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotating shaft tilts with respect to the cam member. Compared to the case where the cam member is slid relative to the cam member, the cam member can be easily constructed from a single member, and the members can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the elastic deformation resistance of the deforming portion is greater than that of the rotating shaft in comparison with the first rotating direction in which the cam member is rotated about a straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the projecting portion. A gaming machine characterized in that deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which rotation is performed around a straight line perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the projecting portion and the extending direction of the rotation shaft. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformation portion different for each direction, the state after the deformation portion is elastically deformed when viewed from the rotation axis direction is more Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the projecting tip of the projecting portion can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the projecting portion of the cam member can be displaced along the direction in which the projecting portion is to move, so that the elastic deformation of the deformation portion relieves the load generated between the projecting portion and the operating means. can do.

The game machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, wherein the deformation portion elastically deforms to change the posture of the cam member, The game machine G5 is characterized in that the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformable portion elastically deforms, thereby changing the attitude of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member are brought into contact with each other. contact, the movement resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the gaming machine G6 comprises detection means for detecting that at least part of the cam member is tilted with respect to an axis.

Here, in a situation where an overload is applied to the operating device and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not, for example, the displacement expected by driving the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of a deviation from , it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period of time before the occurrence of the overload is detected. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting displacement deviation becomes smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the structure of the detection means and the higher the cost. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of an overload at a low cost and at an early stage.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time when the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member, without the need to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the driving means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent balls with threads. Game machine H>
In a game machine provided with a foul ball passage through which foul balls flowing back toward a launching device, among game balls shot into a game area, can pass, the foul ball passage permits passage of the falling game balls. The game machine H1 is characterized by comprising a one-way obstruction means for obstructing the movement of objects flowing backward.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, where a thread cutting blade is arranged inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper tray to the launcher, and the game ball with the thread connected is driven into the game area. There is a game machine with a function to prevent (cut the thread) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024179). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth when the ball is shot, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. It may be returned to the player side as a foul ball. For this reason, for example, a cheating tool is prepared in which game balls are connected to both ends of a string, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the string is shot with a weak firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and be returned to the player. By hitting the other game ball connected to the other end of the string into the game area while gripping one of the game balls that have been drawn, the string can be removed from the guide path and passed through the foul ball passage to the other side. Since it is possible to create a state in which one game ball and the other game ball are connected by a string, a load is applied from the outside to the string connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball placed in the game area There is a problem that there is a possibility that it may be possible to obtain illicit profits by manipulating the

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball using the string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage is performed, the one-way obstruction means However, by interfering with the movement of the string in the reverse direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illicit profits.

A game machine H2 characterized in that the foul ball path in the game machine H1 has a bent portion for bending a downflow path of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the string guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the string can be quickly cut.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion is provided with a load means on the inner corner side of the bending, which does not apply a load to the game ball flowing down but applies a load to the object flowing backward.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, it is possible to apply a load to the backflowing object (for example, a thread-like member) by the load means.

In the game machine H3, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the load means is arranged in a concave portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed part, collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H3 or H4, the gaming machine H5 comprises regulation means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the restricting means restricts the outward movement of the load means in the foul ball passage. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the on-line member from weakening due to the deformation of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, a receiving tray is provided as a tray on the front side of the front door for the foul balls to reach first, and the receiving tray is a portion for discharging the game balls paid out from the payout device. The game machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharge part is arranged above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the game balls paid out from the payout device pass in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage. To reduce the durability of the string by intentionally hitting the put out game ball to apply the load when the string guided to the game area is used to apply the load to the other game ball. be able to.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the put-out ball discharge part that discharges the game balls put out from the pay-out device to the receiving tray, which is the tray where the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door. , a game machine H7 characterized by being positioned below the lower end of the discharge-side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H6, a cheating act was performed in which a string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage was used to apply a load to the other game ball. In this case, the thread can be easily damaged by the game balls that are paid out.

<Structure of board holding down. Game machine I>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means receives the game means. A state changing means is provided for changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state, wherein the state changing means changes the gaming means to the usable state. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising an approach means for approaching the game means from the one side when setting the above.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is rotatable in a rotational direction parallel to the front surface of the game board and the game board is fixed to the inner frame, and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a game machine provided with a fixing means for holding (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the game board is pushed into the position of the use state, if the game board is pushed in halfway, it can be pushed again. Therefore, there is a problem that the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the state changing means has a means for approaching the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is incomplete, the approaching means contacts the game board and applies a pushing force, thereby exerting an effect that the game board can be pushed to the use state position.

In the game machine I1, the state changing means displaces the game means to the one side as the game means is changed to an unusable state. .

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the game means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the game means is changed to the unusable state, so that the game means can be removed. It is effective in improving the working efficiency of the work.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the state changing means makes the game means unusable and the proximity means retreats to the outside of the game means. Gaming machine I3.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1 or I2, the proximity means retracts to the outside of the game means, so that it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of removing the game means. Since this is performed along with disabling the means, the working efficiency can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I3, the game machine I4 is provided with contact means for receiving a load from the game means when the state changing means is changed to the usable state.

According to the game machine I4, since the contact means receives a load from the game means to change the state of the state changing means to the usable state, the operation of pressing the game means against the state changing means causes the usable state as a series of flows. can change state to

In the gaming machine I4, the game means is supported by a shaft on one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means by approaching the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, the width of the game means can be used to efficiently apply a load to the contact means via the game means.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I5, there is provided closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means, and the closing means is disabled by the state changing means making the game means unusable. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by comprising a closing regulation part that prevents the opening on one side of the gaming means from being closed when the state is maintained.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means puts the gaming means into a usable state depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. You can decide whether to As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means is maintained in an unusable state.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from getting stuck. Game machine J>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means being connected to the game means. A game machine J1, characterized in that it comprises an arranging means arranged on a path that communicates with the outside, wherein the arranging means is constructed so as to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of points.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-26573. ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is only one anti-fraud section, and there is a problem that the anti-fraud effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the game machine J1, the arranging means is arranged in the path where the piano wire is likely to be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of points. can improve the effect of

In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different in first means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a first location and second means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a second location. A game machine J2 characterized by suppressing entry of a member from the outside by a method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means differs in the method of suppressing the entry of members from the outside between the first location and the second location. Entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed as compared with the case where the number of is increased.

In addition, the method of suppressing the intrusion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of restricting entry by blocking a route, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the placement means comprises an intrusion control portion formed in a cup shape that opens outward of the receiving means.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed in the shape of a cup, so that the intruding member can be prevented from further intrusion.

In the game machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting electric wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry control section in a route from the outside to the game means. Characterized game machine J4.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J3, when a fraudulent act of penetrating the entry control part with high heat occurs, the change (disconnection due to heat, etc.) caused in the wiring due to the high heat is detected. It is possible to easily produce the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any one of game machines J1 to J4, game machine J5 is characterized in that said placement means comprises elimination means for guiding a member entering from the outside to an elimination area far from the game means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the member entering from the outside is guided to the resolution area far from the game means by the arranging means. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member entering from the outside from reaching the game means.

<Structure of five decorative plates. Including fraud prevention. Game machine K>
a first means and a second means arranged oppositely along a first direction and connected by at least one side; A gaming machine comprising a third means for connecting the first means and the second means, wherein the connection direction of the connecting part is set in a second direction that intersects the first direction A gaming machine K1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, first means and second means arranged to face each other and connected on at least one side, and disposed between the first means and second means along the first direction There is a gaming machine comprising a third means that However, in the above-described conventional game machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as adhesion or screwing, and when the first means and the second means are connected, the load along the first direction is the first. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being hung up on the third means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the third means It is possible to reduce the load applied from Thereby, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

A game machine K2 characterized in that, in the game machine K1, the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 comprises connected means connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, wherein the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means A gaming machine K3 characterized by being connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction of approaching and fitting them to each other.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, it is provided with a connected means connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. Thereby, even if a fraudulent act of breaking the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the fraudulent act can be detected early.

In the game machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening and fixing direction is the same as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any one of game machines K3 to K5, light irradiation means for irradiating light toward said first means or second means side and fixed to said connected means, and one of said first means or second means a light guiding means fixed to a member of the light emitting means and capable of introducing the light emitted by the light emitting means.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent positional deviation between the first and second means and the light guide means.

A game machine K7 characterized in that a game machine K7 is characterized by comprising contact means for surface contact in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machine K6, a space corresponding to the size of the abutting means is maintained in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means. can be done. This prevents the gap between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposing direction and is displaced. can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposing direction when an illegal attempt is made to disassemble the first means or the second means. can do.

<Point L for utilizing curved light guiding means. As a point, unachieved>
A light guide means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in an irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projecting means arranged opposite to the light guide means and onto which the light that has passed through the light guide means is projected, The game machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means comprises a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitting light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means has the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion It is possible to change the luminescence intensity of the projection target means depending on the part.

In the game machine L1, the projection target means is characterized in that the concave surface opposing portion is made of a light-transmissive material, and the convex surface opposing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave surface opposing portion. Gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion, the light emitted from the light guiding means is condensed at the concave facing portion. The production effect of the production by the light can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, a reverse projection means is provided on the opposite side of the projection target means with the light guide means therebetween, and the light passing through the light guide means is projected. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light means facing the concave surface and a portion of the light guiding means facing the convex surface are made of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L2, the part of the counterprojection means arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide means and the part arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide means emit light. Since they are made of a material with substantially the same transmittance, by making the same light incident on the light guiding means, the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the means to be projected and the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the opposite projection means can be achieved. can be different from

<Arrangement structure of the bass reflex speaker. Game machine M>
first means and second means arranged opposite to each other and fixed to form an internal space in the fixed state; acoustic means disposed so as to enter at least a part of the internal space; A gaming machine M1, characterized by comprising bending means for constructing a bending path in an internal space.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame, and effects are produced by sounds output from the speakers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16088). In such a game machine, the vibration wave that advances toward the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left-right center position of the game machine and sent out to the outside of the game machine. , there is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the horizontal width of the game machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means constitutes a curved path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by configuring a path longer than the length of one piece, the By removing the restriction on the left-right width, it is possible to make the vibration wave travel an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that loads are applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is a rib-like member extending from at least one of the first means and the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2, characterized in that it has a protruding part protruding from the second means, and a protruding tip of the protruding part abuts on the other of the first means and the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, the projecting end of the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means and the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluid such as vibration waves from passing through the gap in the curved path.

In the game machine M1 or M2, an opening connecting the internal space and the outside is provided, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the sound means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is closed by

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the sound means, so it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls forming the internal space can be closed appropriately in a state where the passage member passes from the internal space to the outside.

The game machine M4, wherein the opening is arranged closer to the sound means than the protruding part in the game machine M3.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, when the wiring of the sound means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the sound means is prevented from being caught by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any one of game machines M1 to M4, support fastening means to which at least one of the first means and second means is fastened and fixed, and presentation means arranged below the support fastening means and performing presentation accompanying a game. and wherein the effect means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M1 to M4, the supporting and fastening means is supported by the effect means from below, so that the supporting and fastening means does not have to press the space used for the effect. things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, reverse rotating flower. Petals that stop on the way. Game machine N>
a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; and a second displacement means switchable between a non-following state displacing in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, wherein at least the second displacement means is in the following state, A game machine N1, further comprising third displacement means for displacing in a direction opposite to a displacement direction of said second displacement means by a driving force of said driving means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates in the vicinity of the extension end. When doing so, there is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion and contraction direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the performance becomes slow and the performance effect is not sufficient. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means displaces in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, so that the displacement speed of the second displacement means , can be visually recognized as a velocity based on the third displacement means. Therefore, compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized by comprising resistance means for generating resistance against the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. Game machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means by the action of the resistance means, and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of modes of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means using a driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means. be able to.

A game machine N4 characterized in that, in the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means has a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and is visually recognized by the player. It can also serve as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 is characterized by comprising a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, the shaft means coaxially and rotatably supporting the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means. Gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, since the shaft means functioning as the rotating shaft of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, the first displacement means, To prevent the displacement resistance from increasing excessively because the attitude of any one of the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, and the attitudes of the other members or means also follow and change. can be done.

<Utilization of shell buttons and holes. As a point, unachieved>
In a game machine comprising first means and housing means capable of housing the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: a first opening; and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operation means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operation means from below, and that the operation means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate. See JP-A-2012-048970). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, there is a problem that the foreign object remains inside and may induce a malfunction. .

On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 is provided with the second opening formed with a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the accommodation means includes a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. game machine O2.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support part.

A gaming machine O3, in the gaming machine O1 or O2, wherein the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistance portion. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of allowing a predetermined solid object to pass through and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any one of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are configured from a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are configured based on the shape of the solid object in the opposite direction. A solid object can be easily removed through the part.

A gaming machine O5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object can be visually recognized by the player when the second opening is partially blocked by the solid object. can be made As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the containing means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain. .

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, A gaming machine Z1 in any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, A game machine Z2 in any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, A game machine Z3 in any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, and O1 to O5, wherein said game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. When doing so, there is a game machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion and contraction direction of the first displacement means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580).
However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the performance effect. The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine with a good presentation effect.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 comprises a base member, first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means. , a second displacement means capable of switching between a following state displacing in the displacement direction of said first displacement means and a non-following state displacing in a direction different from the displacement direction of said first displacement means. and a third displacement means that is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means at least when the second displacement means is in the follow-up state.
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 2 is the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 1, further comprising resistance means for generating resistance against displacement of the second displacement means, the resistance means being in the following state and the non-following state. can be changed.
The gaming machine according to Technical Thought 3 is the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 2, wherein the resistance means moves the second displacement means using a driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. state can be changed.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, it is possible to improve the presentation effect.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, by changing the switching point of the presentation mode, it is possible to improve the presentation effect.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, it is possible to improve the presentation effect without adding a driving means.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
12 inner frame (receiving means)
13 game board (game means)
14 front frame (blocking means)
14d2 Auxiliary projection (part of recess)
17 upper plate (part of receiving plate)
50 lower plate (part of receiving plate)
68 return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
145, 9145, 10145 Foul ball passage (foul ball passage)
159 opening and closing regulation part (closure regulation part)
173 long cover member (part of elimination means)
178 Inverted cup portion (part of arrangement means, first means, intrusion control part, part of elimination means)
180 binding movable member (part of arranging means, second means, supporting means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300
Operation device 310, 2310, 3310, 4310 tilting device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311gL, 3311gL Left side detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
311gR Right detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 shaft (shaft)
315 torsion spring (biasing means)
324L Left side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R right side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 upper frame member (part of housing means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 upper bearing (part of support)
340, 5340, 6340 drive device (drive means, first drive means)
341 body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 transmission shaft (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engagement tooth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engagement tooth)
343d coil spring (biasing means)
344, 6344, 7344 disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d connecting pin (protruding part)
345 arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating pawl member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 Speaker (Sound Means)
453 Speaker connection wire (passing member)
460 front assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 passage forming rib (bending means, projecting portion)
480 rear side assembly (second means)
481Ha auxiliary projection (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing protrusion (part of opening)
487 passage forming rib (bending means, projecting portion)
500 right panel unit (directing means)
500L left stack unit (first means)
500R right stack unit (second means)
510 support plate portion (connected means)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 531c Support hole (part of connecting part)
532 inclined rib portion (abutment means)
540 light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b projecting portion (part of connecting portion)
600 board support device (state changing means)
620 Rotating front pawl member (approaching means)
640 post-rotation claw member (contact means)
801 Support substrate (base member)
802 petals (a part of the second displacement means)
804 central motor (driving means)
830 Rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 central shaft member (shaft means)
880 loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul Ball Passage (Foul Ball Passage)
2347 rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 slide pawl member (part of retaining means)
2888 Regulating part (resisting means)
4321d upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 drive motor (low water resistant part)
5412 weight member (vibration part, part of repulsion means)
5420 flexible member (part of support means, repulsion means)
5430 accommodation member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 disk member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotary member)
7344L1, 7344R1 disc member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engagement member (release load means)
8320 lower frame member (part of housing means)
8326a First through hole (part of second opening)
8326b Second through hole (part of second opening)
8326c Third through hole (part of second opening)
9142a right slanted surface (a part of the payout ball discharge part)
9150, 10150 sheet metal member (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recess)
10145d rolling plate portion (restricting means)
E1 notification device (detection means)
P1a deformed part (deformed part)
S52 end area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped path (bend)
V13, V14 Gap

Claims (3)

a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; A game machine comprising second displacement means switchable between a non-following state displacing in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means,
A game machine characterized by comprising third displacement means for displacing in a direction opposite to a displacement direction of said second displacement means by a driving force of said driving means at least when said second displacement means is in a follow-up state. comprising resistance means for generating resistance against displacement of the second displacement means;
2. A game machine according to claim 1, wherein said resistance means is configured to change a switching point between said follow-up state and said non-follow-up state. 3. The resistance device according to claim 2, wherein the resistance device is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement device by using a driving force when operating the second displacement device in the non-following state. game machine.

Images